817162
25
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/581
Nächste Seite
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner’s Man-
ual describes all models as well as all the stand-
ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Coun-
try-specific differences in the language variants
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
fitted with all features described. This is also the
case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner’s
Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle
model years. The online version is the current
valid Owner’s Manual version. Possible variations
to your vehicle may not be taken into account as
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles
and equipment to the state of the art and introdu-
ces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner’s Manual, any
supplementary documents and the digital Own-
er’s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics,
are subject to Copyright and other laws for the
protection of intellectual property. They may not
be copied for commercial purposes or for trans-
mission, nor changed and used on other websites.
Digital–inthe vehicleVehicle document walletDigital –onthe InternetDigital –asanApp
Familiarise yourself withthe con‐
tents of theOwner's Manual
directly via thevehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle"). Startwiththe quickguide,
discoveryour vehicle's highlights
or broaden your knowledgewith
useful tips.
Hereyou can find comprehen‐
sive informationabout operating
your vehicle and about services
and warranties in printed form.
Youcan find theOwner's Manual
on theMercedes-Benz home‐
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App
is available free-of-charge in
familiar App stores.
É2055842922Z102GËÍ
2055842922Z102
Apple®iOS AndroidTM
Order no. P205 1713 02 Part no. 205 5842922Z102
EditioJ2019-1a
C-Class Saloon
Owner'sManual
Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-BenzC-Class Saloon
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehi‐
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
Documentation team
Youare welcometoforward anyqueries or sug‐
gestions youmay have regarding this Owner's
Manual to thetechnical documentation team at
thefollowing address:
Daimler AG,HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart,Germany
©Daimler AG:not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehiclemanufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatalinjuries
if thefront passenger airbag is enabled
If thefront passenger front airbag is enabled,
achild on thefront passenger seat maybe
struck by thefront passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVERuse arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat withanENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG,DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYtothe
CHILD can occur.
Observe thechapter"Childreninthe vehicle". As at 07.01.18
Welcome to theworld of Mercedes-Benz
Before youfirst drive off, read this Owner's Man‐
ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your
vehicle. Foryour own safety and a longer operat‐
ing lifespan, follow the instructions and warning
notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding
them may lead to damage to thevehicle or per‐
sonal injury.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to:
RModel
Rorder
Rnational version
Ravailability
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a
left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi‐
cles, the layout of components and control ele‐
ments differs accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi‐
cles further.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reservestheright to
introduce changes in thefollowing areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The following are integral parts of thevehicle:
RDigital Owner's Manual
RPrinted Owner's Manual
Rservice booklet
Requipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in thevehicle at all
times. If you sell thevehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
2055842922Z102
2055842922Z102
Symbols ........................................................ 5
At aglance .................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Warning and indicator lamps ........................ 10
Overhead control panel ................................ 14
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18
Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 20
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ..........20
General notes............................................. 21
Protection of the environment ......................21
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ...................21
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts ......................22
Owner's Manual ...........................................23
Operating safety ...........................................23
Declaration of Conformity ............................ 25
Diagnostics connection ................................ 29
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 30
Vehicle registration ....................................... 30
Correct use of thevehicle ............................. 31
Information on the REACH regulation ........... 31
Implied warranty ...........................................31
QR code forrescue card ...............................31
Data storage .................................................31
Copyright ...................................................... 34
Occupant safety......................................... 35
Restraint system ...........................................35
Seat belts ..................................................... 37
Airbags ......................................................... 42
PRE-SAFE®system ....................................... 49
Safely transporting children in thevehi‐
cle ................................................................. 51
Notes on pets in thevehicle .......................... 76
Opening and closing .................................. 77
Key ...............................................................77
Doors ............................................................ 81
Boot .............................................................. 87
Roller sunblinds ............................................ 92
Side windows ............................................... 93
Sliding sunroof .............................................. 97
Anti-theft protection ................................... 102
Seats and stowing ................................... 106
Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐
tion ............................................................. 106
Seats .......................................................... 107
Steering wheel ............................................ 116
Easy entry and exit feature .........................118
Operating the memory function .................. 119
Stowage areas ............................................ 121
Cup holders ................................................ 132
Ashtray and cigarette lighter .......................134
Sockets ....................................................... 136
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
and connection with theexterior aerial ...... 138
Fitting/removing thefloor mats ................. 139
Light and sight .......................................... 141
Exterior lighting ........................................... 141
Interior lighting ........................................... 150
Changing bulbs (only forvehicles with
halogen headlamps) .................................... 151
Windscreen wipers and windscreen
washer system ............................................ 154
Mirrors ........................................................ 156
Operating the sun visors ............................. 159
2Contents
Climate control ......................................... 161
Overview of climate control systems ........... 161
Operating the climate control system ......... 162
Driving and parking .................................. 172
Driving ........................................................ 172
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ........................... 184
Manual transmission ..................................186
Automatic transmission .............................. 187
Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 193
Refuelling .................................................... 193
Parking .......................................................199
Driving and driving safety systems .............209
Trailer hitch ................................................ 268
Bicycle rack function .................................. 272
Vehicle towing instructions .........................274
Instrument Display and on-board
computer.................................................. 275
Instrument display overview .......................275
Overview of the buttons on thesteering
wheel ..........................................................276
Operates the on-board computer ............... 277
Setting the design ....................................... 278
Setting the additional value range .............. 279
Overview of displays on the multifunc‐
tion display .................................................279
Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 280
Menus and submenus ................................ 280
Head-up Display ......................................... 286
Multimedia system .................................. 288
Overview and operation .............................. 288
System settings .......................................... 297
Navigation .................................................. 306
Telephone ...................................................332
Online and Internet functions ..................... 355
Media .........................................................362
Radio .......................................................... 372
Sound ......................................................... 375
Maintenance and care ............................. 378
ASSYST PLUS service interval display .........378
Engine compartment .................................. 379
Cleaning and care .......................................387
Breakdown assistance ............................ 397
Emergency .................................................. 397
Flat tyre ...................................................... 399
Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 406
Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 411
Electrical fuses ............................................ 417
Wheels and tyres ..................................... 420
Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐
acteristics ...................................................420
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tyres ...........................................................420
Notes on snow chains ................................ 420
Tyre pressure .............................................. 421
Wheel change .............................................430
Emergency spare wheel .............................. 440
Collapsible spare wheel .............................. 441
Technical data .......................................... 444
Notes on technical data ............................. 444
On-board electronics ..................................444
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number overview ............................ 446
Operating fluids .......................................... 448
Contents 3
Vehicle data ................................................ 457
Trailer hitch ................................................ 459
Display messages and warning/indi‐
cator lamps .............................................. 463
Display messages .......................................463
Warning and indicator lamps .......................519
Index ......................................................... 535
4Contents
In this Owner's Manual, you will find thefollow‐
ing symbols:
&DANGER Danger due to not observing
thewarning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
#Observe thewarning notices.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe envi‐
ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behaviour or
environmentally responsible disposal.
#Observe environmental notes.
*NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of
risks which may lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
#Observe notes on material damage.
%Useful instructions or further information
that could be helpful to you.
XInstruction
(Qpage) Further information on a topic
Display Information on the multifunction dis‐
play/media display
+Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
*Corresponding submenus, which are
to be selected in the multimedia sys‐
tem
*Marks a cause
Symbols 5
Left-hand-drive vehicles
6At aglance Cockpit
1Steering wheel gearshift paddles 190
2Combination switch 143
3DIRECT SELECT lever 187
4Media display 288
5Glove compartment 122
6Start/stop button 173
7Climate control systems 162
8Control elements forthe multimedia system 288
9Hazard warning lights 144
APASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp 47
BStowage compartment 122
CTouchpad 289
DControl knob forvolume and switching sound
on/off
288
ESwitches the multimedia system on/off 288
FRear-window roller sunblind 92
GECO start/stop function 181
HActive Parking Assist 256
ISets thevehicle level 241
JDYNAMIC SELECT switch 185
KControl panel forthe multimedia system
(steering wheel)
276
LAdjusts thesteering wheel 117
MControl panel forthe on-board computer 276
Operates cruise control or thevariable limiter 223
Operates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 227
NDiagnostics connection 29
OOpens the bonnet 380
PElectric parking brake 205
QLight switch 141
RControl panel for:
Active Steering Assist 233
Active Lane Keeping Assist 267
At aglance Cockpit 7
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 246 Head-up display 287
8At aglance Cockpit
Instrument display (standard)
10 At aglance Warning and indicator lamps
1Speedometer 275
2LDistance warning 527
3ÐElectric powersteering malfunction 533
4#! Turn signal lights 143
5Multifunction display 279
6Rev counter 275
7;Engine diagnostics 528
8%Diesel engine: preglow
9!Electric parking brake applied (red) 521
AJBrakes (red) 521
B?Coolant too hot/cold 528
CCoolant temperature display 275
DJBrakes (yellow) 521
E!Electric parking brake (yellow) 521
F!ABS malfunction 521
G6Restraint system 521
HüSeat belt not fastened 526
IKHigh beam 143
JLLow beam 141
K8Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
528
LFuel level indicator
MTStanding lights 141
NRRear fog light 142
OhTyre pressure monitor 531
PåESP®OFF 521
Q÷ESP®521
At aglance Warning and indicator lamps 11
Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit
12 At aglance Warning and indicator lamps
1Speedometer 275
2#! Turn signal lights 143
3Multifunction display 279
4RRear fog light 142
5KHigh beam 143
LLow beam 141
TStanding lights 141
6Rev counter 275
7?Coolant too hot/cold 528
8Coolant temperature display 275
9LDistance warning 527
AüSeat belt not fastened 526
BhTyre pressure monitor 531
CÙElectric powersteering malfunction 533
D!Electric parking brake (yellow) 521
E!Electric parking brake applied (red) 521
F6Restraint system 521
GïTrailer hitch not operational 533
HJBrakes (red) 521
I8Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
528
JFuel level indicator
KäSuspension malfunction 527
LJBrakes (yellow) 521
M#Electrical fault 528
N;Engine diagnostics 528
O%Diesel engine: preglow
P!ABS malfunction 521
QåESP®OFF 521
÷ESP®521
At aglance Warning and indicator lamps 13
14 At aglance Overhead control panel
1Sun visors 159
2pSwitches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
150
3|Switches the interior lighting control
on/off
150
4SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system)
5cSwitches the front interior lighting
on/off
150
6uSwitches therear interior lighting
on/off
150
7pSwitches theright-hand reading lamp
on/off
150
8Service call button (Mercedes me connect)
9Spectacles compartment 123
A3Opens/closes the panoramic sliding
sunroof
97
Opens/closes theroller sunblinds 97
BInside rear-view mirror 157
At aglance Overhead control panel 15
16 At aglance Door control panel and seat adjustment
1Operates the memory function 119
2Adjusts the seats electrically 112
3Switches the seat heating on/off 115
4Switches the seat ventilation on/off 116
5Operates the outside mirrors 156
6Opens/closes the boot lid 87
7WOpens/closes theright side window 93
8WOpens/closes the left side window 93
9WOpens/closes therear right side win‐
dow
93
AWOpens/closes therear left side window 93
BChild safety lock fortherear side windows 75
COpens the door 82
D&%Locks/unlocks thevehicle 82
ESets the seat fore-and-aft position 107
FOnly vehicles with Seat Comfort Package:
adjusts the seat cushion length
109
GAdjusts the 4-way lumbar support 112
HSeat adjustment using the multimedia system 114
IAdjusts the head restraints 112
JOnly vehicles with Seat Comfort Package:
adjusts the seat cushion inclination
109
KAdjusts the seat height 109
LAdjusts the seat backrest inclination 109
At aglance Door control panel and seat adjustment 17
18 At aglance Emergencies and breakdowns
1QR code for accessing therescue card 31
2Safetyvests 397
3Buttons forthe SOS emergency call system
and breakdown assistance
4To check and top up operating fluids 448
5To tow-start and towaway 411
6Flat tyre 399
7Starting assistance 409
8Hazard warning lights 144
9Fire extinguisher 399
AFuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyre
pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
therescue card
193
BTo tow-start and towaway 411
CTIREFIT kit 401
DFirst-aid kit (soft sided) 398
EWarning triangle 398
At aglance Emergencies and breakdowns 19
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5ÕOwner's Manual
#Select a menu item.
In addition, you can also call up the Owner's
Manual within a main function (e.g. via Informa-
tion on media).
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func‐
tion and operation of thevehicle and the multi‐
media system.
For safetyreasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
deactivated while driving.
The Digital Owner's Manual contains thefollow‐
ing menu items:
RSearch: allows youto search precisely for
keywords.
RQuick start: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your
vehicle immediately.
RTips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle
in certain situations.
RMessages: provides you with further informa‐
tion about the messages in the instrument
cluster.
RBookmarks: provides you with a list of all the
bookmarks you have stored yourself.
1Picture
2Menu
3Navigation window
Some sections of the Digital Owner's Manual,
such as warnings, can be made visible by high‐
lighting and pressing them.
%The Owner's Manual can also be found in the
Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all common
app stores.
20 Digital Owner's Manual
Protection of the environment
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of your vehicle is
directly related to thewayyou operate your
vehicle.
Help to protect the environment by operating
your vehicle in an environmentally responsi‐
ble manner. Please observe thefollowing rec‐
ommendations on operating conditions and
personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor‐
rect.
#Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no
longer need them).
#Adhere to the service intervals.
Aregularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
#Always have maintenance work carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
#Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
#Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary.
#Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from thevehicle in front.
#Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking.
#Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ôof its maximum
engine speed.
#Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
#Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO
display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
+ENVIRONMENTALNOTE Environmental
pollution caused by irresponsible dis‐
posal of the high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials
which are harmful to the environment.
#Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU countries only:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-
of-Life Vehicles Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dis‐
mantlers has been established foryouto return
your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
points free of charge. This makes an important
contribution to closing therecycling circle and
conserving resources.
For further information about therecycling and
disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and thetake-
General notes 21
back conditions, please visit the national
Mercedes-Benz website foryour country.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components
Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned
components and parts with the same quality
as new parts. The same entitlement from the
implied warranty is valid as for new parts.
#Use recycled reconditioned compo‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.
*NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐
ciency of therestraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as
control units and sensors fortherestraint
systems, may be installed in thefollowing
areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcentre console
Rlateralroof frame
#Do not install accessory parts such as
audio systems in these areas.
#Do not carry out repairs or welding.
#Have accessories retrofitted at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety which have not
been approvedby Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐
function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels
and accessories that have been specifically
approvedforyour vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver‐
sion parts and accessories that have been spe‐
cifically approvedforyour vehicle model fortheir
reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing
market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to
assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore
accepts no responsibility forthe use of such
parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they
have been officially approved or independently
approvedby atesting centre.
Certain parts are only officially approvedfor
installation or modification if they comply with
legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine
Parts meet the approval requirements. The use
of non-approved parts may invalidate thevehi‐
cle's general operating permit.
22 General notes
This is the case in thefollowing situations:
Rthevehicle type is different from that for
which thevehicle's general operating permit
was granted.
Rother road users could be endangered.
Rtheexhaust gas or noise levelgets worse.
Always specify thevehicle identification number
(VIN) (/page 446) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz Genuine Parts.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard and optional equipment available for
your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual
going to press. Country-specific differences are
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit‐
ted with all features described. This is also the
case for systems and functions relevant to
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle
may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The original purchase agreement foryour vehicle
contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐
cle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are
important documents and should be kept in the
vehicle.
Operating safety
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions
or system failures.
#Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well any required
repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
aresult of incorrect modifications to
electronic component parts
Modification to electronic components, their
software or wiring could impair their function
and/or the function of other networked com‐
ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
to safety could also be affected.
As a result, they may no longer function as
intended and/or endanger the operating
safety of thevehicle.
#Nevertamper with the wiring and elec‐
tronic component parts or their soft‐
ware.
#You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you modify the on-board electronics, thegen‐
eral operating permit is rendered invalid.
General notes 23
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data".
&WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
materials on hot parts of theexhaust
system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of theexhaust system.
#When driving on unpavedroads or off-
road, regularly check thevehicle under‐
side.
#Remove trapped plants or other flam‐
mable material, in particular.
#If there is damage, consult a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle
In thefollowing situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to thevehicle:
Rthevehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high kerb or an unpavedroad
Rthevehicle is driven toofast over an
obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot‐
hole
Ra heavy object strikesthe underbody or
chassis components
In situations such as this, the body, the
underbody, chassis components, wheels or
tyres could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
an accident, may not absorb the loads that
arise as intended.
If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can collect between the underbody and
the underbody panelling. These materials
may ignite if they come into contact with hot
parts on theexhaust system.
#Have thevehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
or
#If driving safety is impaired while con‐
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
thevehicle immediately in accordance
with the traffic conditions, and contact
aqualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐
tem (EQ Boost technology)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching
damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐
tem contain individual high-voltage compo‐
nents. These high-voltage components are
under high voltage.
If you modify component parts of these high-
voltage components or touch damaged com‐
ponent parts, you may be electrocuted.
High voltage components may be damaged
in an accident, although the damage may not
be visible.
#Never perform modifications to compo‐
nent parts of high-voltage components.
24 General notes
#Nevertouch damaged component parts
of high-voltage components.
#Nevertouch component parts of high-
voltage components after an accident.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
contain high voltage components. These compo‐
nents are marked with a high voltage label:
All work on high voltage components must be
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of Conformity
Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of thevehicle
components has been checked and certified
according to the currently valid version of Regu‐
lation UN R10.
Wireless vehicle components
The following information applies to all compo‐
nents of thevehicle and the information systems
and communication devices integrated into the
vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio
waves:
The components of this vehicle that receive
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with
the basic requirements and all other relevant
conditions of Directive 2014/53/EU. You can
obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Below are the addresses of the manufacturers of
wireless components. The addresses cannot be
displayed on the equipment due to its size or
type.
Tyre pressure monitoring sensors
Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park,
Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland
Remote locking system
Marquardt GmbH, Schloßstraße 16,78604 Rie‐
theim, Germany
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG,Steeger
Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75,
59552 Lippstadt, Germany
Remote locking system control unit
Marquardt GmbH, Schloßstraße 16,78604 Rie‐
theim, Germany
Leopold Kostal GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11,
44227 Dortmund, Germany
Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemens‐
straße 12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany
Aerial modules
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH,
Stuttgarter Straße 45-51,72654 Neckartenzlin‐
gen, Germany
General notes 25
Kathrein Automotive GmbH & Co. KG,mer‐
ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
Door handles with near-field communication
function
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG,Steeger
Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Garage door openers
GenteX Corporation, 600 North Centennial
Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA
Sensor for interior monitoring
META Systems, Via Galimberti 9, 42124Reggio
Emilia, Italy
Radar sensors
Autoliv Electronics ASP Inc., 26545 American
Drive, Southfield, MI 48034, USA
ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems
GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau,
Germany
Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6,
71229 Leonberg, Germany
Mobile communication and telematics
Harman BeckerAutomotive Systems GmbH,
Postfach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, Germany
Panasonic Automotive & Industrial Systems
Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch-Straße 27-29,
63225 Langen, Germany
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, 2-3-33 Miwa,
Sanda-City, 669-1513 Hyogo, Japan
Wireless headphones
Harman BeckerAutomotive Systems GmbH,
Postfach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, Germany
Remote control
Ruwido Austria GmbH, stendorferStraße 8,
5202 Neumarkt, Austria
Valeo, 43 rue Bayen, 75017Paris, France
Remote control heater booster function
Digades GmbH, Äußere Weberstraße 20,
02763 Zittau, Germany
Wireless applications in thevehicle
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com‐
munications, Mercedes-Benz vehicles use the
following wireless applications.
26 General notes
Wireless applications in thevehicle
Frequency rangeTechnology Transmission output / magnetic field
strength
20 kHz (9–90 kHz)Remote locking system 72 dBμA/m at 10 m
125 kHz (119–135 kHz)Remote locking system 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
13.553–13.567 MHz Near-field communication 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) Remote locking system, garage door opener,
tyre pressure monitor 10 mW e.r.p.
868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) Remote control heater booster function, garage
door opener 25 mW e.r.p.
869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz)Remote control heater booster function, garage
door opener 25 mW e.r.p.
2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) Bluetooth®, Kleer, RLAN, remote controls, wire‐
less headphones
100 mW e.i.r.p.
5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) Sensor for interior monitoring, RLAN 25 mW e.i.r.p.
24.05–24.25 GHz* 24 GHz ISM radar 100 mW e.i.r.p.
General notes 27
Frequency rangeTechnology Transmission output / magnetic field
strength
24.25–26.65 GHz* 24 GHz UWB radar -41.3 dBm/MHz e.i.r.p. mean 0 dBm/
50 MHz peak e.i.r.p.
76–77 GHz 76 GHz radar 55 dBm peak e.i.r.p.
* Model series launched on the market before
April 2016.
Jack
Copy and translation of the original declaration
of conformity:
EC declaration of conformity
1.
The signatory, as a representative
Manufacturer:
BRANO a.s.
74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavs 1000,
Czech Republic
ID No.: 64-387-5933
VATReg. No.: CZ64-387-5933
declares, as our sole responsibility, that the
product:
2. a)
Designation:
Jack
Type, number:
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
B) A 240 580 00 18
C) A 639 580 02 18
Year of manufacture: 2015
Fulfils all relevant conditions
Directive No. 2006/42/EC
b)
Description and purpose of use:
The jack is only intended forraising the specified
vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc‐
tions affixedto the jack.
3.
Reference data of the harmonised standards or
specifications
A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20,
MBN 10435, AS 2693
B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN
10435
C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10
The technical documentation of the product is
stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa‐
tive forthe compilation of thetechnical docu‐
28 General notes
mentation: Director of theTechnical Department
Brano a.s.
4.
Hradec nad Moravicí
City
5.
05.05.2015
Date
Signed by
Director of Quality
TIREFIT kit
Copy and translation of the original declaration
of conformity:
EC declaration of conformity
In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC
We hereby declare that the product
Product designation: Daimler electric air pump
Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046
MB part no.: A 000 583 8200
complies with thefollowing relevant regulations:
2004/108/EC
Applied harmonised standards, in particular:
DIN EN 55014-1
DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06
Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH
Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau,
Germany
Authorised representative: IMS dept.
Date: June 2015
Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in thevehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems.
As a result, the operating safety of thevehi‐
cle could be affected.
#Only connect equipment to a diagnos‐
tics connection in thevehicle which is
approvedforyour vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of thevehicle.
#Stow all objects in thevehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
General notes 29
#Alwaysfitthefloor mats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that
there is always sufficient room forthe
pedals.
#Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
*NOTE Battery discharging from using
devices connected to the diagnostics
connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
#Check thecharge level of the battery.
#If thecharge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable
distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
mation being reset, forexample. This may lead
to thevehicle failing to meet therequirements of
the next emissions inspection during the main
inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
Aqualified specialist workshop has the neces‐
sary special skills, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out any necessary work on your
vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-rele‐
vant works.
Always have thefollowing work carried out on
your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:
Rsafety-relevant works
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Rmodifications as well as installations and
conversions
Rwork on electronic components
Rvehicles with 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ boost technology): work on
high voltage components of the 48 V on-
board electrical system
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service centre.
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi‐
cles. The quality or safety of thevehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi‐
cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra‐
tion data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been
registered in your name in thefollowing cases:
Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an
authorised specialist dealer.
Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at
a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
It is advisable to registeryour vehicle with a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
about any change in address or vehicle owner‐
30 General notes
ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre, forexample.
Correct use of thevehicle
If youremove any warning stickers,you or others
could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe thefollowing information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rtechnical data forthevehicle
Rtrafficrules and regulations
Rlaws and safetystandards pertaining to
motorvehicles
Information on the REACH regulation
EU and EFTA countries only:
The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EC) No.
1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates an informa‐
tion obligation for substances of very high con‐
cern (SVHC).
Daimler AG is acting to the best of its knowledge
to avoid the use and application of these SVHCs
and to enable the customer to handle theses
substances safely.According to supplier infor‐
mation and internal product information of
Daimler AG,SVHCs are known which are more
than 0.1 percent by weight in individual products
of this vehicle.
Further information can be found at:
Rhttp://www.daimler.com/reach
Rhttp://www.daimler.com/reach/en
Implied warranty
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle arising
from violation of these operating instruc‐
tions.
Damage to thevehicle can arise from viola‐
tion of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#Follow the instructions in these operat‐
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐
cle damage.
QR code forrescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
foryour vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
tains the most important information about your
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the
electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Electronic control units
Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle.
Some of these are necessary forthe safe opera‐
tion of your vehicle, while some assist you when
General notes 31
driving (driver assistance systems). In addition,
your vehicle provides comfort and entertainment
functions, which are also made possible by elec‐
tronic control units.
Electronic control units contain data memories
which can temporarily or permanently store
technical information about thevehicle's operat‐
ing state, component loads, maintenance
requirements and technical events or faults.
In general, this information documents thestate
of a component part, a module, a system or the
surroundings such as:
Roperating status of system components (e.g.
fill levels, battery status, tyre pressure)
Rstatus messages concerning thevehicle or
its individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐
eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐
tened seat belts)
Rmalfunctions or faults in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
Rinformation on events leading to vehicle
damage
Rsystem reactions in special driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐
bility control systems)
Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing the actual control unit
function, this data assists the manufacturer in
detecting and rectifying faults and optimising
vehicle functions. The majority of this data is
temporary and is only processed in thevehicle
itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored
in theevent or fault memory.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical data
from thevehicle can be read out by service net‐
work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐
ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services).
Services include repair services, maintenance
processes, warranty claims and quality assur‐
ance measures, forexample. The read out is per‐
formed via the legally prescribed port forthe
diagnostics connection in thevehicle. The
respective service network locations or third
parties collect, process and use the data. They
document technical statuses of thevehicle,
assist in finding faults and improving quality and
are transmitted to the manufacturer, if neces‐
sary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject
to product liability. Forthis, the manufacturer
requires technical data from vehicles.
Fault memories in thevehicle can be reset by a
service outlet as part of repair or maintenance
work.
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into thevehicle's comfort and info‐
tainment functions yourself.
This includes, forexample:
Rmultimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tosfor playback in an integrated multimedia
system
Raddress book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐
grated navigation system
Rentered navigation destinations
Rdata about the use of Internet services
This data can be saved locally in thevehicle or it
is located on a device which you have connected
to thevehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB flash drive
32 General notes
or MP3 player). If this data is stored in thevehi‐
cle, you can delete it at any time. This data is
sent to third parties only at your request, partic‐
ularly when you use online services in accord‐
ance with the settings that you have selected.
You can store or change convenience settings/
individualisations in thevehicle at any time.
Depending on the equipment, this includes, for
example:
Rsettings forthe seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions
Rsuspension and climate control settings
Rcustomisations such as interior lighting
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to thevehicle. You can controlthis by
means of the control elements integrated in the
vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone
can be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐
tain information is simultaneously transferred to
your smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration, this can
include:
Rgeneral vehicle data
Rposition data
This allows youto use selected apps on your
smartphone, such as navigation or music play‐
back. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and thevehicle; in particular, vehi‐
cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of
further data processing occurs is determined by
the provider of the specific app used. Which set‐
tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐
cific app and the operating system of your
smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
less network connection is enabled via thevehi‐
cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐
nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones).
Online functions can be used via the wireless
network connection. This includes online serv‐
ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐
ufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer's services
Regarding online services of the manufacturer,
the individual functions are described by the
manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Owner's
Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with
therelevant data protection information. Per‐
sonal data may be used forthe provision of
online services. Data is exchanged via a secure
connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated
IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐
cessed and used via the provision of services
exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or
with prior consent.
The services and functions (sometimes subject
to afee) can usually be activated or deactivated.
In some cases, this also applies to the entire
vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐
ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.
General notes 33
Third party services
If it is possible to use online services from other
providers, these services are subject to the data
protection and terms of use of theresponsible
provider. The manufacturer has no influence on
the content exchanged.
Please enquire, therefore, about the type, scope
and purpose of the collection and use of per‐
sonal data as part of third party services from
their respective provider.
Copyright
Information on free and open-source software
licences foryour vehicle's software can be found
on the data storage medium in your vehicle
document wallet and on the Internet together
with updates at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
34 General notes
Restraint system
Protection by therestraint system
The restraint system includes thefollowing com‐
ponents:
RSeat belt system
RAirbags
RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent thevehi‐
cle occupants from coming into contact with
parts of thevehicle interior in theevent of an
accident. In theevent of an accident, the
restraint system can also reduce theforces to
which thevehicle occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the
detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners
and/or airbags supplement the protection
offeredby a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt
tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in
every accident.
In order fortherestraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐
pant must observe thefollowing information:
RFasten seat belts correctly.
RSit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
RSit with their feet resting on thefloor, if pos‐
sible.
RAlways secure persons under 1.50 m tall in
an additional restraint system suitable for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com‐
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
and airbag generally do not protect against
objects penetrating thevehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Limited protection from therestraint system
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
modifications to therestraint system
The restraint system can no longer function
correctly after alterations have been made.
The restraint system may then not protect
thevehicle occupants as intended by failing
in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
example
#Never alter the parts of therestraint
system.
#Nevertamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their
software.
If it is necessary to adjust thevehicle to accom‐
modate a person with disabilities, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi‐
cally foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Occupant safety 35
Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed, during which the6restraint sys‐
temwarning lamp lights up. It goes out no later
than a few seconds afterthevehicle is started.
The components of therestraint system are then
functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in therestraint sys‐
tem if:
Rthe6restraint system warning lamp does
not light up when the ignition is switched on
Rthe6restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a
journey
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions in therestraint system
If therestraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig‐
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This may affect
the seat belt tensioner or airbag, forexam‐
ple.
#Have therestraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Function of therestraint system in an acci‐
dent
How therestraint system works is determined by
the severity of the impact detected and the type
of accident anticipated:
RFrontal impact
RRear impact
RSide impact
ROnly for certain countries: rollover
The activation thresholds forthe components of
therestraint system are determined based on
theevaluation of the sensor values measured at
various points in thevehicle. This process is pre-
emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
the components of therestraint system must
take place in good time at thestart of the colli‐
sion.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐
sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do
they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and therate of vehicle deceleration
is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
deployedeven though thevehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
such as longitudinal members are hit, forexam‐
ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of
vehicle deceleration.
36 Occupant safety
The components of therestraint system can
be activated or deployed independently of
each other:
Component Detected deploy‐
ment situation
Front seat belt ten‐
sioners Frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact,
rollover1)
Rear seat belt ten‐
sioners Frontal impact, rear
impact, rollover1)
Driver's airbag, front
passenger front air‐
bag
Frontal impact
Knee airbag Frontal impact
Side impact airbag Side impact
Window airbagSide impact, roll‐
over1), frontal impact
1) Only for certain countries.
The front passenger front airbag can only be
deployed in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both
before and during the journey, that thestatus of
the front passenger front airbag is correct
(/page 47).
&WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbag
components
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has
been deployed.
#Do not touch the airbag parts.
#Have a deployed airbag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towedto aqualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐
ularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an
airbag deployed.
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air‐
bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a
small amount of powder may also be released:
RThe bang will not generally affect your hear‐
ing.
RIn general, the powder released is not haz‐
ardous to health but may cause short-term
breathing difficulties to persons suffering
from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave thevehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing difficulties.
Seat belts
Protection provided by the seat belt
Alwaysfasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
Occupant safety 37
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, forexample, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
pants have their seat belts fastened
correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor‐
rect driver's seat position and adjusting the
seats (/page 106).
In order forthe correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐
cle occupant must observe thefollowing infor‐
mation:
RThe seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
RThe seat belt must be routed across the
centre of the shoulder and as low down
across the hips as possible.
RThe shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under
your arm or behind your back.
RAvoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
RPush the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐
der section of the belt. Neverroute the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
RNeverroute the seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
ROnly one person may use each seat belt at
any one time. Infants and children must
never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle
occupant.
RNever secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is being used by one of thevehi‐
cle's occupants. Always observe the instruc‐
tions for loading thevehicle when securing
objects, luggage or loads (/page 121).
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.
If children are travelling in thevehicle, be sure to
observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Children in thevehicle" (/page 52).
Limitations of the protection provided by the
seat belt
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offerthe intended
level of protection if you have not movedthe
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in theevent of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, forexam‐
ple.
38 Occupant safety
#Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul‐
der.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller build
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
seat belt correctly without a suitable addi‐
tional restraint system.
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, forexample, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#Always secure persons under 1.50 m
tall in a suitable restraint system.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
following situations:
Rthe seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rmodifications have been made to the seat
belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or
seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in theevent of an accident, forexample.
Modified belt tensioners may be deployed
unintentionally or not function as intended.
#Never modify the seat belts, seat belt
tensioners, seat belt anchorages or
seat belt retractors.
#Make sure that the seat belts are not
damaged, are not worn and are clean.
#Always have the seat belts checked
immediately after an accident at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
seat belts that have been approvedforyour vehi‐
cle by Mercedes-Benz.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployedpyrotechnic seat belt tension‐
ers
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
been deployed are no longer operational and
are unable to perform their intended protec‐
tive function.
#Therefore, have deployedpyrotechnic
seat belt tensioners immediately
replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
Occupant safety 39
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towedto aqualified specialist workshop
after an accident.
*NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the
seat mechanism.
#Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Releasing therear centre seat belt
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down
and back up again, it may not be possible to pull
out therear centre seat belt. The seat belt must
be released.
#Pull the seat belt out approximately 25 mm
at the seat belt outlet on the seat backrest
and then release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐
not be pulled out any further.
#Always engage seat belt tongue 2of the
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1of the cor‐
responding seat.
#Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
and slide seat belt outlet 3into the desired
position.
#Let go of the seat belt outlet release and
ensure that seat belt outlet 3locks into
position.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger
front airbag shutoff:
*NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐
sioner and side impact airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner and
the side impact airbag may also deploy in the
event of an accident along with other sys‐
tems.
#Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger
front airbag shutoff:
40 Occupant safety
*NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐
sioner when the front passenger seat is
unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner may
also deploy in theevent of an accident along
with other systems.
#Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®:if the front seat belt
is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt
adjustment may automatically apply a certain
tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐
tem (/page 41).
Releasing a seat belt
#Press therelease button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment
via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Belt adjustment
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and
front passenger
The üseat belt warning lamp in the instru‐
ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten
their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
Function of therear seat belt status display
The rear seat belt status display is only available
for certain countries.
The rear seat belt status display informs you
which rear seat belt is not fastened.
You can immediately dismiss therear seat belt
status display using the back button on the left-
hand side of thesteering wheel (/page 277).
Occupant safety 41
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1Knee airbag
2Driver's airbag
3Front passenger front airbag
4Window airbag
5Side impact airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by the AIRBAG symbol.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection fortherespective vehicle occupant.
Potential protection from each airbag:
AIRBAG Potential protection for:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg
Driver's airbag,
front passenger
front airbag
Head and ribcage
Window airbagHead
Side impact air‐
bag Ribcage, also pelvis for
front seat occupants
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front passenger airbag is enabled
If the front passenger front airbag is enabled,
achild on the front passenger seat may be
struck by the front passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, observe thevehicle-specific
information (/page 72). Also, always observe
the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front passenger
seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger
front airbag shutoff:
The front passenger front airbag can only be
deployed in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both
before and during the journey, that thestatus of
the front passenger front airbag is correct
(/page 47).
42 Occupant safety
*NOTE Important points to remember if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
on the front passenger side if:
RThere are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
RThe seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger
seat and the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
#Stow objects in a suitable place.
#Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation,
the window airbag on the front passenger side
may deploy. The airbag is deployedregardless of
whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Protection by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
may supplement the protection offeredby a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
tective function and deployment may even
cause further injuries.
In order to avoid risks, each vehicle occupant
must always make sure of thefollowing:
RFasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to
ensure that the lap belt never lies across
the abdomen.
RAdopt the correct seat position and keep
as faraway as possible from the airbags.
RObserve thefollowing information.
#Always make sure that there are no
objects between the airbag and vehicle
occupant.
To avoid therisks resulting from the deployment
of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must
observe thefollowing information in particular:
RBefore starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
When doing so, always observe the informa‐
tion on the correct driver's seat position
(/page 106).
ROnly hold thesteering wheel by thesteering
wheel rim. This allowsthe airbag to be fully
deployed.
RAlways lean against the seat backrest when
thevehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags.
RAlwayskeep your feet on thefloor. Do not
put your feet on the cockpit, forexample.
Occupant safety 43
Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐
ment area of the airbag.
RIf children are travelling in thevehicle,
observe the additional notes (/page 52).
RAlwaysstow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in thevehicle interior may prevent an
airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
occupant must always make sure of thefollow‐
ing in particular:
RThere are no people, animals or objects
between thevehicle occupants and an air‐
bag.
RThere are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
RThere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
RThere are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
holders, attached to thevehicle within the
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on the door, on the side window or
on the side wall trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to thevehicle within the deploy‐
ment area of an airbag. Always comply with
the accessory manufacturer's installation
instructions and, in particular, the notes on
suitable places for installation.
RThere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection from airbags
&WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the airbag cover
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
no longer function correctly.
#Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by the AIRBAG symbol (/page 42).
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the use of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
vent the deployment of the airbags integra‐
ted into the seats.
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do. In addition, the operation of the auto‐
matic front passenger airbag shutoff could
be restricted.
#You should only use seat covers that
have been approved forthe correspond‐
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions of the sensors in the door panelling
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐
formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐
ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The airbags might therefore not function
properly any more.
44 Occupant safety
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do.
#Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
#Always have work on the doors or door
panelling carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐
tection and cannot provide the intended pro‐
tective function in theevent of an accident.
#Have thevehicle towedto aqualified
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger
front airbag shutoff
The automatic front passenger front airbag shut‐
off is able to detect whether the front passenger
seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint
system. The front passenger front airbag is ena‐
bled or disabled accordingly.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, always make sure of thefollow‐
ing:
REnsure that thechild restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (/page 57).
RAlways observe thechild restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
RNever place objects, e.g. cushions, under or
behind thechild restraint system.
RFully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
RThe entire base of thechild restraint system
must alwaysrest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
RThe backrest of theforward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
RThe child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
ingly.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the seat surface and
thechild restraint system
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect the func‐
tion of the automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff.
This could result in the front passenger front
airbag not functioning as intended during an
accident.
#Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and thechild restraint
system.
Occupant safety 45
#The entire base of thechild restraint
system must alwaysrest on the sitting
surface of the front passenger seat.
#The backrest of theforward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possi‐
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
the front passenger seat.
#Always comply with thechild restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must
observe thefollowing information:
RFasten seat belts correctly (/page 37).
RSit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
RSit with their feet resting on thefloor, if pos‐
sible.
The front passenger front airbag may otherwise
be disabled by mistake,forexample in thefol‐
lowing situations:
RThe front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
RThe front passenger sits in such a waythat
their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐
face.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
deactivated front passenger airbag
If thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
bled. It will not be deployed in theevent of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, forexample, come into contact with
thevehicle interior, especially if the person is
sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
RThe classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat.
RThe front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
RThe person is seated correctly.
#Ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that thestatus of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐
sification of the person or child restraint system
on the front passenger seat takes place afterthe
front passenger front airbag shutoff self-test.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps dis‐
play thestatus of the front passenger front air‐
bag.
Always observe the notes on the function of the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(/page 47).
46 Occupant safety
Function of thePASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
tor lamps
Vehicles without automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixedto
the side of the cockpit on the front passenger
side (/page 71).
Self-test of automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed during which the two PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up
simultaneously.
The status of the front passenger front airbag is
displayed afterthe self-test:
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front passenger front airbag is able
to deploy in theevent of an accident.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
ously: the front passenger front airbag is dis‐
abled. It will then not be deployed in the
event of an accident.
If thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows thestatus of the front passenger
front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
and the6restraint system warning lamp
light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
may not be used. Also in this case, do not fit a
child restraint system to the front passenger
seat. Have automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at
aqualified specialist workshop.
Status display
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that thesta‐
tus of the front passenger front airbag is correct
forthe current situation.
Afterfitting a rearward-facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat:
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu‐
ously.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
Occupant safety 47
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in theevent of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, observe thevehicle-specific
information (/page 72).
Depending on thechild restraint system and the
stature of thechild, thePASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not fittherearward-facing child restraint system
to the front passenger seat.
Instead, fittherearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat.
Afterfitting a forward-facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat: depend‐
ing on thechild restraint system and thestature
of thechild, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit
continuously or be off. Always observe thefol‐
lowing information.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect positioning of theforward-
facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the cockpit, in theevent of an acci‐
dent, thechild could:
RCome into contact with thevehicle inte‐
rior if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is lit, forexample.
RBe struck by the airbag if thePASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
#Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible and fully retract
the seat cushion length adjustment.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat
belt outlet on thevehicle to the shoul‐
der belt guide on thechild restraint sys‐
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be
routed forwards and downwards from
the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust
the seat belt outlet and the front
passenger seat accordingly.
#Always observe thechild restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions.
When fitting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, observe thevehicle-specific
information (/page 72).
If a person is sitting on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's
stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must
always observe thefollowing information:
RIf the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond‐
ing to that of an adult, thePASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This
indicates that the front passenger front air‐
bag is enabled.
48 Occupant safety
If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult
should not use the front passenger seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
RIf the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up continuously
or remains off, depending on theresult of the
classification.
-If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger
seat as far back as possible, or the per‐
son of smaller stature should use a rear
seat.
-If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously: the person of
smaller stature should not use the front
passenger seat.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit
If thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit afterthe system self-test,
the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in theevent of an accident.
In this case, the front passenger airbag can‐
not perform its intended protective function,
e.g. when a person is seated in the front
passenger seat.
That person could, forexample, come into
contact with thevehicle interior, especially if
the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
RThe classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat.
RThe person is seated properly with a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
RThe front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RChild restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/page 72).
RSuitable positioning of thechild restraint sys‐
tem (/page 57).
PRE-SAFE®system
PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occupant protec‐
tion)
PRE-SAFE®is able to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
ures to protect thevehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE®can implement thefollowing meas‐
ures independently of each other:
RTightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
Occupant safety 49
RClosing the side windows.
RVehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the
sliding sunroof.
RVehicles with memory function: moving
the front passenger seat to a more favoura‐
ble seat position.
RVehicles with multicontour seat: increas‐
ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters
of the seat backrest.
RPRE-SAFE®Sound: provided that the multi‐
media system is switched on, generates a
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐
tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
*NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or
the object.
#Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE®system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings your‐
self.
#If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE®PLUS can detect certain impacts,
particularly an imminent rear impact, and take
pre-emptive measures to protect thevehicle
occupants. These measures cannot necessarily
prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE®PLUS can implement thefollowing
measures independently of each other:
RTightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
RActivating therear hazard warning lights at a
higher flashing frequency.
RIncreasing brake pressure when thevehicle
is stationary. This brake application is cancel‐
led automatically when thevehicle pulls
away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
System limitations
The system will not initiate any action in thefol‐
lowing situations:
Rwhen reversing
or
Rwhen thevehicle is towing a trailer and there
is a risk of a rear impact
The system will not initiate any braking applica‐
tion in thefollowing situations:
Rwhilst driving
or
Rwhen entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
50 Occupant safety
Safely transporting children in thevehicle
Always observe when children are travelling
in thevehicle
%Also strictly observe the safety notesforthe
specific situation. In this wayyou can recog‐
nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐
dren are travelling in thevehicle
(/page 52).
Be diligent
Bear in mind that neglecting to secure a child in
thechild restraint system may have serious con‐
sequences. Always be diligent in securing a child
carefully before every journey.
To improve protection forchildren younger than
12 years old or under 1.50 m in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observethe
following information:
RAlways secure thechild in a child restraint
system suitable forthis Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cle.
RThe child restraint system must be appropri‐
ate to the age, weight and size of thechild.
RThe vehicle seat must be suitable forfitting a
child restraint system (/page 57).
Accident statistics show that children secured
on therear seats are generally safer than chil‐
dren secured on the front seats. Forthis reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that youfit a
child restraint system to arear seat.
Generic term "child restraint system"
The generic term child restraint system is used
in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system
is, forexample:
Ra baby car seat
Rarearward-facing child seat
Raforward-facing child seat
Rachild booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child
booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of thechild.
Observing laws and legal requirements
Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in thevehicle.
Make sure that thechild restraint system is
approved in accordance with thevalid test speci‐
fications and guidelines. Further information can
be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre forthis purpose.
Only use approvedchild restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet thefol‐
lowing UNECE standards are permittedfor use in
thevehicle:
RUN-R44
RUN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Information on child restraint system approval
categories and details on the approval label on
thechild restraint system (/page 58).
Occupant safety 51
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems forchild restraint systems
in thevehicle
Only use thefollowing securing systems forchild
restraint systems:
Rthe ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets
Rthevehicle's seat belt system
RtheTopTether anchorages
Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint sys‐
tem is preferred.
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the
vehicle can reduce therisk of fitting thechild
restraint system incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat
belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐
tem, always comply with the permissible gross
weight forthechild and child restraint system
(/page 64).
Advantage of a rearward-facing child
restraint system
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small
child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint
system. In this case, thechild sits in the oppo‐
site direction to the direction of travel and faces
backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in
arearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor‐
rectly
&WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by incorrect installation of thechild
restraint system
If thechild restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion.
The child cannot be restrained in theevent of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions forthechild
restraint system and its correct use.
#Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system alwaysrests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
#Never place objects under or behind
thechild restraint system, e.g. cush‐
ions.
#Always use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed forthem.
#Alwaysreplace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If thechild restraint system is not correctly
installed or secured, it could release in the
event of an accident, sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
The child restraint system could be flung
around and hit vehicle occupants.
52 Occupant safety
#Alwaysfitchild restraint systems cor‐
rectly, even when not in use.
#Always comply with thechild restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
RAlways observe thechild restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions as well as thevehicle-specific
information:
-Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐
temto therear seat (/page 64).
-Secure thechild restraint system with the
seat belt on therear seat (/page 70).
-Secure thechild restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
(/page 73). Observethe specific
instructions fortherearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems
(/page 72).
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that thestatus of the front
passenger front airbag is correct forthe
current situation (/page 47).
RObservethewarning labels in thevehicle
interior and on thechild restraint system.
RAlso secure TopTether if present.
Do not alter thechild restraint system
&WARNING Risk of injury due to altera‐
tions to thechild restraint system
The child restraint system may no longer
function as it is supposed to if you make
alterations or attach objects to it, e.g. toys or
unsuitable accessories. This poses an
increased risk of injury!
Never alter thechild restraint system. Only
attach accessories which the manufacturer
of thechild restraint system has authorised
especially forthis child restraint system.
Mercedes‑Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz
care products for cleaning child restraint sys‐
tems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
&WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint
systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
tems that have been subjectedto a load in
an accident may then not be able to perform
their intended protective function.
The child cannot be restrained in theevent of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#Alwaysreplace child restraint systems
immediately that have been damaged or
involved in an accident.
#Have the securing systems forthechild
restraint systems checked at a qualified
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
Occupant safety 53
Avoiding direct sunlight
&WARNING Risk of burns when thechild
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If thechild restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suffer burns on these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of thechild
restraint system.
#Always make sure that thechild
restraint system is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
#Protect it with a blanket,forexample.
#If thechild restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people –particularly children are exposed
to extreme temperatures over an extended
period of time, there is a risk of serious or
even fatal injury!
#Never leave anyone particularly chil‐
dren unattended in thevehicle.
#Never leave animals in thevehicle unat‐
tended.
54 Occupant safety
Overview of recommended child restraint systems
Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre forthis purpose.
Securing with ISOFIX
Weight category
Size category
Type1
Type approval number
Order number2
1 Manufacturer: Britax mer 2 With colour code 9H95
Category 0+:
up to 13 kg and up to approx.15 months
Size category E
BABY SAFE plus
E1 04 301 146
B6 6 86 8224
Category I:
9to 18 kg
Size category B1
DUO plus
E1 04 301 133
A 000 97017 02
Occupant safety 55
Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt
Weight category Type1
Type approval number
Order number2
1 Manufacturer: Britax mer 2 With colour code 9H95
Category 0:
up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months
BABY SAFE plus II
E1 04 301 146
A 000 97013 02
Category 0+:
up to 13 kg and up to approx.15 months
BABY SAFE plus II
E1 04 301 146
A 000 97013 02
Category I:
9to 18 kg and from approximately 9 monthsto
4years
DUO plus
E1 04 301 133
A 000 97017 02
Category II/III:
15 to 36 kg and from approximately 4 to 12
years
KIDFIX
E1 04 301 198
A 000 970 20 02
Category II/III:
15 to 36 kg and from approximately 4 to 12
years
KIDFIX XP
E1 04 301 304
A 000 970 23 02
56 Occupant safety
Overview of suitable seats in thevehicle forfitting a child restraint system
Securing systems forchild restraint systems
Vehicle seat
Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system:
ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/page 60)
or
i-Size child seat securing system
(/page 63)
Also secure TopTether if present
(/page 66)
Alternative securing system:
RVehicle seat belt (/page 68)
Front passenger seat Securing system:
RVehicle seat belt (/page 68)
Be sure to observe:
RIf the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that thesta‐
tus of the front passenger front airbag is correct
forthe current situation (/page 47).
RNotes on automatic front passenger front airbag
shutoff (/page 45).
Occupant safety 57
Vehicle seat
Centre rear seat Securing system:
RVehicle seat belt (/page 68)
Approval categories forchild restraint sys‐
tems
Only use approvedchild restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet thefol‐
lowing UNECE standards are permittedfor use in
thevehicle:
RUN-R44
RUN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Identification on thechild restraint system
Information about the approval category, weight
category and approval number, forexample, is
on the approval label on thechild restraint sys‐
tem.
There may be further information such as the
ISOFIX size categories, depending on the
approval category of thechild restraint system.
Approval categories in accordance with UN-
R44
Example of an approval label
RUniversal: child restraint systems in the
"Universal" category are approved for instal‐
lation in vehicles. They can be used, in
accordance with overviews of the suitability
of seats for securing child restraint systems,
on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.
The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child
restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be
secured using TopTether or support points.
RSemi-Universal: child restraint systems in
the "Semi-Universal" category may only be
used if thevehicle and vehicle seat are listed
in thechild restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list.
RVehicle-specific: child restraint systems in
the "vehicle-specific" category may only be
used if thevehicle and vehicle seat are listed
58 Occupant safety
in thechild restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list.
Approval categories in accordance with UN-
R129
Example of an approval label
Ri‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size"
category are approvedfor installation in vehi‐
cles with i‑Size mounting brackets. They can
be used, in accordance with overviews of the
suitability of seats for securing child restraint
systems, on seats labelled i‑U.
The identification i‑U refers to i‑Size child
restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be
secured using TopTether or support points.
Observe the suitability of vehicle seats
Depending on the approval category, there are
forward-facing and rearward-facing child
restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for
certain vehicle seats:
RSuitability of seats for securing ISOFIX child
restraint systems (/page 60).
RSuitability of seats for securing i‑Size child
restraint systems (/page 63).
RSuitability of seats for securing belt-secured
child restraint systems (/page 68)
Occupant safety 59
Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on therear seat
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
ISOFIX identification
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems.
RThe symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/page 58).
RAttach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per thefollowing ISOFIX tables.
Carry cot
Size class:Equipment:Left/right rear seat
FISO/L1 X
GISO/L2 X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.
60 Occupant safety
Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)
Size class:Equipment:Left/right rear seat
EISO/R1IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to thetable in "Overview of therecommended child restraint systems", or if the
vehicle and the seat are listed on thechild restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx.15 months)
Size class:Equipment:Left/right rear seat
EISO/R1IL
DISO/R2IL
CISO/R3IL (1)
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to thetable in "Overview of therecommended child restraint systems", or if the
vehicle and the seat are listed on thechild restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size category (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position. Make sure that the seat
backrest of the front seat does not rest against thechild restraint system.
Occupant safety 61
Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4years)
Size class: Equipment:Left/right rear seat
DISO/R2IL
CISO/R3IL (1)
BISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
AISO/F3 IUF
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to thetable in "Overview of therecommended child restraint systems", or if the
vehicle and the seat are listed on thechild restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable forforward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size category (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position. Make sure that the seat
backrest of the front seat does not rest against thechild restraint system.
62 Occupant safety
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems
i-Size identification
i‑Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems.
RThe symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an i‑Size child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 (/page 58).
RIt is possible to attach child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with
-UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/page 60), or
-UN R129 as per thefollowing i‑Size tables
Front passenger seat Left/right rear seat
i-Size child restraint system
(ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2,
ISO/B3)
Xi‑U
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. i-U Suitable forforward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems
in the "Universal" category.
Occupant safety 63
Fitting the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
system on therear seat
&WARNING Risk of injury if therear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If therear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RIf this is the case, thevehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot/load com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#Make sure that the seat backrest and
therear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the left and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster. Awarning tone will also sound.
If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, thered lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
&WARNING ‑Risk of injury or death if the
permissible gross mass of thechild and
child restraint system is exceeded
For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems in
which thechild is secured using the seat belt
integrated in thechild restraint system, the
permissible gross mass of thechild and child
restraint system is 33 kg.
If thechild and thechild restraint system
together weigh more than 33 kg,the ISOFIX
or i‑Size child restraint system with integra‐
ted seat belt does not offer sufficient protec‐
tion. Too much load may be placed on the
ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems and
thechild may not be restrained correctly in
theevent of an accident, forexample.
#If thechild and thechild restraint sys‐
temtogether weigh more than 33 kg,
use only an ISOFIX or i‑Size child
restraint system with which thechild is
secured with thevehicle seat belt.
#Also secure thechild restraint system
with theTopTether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the
mass of thechild restraint system:
Rin the manufacturer's installation and operat‐
ing instructions forthechild restraint system
used
Ron a label on thechild restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
of thechild and child restraint system is still
complied with.
When you are fitting a child restraint system,
observe thefollowing:
OAlways observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a
child restraint system.
64 Occupant safety
ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/page 60)
i‑Size child seat securing system
(/page 63)
OAlways comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for
thechild restraint system used.
OMake sure that thechild's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat forward slightly.
When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint sys‐
tem, observe thefollowing:
OWhen you are using a Group 0/0+ baby
car seat and a Group 1 rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that the seat does
not touch thechild restraint system.
OWhen you are using a Group 1 forward-
facing child restraint system: remove the
head restraint from therespective seat, if
possible. In addition, the seat backrest of
thechild restraint system must, as far as
possible, lie flat against the backrest of the
vehicle seat.
Afterthechild restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints again
immediately and adjust them correctly.
OFor certain child restraint systems in weight
group 2 or 3, there may be limitations for
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with theroof.
OThe child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between theroof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direc‐
tion. Where possible, adjust the seat cush‐
ion inclination accordingly.
OThe child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
When fitting an i‑Size child restraint sys‐
tem, observe thefollowing:
OWhen you are using a rearward-facing
child restraint system: adjust the front
seat so that it does not touch thechild
restraint system.
OWhen you are using a forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from therespective seat, if possi‐
ble. In addition, the seat backrest of the
child restraint system must, as far as possi‐
ble, lie flat against the backrest of thevehi‐
cle seat.
Afterthechild restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints again
immediately and adjust them correctly.
Occupant safety 65
1ISOFIX mounting bracket
2i‑Size mounting bracket
Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX
child restraint system or the i‑Size child restraint
system is engaged correctly in both mounting
brackets in thevehicle.
*NOTE Be careful not to damage the seat
belt forthe centre seat when fitting the
child restraint system
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped.
#Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys‐
temto both mounting brackets in thevehicle.
Securing a TopTether
&WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
rear seat backrests are not locked after
fitting TopTether belts
If therear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in theevent of an acci‐
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction.
As a result, child restraint systems cannot
perform their intended protective function.
Rear seat backrests that are not locked can
also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
event of an accident.
#Always lock rear seat backrests after
fitting TopTether belts.
#Observe the lock verification indicator.
If the left and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster. Awarning tone will also sound.
If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, thered lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
If thechild restraint system is equipped
with a TopTether belt:
The risk of injury can be reduced by a
TopTether. The TopTether belt facilitates
an additional connection between the
child restraint system attached with ISO‐
FIX or i‑Size and thevehicle.
66 Occupant safety
#If necessary, slide the head restraint 1
upwards (/page 113).
#Fold up the cover2of theTopTether
anchorage 3.
#Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system
with TopTether. Always comply with thechild
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so.
#Guide theTopTether belt 4under the head
restraint 1between the two head restraint
bars.
#Hook theTopTether hook 5of theTop
Tether belt 4into theTopTether anchorage
3without twisting.
#Tension theTopTether belt 4. Always com‐
ply with thechild restraint system manufac‐
turer's installation instructions when doing
so.
#Fold down the cover2of theTopTether
anchorage 3.
#If necessary, slide the head restraint 1
downwards (/page 113). Make sure that
you do not interfere with the correct routing
of theTopTether belt 4.
Occupant safety 67
Securing thechild restraint system with the seat belt
Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
Rear seats
Weight categoryLeft/right rear seat Centre rear seat1
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable forthis seat.
Category 0: up to 10 kg U, LU, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, LU, L
Category I: 9to 18 kg U, LU, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, LU, L
Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, LU, L
U Suitable forchild restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to thetable in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if thevehicle and the seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
68 Occupant safety
Front passenger seat Notes
Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
RIf it is absolutely necessary foryouto fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint
systems on the front passenger seat (/page 73).
Observe the specific instructions fortherearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that thestatus of the front passenger front airbag is correct forthe current situation (/page 47).
Front passenger seat
Weight category Front passenger front airbag enabled1Front passenger front airbag disabled1, 2
1Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is
in the highest position and therear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest posi‐
tion.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Category 0: up to 10 kg XU, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg XU, L
Category I: 9to 18 kg UF, LU, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, LU, L
Occupant safety 69
Weight category Front passenger front airbag enabled1Front passenger front airbag disabled1, 2
Category III: 22 to 36 kg UF, LU, L
X Not suitable forchildren in this weight category.
UF Suitable forforward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category
in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to thetable in "Rec‐
ommended child restraint systems", or if thevehicle and the seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
U Suitable forchild restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight cat‐
egory.
Securing thechild restraint system with the
seat belt on therear seat
&WARNING Risk of injury if therear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If therear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RIf this is the case, thevehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot/load com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#Make sure that the seat backrest and
therear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If therear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, thered lock verification indicator will be
visible.
When fitting a belt-securedchild restraint sys‐
tem, observe thefollowing:
OBe sure to observe the installation and oper‐
ating instructions provided by the manufac‐
turer forthechild restraint system being
used.
OFor a child restraint system in the "Univer‐
sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make
sure that the system has been approved for
thevehicle seat.
70 Occupant safety
Observe the notes under "Suitability of
seats for attaching belt-securedchild
restraint systems" (/page 68).
OWhen using a category 0/0+ baby car
seat and a category I rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that the seat does
not touch thechild restraint system.
OWhen using a category I forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from therespective seat, if possi‐
ble.
Afterremoving thechild restraint system,
replace the head restraints again immedi‐
ately and adjust them correctly.
OThe backrest of theforward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of therear
seat.
OFor certain child restraint systems of weight
category II or III there may be limitations for
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with theroof.
OThe child restraint system must not be put
under strain between theroof and the seat
cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong
direction. If possible, adjust the seat cush‐
ion angle as appropriate.
OThe child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
OMake sure that thechild's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
#Fit thechild restraint system.
The entire base of thechild restraint system
must alwaysrest on the sitting surface of the
rear seat.
#Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of thevehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on thechild restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger front airbag shutoff
Sticker visible when the front passenger door
is open
Vehicles without automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixedto
the side of the cockpit on the front passenger
side.
Occupant safety 71
Make sure you observethefollowing informa‐
tion:
RNeverfit a rearward-facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat
RAlwaysfit a rearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat
-Suitability of seats for attaching belt-
secured child restraint systems
(/page 68)
-Secure thechild restraint system with the
seat belt on therear seat (/page 70).
RNotes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat (/page 72)
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in theevent of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.
Observe the specific instructions fortherear‐
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems (/page 73).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor
Always observe thestatus of the front passenger
front airbag on thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp:
RIf it is absolutely necessary to fit a child
restraint system to the front passenger seat,
always observe the information on automatic
front passenger front airbag shutoff
(/page 45).
72 Occupant safety
RWhen using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front airbag must always be disa‐
bled. This is only the case if thePASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continu‐
ously (/page 47).
RIf thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front passenger front airbag
is enabled. The front passenger front airbag
may deploy during an accident.
Securing thechild restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
When fitting a belt-securedchild restraint sys‐
tem on the front passenger seat, always observe
thefollowing:
OObserve thechild restraint system manufac‐
turer's installation and operating instruc‐
tions.
OFor a child restraint system in the "Univer‐
sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make
sure that the system has been approved for
thevehicle seat.
Observe the notes under "Suitability of
seats for attaching belt-securedchild
restraint systems" (/page 68).
OWhen using a forward-facing child restraint
system in Group I: remove the head
restraint from therespective seat, if possi‐
ble.
Afterthechild restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints again
immediately and adjust them correctly.
OThe backrest of theforward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
OFor certain child restraint systems of weight
category II or III there may be limitations for
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with theroof.
OThe child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between theroof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direc‐
tion. Adjust the seat backrest inclination
accordingly.
OThe child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
ONever place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
#Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest
position.
#Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
#Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that
the front edge of the seat cushion is in the
highest position and therear edge of the
seat cushion is in the lowest position.
#Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical
position.
#Fit thechild restraint system.
The entire base of thechild restraint system
must alwaysrest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
#Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
Occupant safety 73
outlet of thevehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on thechild restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
#If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the front passenger seat accordingly.
Child safety locks
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear doors
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people –particularly children are exposed
to extreme temperatures over an extended
period of time, there is a risk of serious or
even fatal injury!
#Never leave anyone particularly chil‐
dren unattended in thevehicle.
#Never leave animals in thevehicle unat‐
tended.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are travelling in thevehicle, they
could, in particular:
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample
74 Occupant safety
#Always activate thechild safety locks
installed if children are travelling in the
vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle
Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function
is activated via Mercedes me connect.
Vehicles fortheUnited Kingdom: observe the
important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi‐
tional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks fortherear doors
and therear side windows.
The child safety lock on therear doors secures
each door separately. The doors can no longer
be opened from the inside.
#Press the lever in direction 1(activate) or
2(deactivate).
#Make sure that thechild safety locks are
working properly.
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear side windows
#To activate/deactivate:press button 2.
The rear side window can be opened or
closed in thefollowing cases:
RWith indicator lamp 1lit: via the switch
on the driver's door.
Occupant safety 75
RWith indicator lamp 1off: via the switch
on the corresponding rear door or driv‐
er's door.
Notes on pets in thevehicle
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in thevehicle
If you leave animals in thevehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Thereby an animal may:
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample
Rswitch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
thevehicle in theevent of an accident or
sudden steering and braking manoeuvres
and injure vehicle occupants in the process.
#Never leave animals in thevehicle unat‐
tended.
#Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐
rier.
76 Occupant safety
Key
Overview of key functions
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
*NOTE Damage to thekey caused by
magnetic fields
#Keep thekeyaway from strong mag‐
netic fields.
1Locks
2Battery check lamp
3Unlocks
4Opens/closes the boot lid
%The key may vary from the one shown in the
diagram, depending on thevehicle equip‐
ment.
The key locks and unlocksthefollowing compo‐
nents:
Rthe doors
Rthe boot lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
Opening and closing 77
If thevehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
theft protection is primed again.
Do not keep thekeytogether with electronic
devices or metal objects. This can affect the
key's functionality.
%If battery check lamp 2does not light up
after pressing theÜor ßbutton, the
battery is discharged.
Changing thekey battery (/page 79).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Acoustic lock
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
%Please note:
The selected setting forthe acoustic locking
verification signal must comply with therele‐
vant national road and trafficregulations. In
some countries, including Germany, using
the acoustic locking verification signal is for‐
bidden by traffic laws (in accordance with
§16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German
national road trafficregulations). The driver
of thevehicle must comply with these regu‐
lations. In countries where the use of this
function is forbidden, this function is not
activated in thevehicle and must not be acti‐
vated.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements:
RThe ignition is switched off.
%The panic alarm function is only available in
certain countries.
#To activate: press button 1for approx‐
imately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
#To deactivate: briefly press button1again.
or
#Press thestart/stop button on the cockpit
(the key is inside thevehicle).
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of thekey:
Rcentral unlocking
Runlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
78 Opening and closing
#To switch between settings: press the
Üand ßbuttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
check lamp flashes twice.
If the unlocking function forthe driver's door
and fuel filler flap has been selected:
Rpressing theÜbutton a second time cen‐
trally unlocks thevehicle
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if youtouch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating thekey functions
If you do not use thevehicle or a keyfor an
extended period of time, you can reduce the
energy consumption of therespective key. To do
so, deactivate thekey functions.
#To deactivate: press theßbutton on the
key twice in quick succession.
The battery check lamp of thekeyflashes
twice briefly and lights up once.
#To activate: press any button on thekey.
%When thevehicle is started with thekey in
thestowage compartment of the centre con‐
sole, thekey functions are automatically
activated (/page 175).
Removing/inserting the emergency key
#To remove:press release knob 1.
Emergency key2is pushed out slightly.
#Pull out emergency key2until it engages in
the intermediate position.
%You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key2to attach thekeyto akey
ring.
#Press release knob 1again and fully
remove emergency key2.
#To insert: press release knob 1.
#Insert emergency key2to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
Replacing the key battery
&DANGER Serious damage to health
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
serious damage to health.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
#Keep batteries out of thereach of chil‐
dren.
#If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
Opening and closing 79
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to aqualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
Requirements:
RYourequire a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
#Remove the emergency key (/page 79).
#Press release button 2down fully and slide
cover1in the direction of the arrow.
#Fold out cover1in the direction of the
arrow and remove.
#Remove battery compartment 3and take
out the discharged battery.
#Insert the new battery into battery compart‐
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking
in the battery compartment and on the bat‐
tery when doing this.
#Push in battery compartment 3.
#Re-attach cover1and push it until it
engages.
80 Opening and closing
Problems with thekey
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle. Possible causes:
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
RThere is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
RThe key is faulty.
#Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/page 79).
#Use the emergency keyto lock or unlock (/page 79).
#Have thekeychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. #Have thekey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
#If necessary, have the mechanical lock changed as well.
Doors
Notes on the additional door lock
The additional door lock is only available for
vehicles fortheUnited Kingdom.
&WARNING Risk of injury to persons
inside thevehicle when the additional
door lock is activated
If the additional door lock is activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside.
If there are persons in thevehicle, they can
no longer leavethevehicle, e.g. in hazardous
situations.
#Never leave persons unattended in the
vehicle, particularly children, elderly
persons or persons in need of help.
Opening and closing 81
#If there are persons in thevehicle, do
not activate the additional door lock.
The additional door lock is automatically activa‐
ted in thefollowing situations:
RThe vehicle is locked using thekey.
RThe vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If thevehicle has been locked via Mercedes me
connect, the additional door lock is not activa‐
ted.
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
%After locking you can issue a signal with the
horn.
You can prevent the additional door lock from
being activated by deactivating interior protec‐
tion before locking thevehicle (/page 105).
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
#United Kingdom only: observe the notes on
the additional door lock (/page 81).
#Pull door handle 2.
Locking pin 1pops up when the door is
unlocked.
Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle
from the inside
#To unlock:press button 1.
#To lock: press button 2.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
RIf you have lockedthevehicle using thekey.
82 Opening and closing
RIf you have lockedthevehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking thevehicle with a Digital
Vehicle Key
Requirements:
Rone of thefollowing versions of the Digital
Vehicle Key is available:
-suitable mobile phone
-Digital Vehicle Keysticker
Rthevehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi‐
cle Key" function.
Rthe "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated
via Mercedes me connect: http://
www.mercedes.me.
Rthe mobile phone is sufficiently charged.
%You can check the suitability of your mobile
phone by entering the phone number at
http://www.mercedes.me.
Information about suitable mobile phones
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz
service centre or at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect.
%Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry
the emergency key in case of function
restrictions.
%The function is only available in combination
with Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐
tain countries.
%Protective cases around the mobile phone
can impair the functionality.
If thevehicle has been parkedfor longer than
two weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle is
deactivated.
#Pull the door handle.
The NFC aerial is activated. #Touch the door handle on the driver's door in
the area where NFC aerial 1is located with
the part of the Digital Vehicle Key where the
NFC aerial is located.
The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately.
If you lose your Digital Vehicle Key, deactivate
the "Digital Vehicle Key" service in Mercedes me
connect via http://www.mercedes.me.
Opening and closing 83
Locking/unlocking thevehicle with KEY‐
LESS-GO
Requirements:
RThe key is outside thevehicle.
RThe distance between thekey and thevehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
RThe driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
#To unlock thevehicle: touch the inner sur‐
face of the door handle.
#To lock thevehicle: touch sensor surface
1or 2.
#Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
sor surface 2until the closing process has
been completed.
%Further information on convenience closing
(/page 95).
If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid
is automatically unlocked.
84 Opening and closing
Problems with KEYLESS-GO
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes:
RThe key functions have been deactivated (/page 79).
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
RThere is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
RThe key is faulty.
#Activate thekey functions (/page 79).
#Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/page 79).
#Use the emergency keyto unlock or lock thevehicle (/page 79).
#Have thevehicle and keychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐
ing feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.
Opening and closing 85
#To activate: press and hold button 2for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
#To deactivate: press and hold button 1for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
In thefollowing situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
RWhile thevehicle is being towstarted/
pushed.
RIf thevehicle is being tested on theroller
dynamometer.
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the
emergency key
%If you wish to lock thevehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the emergency key.
#Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
into opening 1in the cover.
#Pull and hold the door handle.
#Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from thevehicle
until it releases.
#Release the door handle.
86 Opening and closing
#To unlock:turn the emergency key anti-
clockwise to position 1.
#To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1.
#Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐
der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Boot
Opens the boot lid
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter thevehicle interior if the
boot lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if thevehicle is in motion.
#Always switch off the engine before
opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
*NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obsta‐
cles above thevehicle
The boot lid swings upwards when it is
opened.
#Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐
cient clearance above the boot lid.
You have thefollowing options for opening
the boot lid:
#Pull the boot lid handle.
#Pull the boot lid remote operating switch 1.
#Press and hold thepbutton on thekey.
#Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make
a kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/page 90).
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature: with the boot lid stopped in an
Opening and closing 87
intermediate position, pull it upwards and
release it as soon as it begins to open.
With the boot lid opening limiter activated,
manually pull thestopped boot lid upwards.
Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing
feature: if an object restricts the boot lid during
the automatic opening process, obstacle detec‐
tion will stop the boot lid. The obstacle detection
function is only an aid and is not a substitute for
your attentiveness.
Closing the boot lid
&WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in thevehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Alwaysstow objects in such a waythat
they cannot be thrown around.
#Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
Comply with the loading guidelines when you are
loading thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during automatic closing of the boot lid
Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐
ing automatic closing of the boot lid. More‐
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing
in the closing area or may enter the closing
area during the closing process.
#Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area during the closing
process.
#Use one of thefollowing options to stop
the closing process:
RPress thepbutton on thekey.
RPress or pull theremote operating
switch on the driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button
on the boot lid.
RPull the boot lid handle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also
possible to stop the closing process by making a
kicking movement below therear bumper.
You have thefollowing options for closing
the boot lid:
#Pull the boot lid down using the handle
recess and push it closed.
#Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: with
the boot lid completely opened, make a kick‐
ing movement with your foot below the
bumper (/page 90).
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature: pull the boot lid handle and
release it as soon as it starts to close.
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature: with the boot lid stopped in an
intermediate position, push it downwards.
The boot lid will continue to close.
88 Opening and closing
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature and KEYLESS-GO: with the boot
lid completely opened, press and hold the
pbutton on thekey (with thekey in the
vicinity of thevehicle).
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature: press the boot lid remote oper‐
ating switch 1.
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature: press the closing button 1on
the boot lid.
#Vehicles with boot lid convenience clos‐
ing feature and KEYLESS-GO: press the
locking button 2on the boot lid.
If a key is detected outside thevehicle, the
boot lid will close and thevehicle will be
locked.
Boot lid automatic reversing function
If an object obstructs the boot lid during the
automatic closing process, the boot lid will open
again automatically. The automatic reversing
function is only an aid and is not a substitute for
your attentiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
The reversing function does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
Roverthe last 8 mm of the closing path.
In these situations in particular, thereversing
function cannot prevent someone being trap‐
ped.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#If someone is trapped, use one of the
following options:
RPress thepbutton on thekey.
Opening and closing 89
RPress theremote operating switch
on the driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button
on the boot lid.
RPull the boot lid handle.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close
or interrupt boot lid movement by performing a
kicking movement under therear bumper.
The kicking movement triggers the opening or
closing process alternately.
Observe the notes when opening (/page 87)
and closing (/page 88) the boot lid.
%Awarning tone sounds while the boot lid is
opening or closing.
&WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching theexhaust
system.
#Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection
range of the sensors.
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the boot lid:
Rwhen using an automatic car wash
Rwhen using a high pressure cleaner
#Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that thekey located is at least 3 m
away from thevehicle in such situa‐
tions.
When making the kicking movement, make sure
that your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐
wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Requirements:
RThe key is behind thevehicle.
RStand at least 30 cm away from thevehicle
while performing the kicking movement.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
RDo not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly.
RThe kicking movement must be towardsthe
vehicle and back again.
90 Opening and closing
1Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are
not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing cases:
RThe area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due
to road salt or snow.
RThe kicking movement is made using a pros‐
thetic leg.
The boot lid could be opened or closed uninten‐
tionally, in thefollowing situations:
RIf a person's arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing
thevehicle or picking up objects.
RIf objects are moved or placed behind the
vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
RIf clamping straps, tarpaulins or other cover‐
ings are pulled overthe bumper.
RIf a protective mat with a length reaching
overthe boot sill down into the detection
range of the sensors is used.
RIf the protective mat is not secured correctly.
RWhen working on the trailer hitch, trailers or
rear bicycle racks.
Deactivate KEYLESS-GO (/page 79) or do not
carry thekey about your person in these and
similar situations.
Switching separate boot locking on or off
If you centrally unlock thevehicle while separate
locking is activated, the boot will remain locked.
#To switch on: slide the switch to position
1.
#To switch off: slide the switch to position
2.
%If an accident has been detected, the boot
will unlock even if separate locking is
switched on.
Opening and closing 91
Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening
limiter
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Boot lid open. limiter
This function allows youto avoid bumping the
boot lid on a low garage ceiling, forexample.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Roller sunblinds
Extending therear side window roller sun‐
blinds
*NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to
it snapping back
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel
may be damaged.
#Always move theroller sun blind man‐
ually.
#Do not drive with theroller sun blind
hooked in and one or more side win‐
dows open at the same time.
#Pull theroller sunblind out by tab 1and
hook it onto brackets 2at thetop of the
window.
Extending/retracting therear window roller
sunblind
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when
extending or retracting theroller sun‐
blind
Body parts could become entrapped in the
sweep of theroller sunblind when it is being
extended or retracted.
#Make sure that no body parts are in the
sweep of theroller sunblind when it is
being extended or retracted.
#If someone becomes trapped, briefly
press the button again.
The opening or closing process is
briefly stopped. The roller sun blind
then returns to its starting position.
*NOTE Damage caused by objects
#Make sure that theroller sunblind can
move freely.
92 Opening and closing
#To extend or retract: press button 1.
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
tended.
#Activate theoverride feature forthe
rear side windows.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements:
RThe power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
Opening and closing 93
1Closing
2Opening
The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐
dence.
#To start automatic operation: press the
Wbutton beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
#To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull theWbutton again.
When thevehicle is switched off, the side win‐
dows can continue being operated.
The function is available for around five minutes
or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side win‐
dows
If an object blocks a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute foryour
attentiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reverse function does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
Rduring resetting
This means that thereverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#If someone becomes trapped, press the
Wbutton to open the side window
again.
Automatic function of the side windows
The side windows are closed automatically when
thevehicle is switched off:
Rif it starts to rain (detection by therain sen‐
sor on the windscreen)
Rin extreme temperatures
Rafter six hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The side windows are closed as far as theventi‐
lation position.
94 Opening and closing
Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side win‐
dows are closed completely if the sliding sunroof
is open.
If the side windows are blocked during auto‐
matic closing, the side window concerned will
open again slightly. The automatic function for
the sliding sunroof and the side windows is then
deactivated.
Convenience opening (ventilating thevehicle
before starting a journey)
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
#Press and hold theÜbutton on thekey.
The following functions are performed:
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RThe side windows are opened.
RThe sliding sunroof is opened.
RThe panoramic sliding sunroof is opened.
RThe seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.
If theroller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding
sunroof are closed, theroller sunblinds are
opened first.
#To interrupt convenience opening: release
theÜbutton.
#To continue convenience opening: press
and hold theÜbutton again.
Convenience closing (closing thevehicle
from outside)
&WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
inadvertent convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dow and the sliding sunroof.
#Observe the complete closing proce‐
dure when using convenience closing.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#Press and hold theßbutton on thekey.
The following functions are performed:
RThe vehicle is locked.
RThe side windows are closed.
RThe sliding sunroof is closed.
RThe panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
#To interrupt convenience closing: release
theßbutton.
Opening and closing 95
#To close theroller sunblinds: press and
hold theßbutton again.
%Convenience closing can also be operated
with KEYLESS-GO (/page 84).
Problems with the side windows
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatally injured if reversing protection is
not activated
If you close a side window again immediately
after it has been blocked, the side window
will close with increased or maximum force.
The reversing feature will then not be active.
Parts of the body could become trapped in
the closing area in the process.
#Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to re-
open the side window.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
A side window cannot be closed and
you cannot see the cause.
#Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
#Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
96 Opening and closing
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Immediately afterthis, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
#Immediately afterthis, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or
closed using the convenience opening
feature.
The key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/page 79).
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the sliding
sunroof
During opening and closing, parts of the
body could get caught in the sweep of the
sliding sunroof.
#When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep.
#Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.
Opening and closing 97
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid‐
ing sunroof is operated by children
Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment while
opening and closing theroller sunblinds
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts become trapped between the
roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof.
#When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep of
theroller sunblind.
#Release the switch immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#Press the switch in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.
*NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and
ice
Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of
the sliding sunroof.
#Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice.
*NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐
roof may damage the sealing strips.
#Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
*NOTE Important points to remember
when a roof rack is fitted
When a roof rack is fitted, raising or opening
the sliding sunroof may be limited.
#Check whether the sliding sunroof can
be raised or opened when a roof rack is
fitted.
#If in doubt, do not raise or open the
sliding sunroof.
98 Opening and closing
1Raising
2Opening
3Closing/lowering
Use the3button to operate the panorama
sliding sunroof and theroller sunblind.
RThe panorama sliding sunroof can be oper‐
ated only when theroller sunblind is open.
RThe roller sunblind can be operated only
when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
#To start automatic operation: press the
3button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
#To interrupt automatic operation: briefly
press the3button in any direction.
The opening/closing process will be stop‐
ped.
#Check whether the panorama sliding sunroof
can be raised or opened when a roof rack is
fitted.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding
sunroof
If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof
during the closing process, the sliding sunroof
will open again automatically. The automatic
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute foryour attentiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment even with
thereversing feature active
The reverse function does not react in partic‐
ular:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
Roverthe last 4 mm of the closing path
Rduring resetting
This means that thereverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing 99
Automatic reversing function of theroller
sunblind
If an object is obstructing theroller sunblind dur‐
ing the closing process, theroller sunblind will
open again automatically. The automatic revers‐
ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute
foryour attentiveness.
#When closing theroller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in therange of move‐
ment.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
In particular, thereversing function does not
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
gers.
This means that thereversing function can‐
not prevent entrapment in these situations.
#When closing theroller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in therange
of movement.
#Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#Press the button in any direction during
the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
By pushing or pulling the3button, you can
interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing
function when driving" and "Automatic lower‐
ing".
The sliding sunroof is automatically closed when
thevehicle has been switched off:
Rif it starts to rain (detection by therain sen‐
sor on the windscreen)
Rin theevent of extreme outside temperatures
Rafter six hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The sliding sunroof then rises at therear in order
to continue ventilating thevehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is blocked during an auto‐
matic closing procedure, theroof is opened
slightly again. The automatic function forthe
sliding sunroof and the side windows is then
deactivated.
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if
it starts to rain, theraised sliding sunroof is
automatically lowered while thevehicle is in
motion.
Automatic lowering function
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if
the sliding sunroof is raised at therear, it is
automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds.
At low speeds, it is raised again automatically.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐
matic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At high speeds theraised sliding sunroof
automatically lowers slightly at therear.
This could trap you or other persons.
100 Opening and closing
#Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
#If somebody becomes trapped, briefly
push the sliding sunroof button for‐
wards or backwards.
The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause. &WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof
closes with increased force.
Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.
#Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
#Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
#Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
Opening and closing 101
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the3button down again to the point of resist‐
ance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:
#Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
Vehicles without a panoramic slid‐
ing sunroof: the sliding sunroof does
not operate smoothly.
#Push the3button up to the point of resistance a number of times until the sliding sunroof is fully
open.
#Press the3button for another second.
#Close the sliding sunroof.
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding
sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the
roller sunblind does not operate
smoothly.
#Pull and hold the3button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
#Pull and hold the3button little by little until theroller sunblind is fully closed.
#Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct key.
The immobiliser is automatically activated when
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when
the ignition is switched on.
102 Opening and closing
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function of theATA system
If theATA system is primed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in thefollowing situations:
Rwhen a door is opened
Rwhen the boot lid is opened
Rwhen the bonnet is opened
Rwhen interior protection is triggered
(/page 104)
Rwhen tow-away protection is triggered
(/page 103)
The ATA system is primed automatically after
approximately ten seconds in thefollowing situa‐
tions:
Rafter locking thevehicle with thekey
Rafter locking thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1flashes when theATA system
is primed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in
thefollowing situations:
Rafter unlocking thevehicle with thekey
Rafter unlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Rafter pressing thestart/stop button with the
key in thestowage compartment
(/page 175)
%When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call
system is active and the alarm stays on for
more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐
matically sent to the Customer Assistance
Centre (/page 352).
Deactivating theATA
#Press theÜ,ßor pbutton on the
key.
or
#Press thestart/stop button with thekey in
thestowage compartment (/page 175)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
#Grasp the outside door handle with thekey
outside thevehicle.
Function of tow-away protection
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an
alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is
detected while tow-away protection is primed.
Opening and closing 103
Tow-away protection is automatically primed
after approximately 60 seconds:
Rafter locking thevehicle with thekey
Rafter locking thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Tow-away protection is only primed when thefol‐
lowing components are closed:
Rthe doors
Rthe boot lid
Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva‐
ted:
Rafter pressing theÜor pbutton on
thekey
Rafter pressing thestart/stop button with the
key in thestowage compartment
(/page 175)
Rafter unlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on detecting damage on a parked
vehicle (/page 207).
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Tow-away protection
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Tow-away protection is primed again in thefol‐
lowing cases:
RThe vehicle is unlocked again.
RA door is opened.
RThe vehicle is locked again.
Function of interior protection
When interior protection is primed, a visual and
audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec‐
ted in thevehicle interior.
Interior protection is primed automatically after
approximately ten seconds:
Rafter locking thevehicle with thekey
Rafter locking thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Interior protection is only primed when thefol‐
lowing components are closed:
Rthe doors
Rthe boot lid
Interior protection is automatically deactivated:
Rafter pressing theÜor pbutton on
thekey
Rafter pressing thestart/stop button with the
key in thestowage compartment
(/page 175)
Rafter unlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to afalse
alarm:
Rmoving objects such as mascots in thevehi‐
cle interior
Rwhen the side window is open
Rwhen the sliding sunroof is open
Rwhen the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
104 Opening and closing
Priming/deactivating interior protection
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Interior motion sensor
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Interior protection is primed again in thefollow‐
ing cases:
RThe vehicle is unlocked again.
RA door is opened.
RThe vehicle is locked again.
Opening and closing 105
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
&WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
ing vehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of thevehicle in the
following situations:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, thesteering wheel or the mir‐
ror while thevehicle is in motion
Rif youfasten your seat belt while thevehi‐
cle is in motion
#Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt. Ensure thefollowing when adjusting thesteering
wheel 1, seat belt 2and driver's seat 3:
Ryou are as faraway from the driver's airbag
as possible
Ryou are sitting in an upright position
Ryour thighs are slightly supportedby the seat
cushion
Ryour legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye
levelby the centre of the head restraint
Ryou can hold thesteering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays on the instru‐
ment cluster clearly
Ryou have a good overview of the traffic con‐
ditions
Ryour seat belt is pulled snugly against your
body and is routed across the centre of your
shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic
area
106 Seats and stowing
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically and
electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seats are adjustedby children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the digital vehicle
key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function
is activated via Mercedes me connect.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐
dren in thevehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while thevehicle is in
motion.
This could cause youto lose control of the
vehicle.
#Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
ing vehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of thevehicle in the
following situations:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, thesteering wheel or the mir‐
ror while thevehicle is in motion
Rif youfasten your seat belt while thevehi‐
cle is in motion
#Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured.
Seats and stowing 107
Children in particular could accidentally
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons
and become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not fitted or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an
accident or when braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints
fitted.
#Before driving off, make sure forevery
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offerthe intended
level of protection if you have not movedthe
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in theevent of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, forexam‐
ple.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul‐
der.
*NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when
moving the seats back.
#When moving the seats back, make
sure that there are no objects in the
footwell, under or behind the seats.
108 Seats and stowing
1Seat backrest inclination
2Seat height
3Seat fore-and-aft position
#To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever3and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged in posi‐
tion.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically and
electrically (with Seat Comfort Package)
1Seat backrest inclination
2Seat height
3Seat cushion inclination
4Seat fore-and-aft position
5Seat cushion length
#To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever4and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged in posi‐
tion.
#To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
5and slide the front section of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically and
electrically
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seats are adjustedby children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off.
Seats and stowing 109
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐
dren in thevehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while thevehicle is in
motion.
This could cause youto lose control of the
vehicle.
#Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons
and become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not fitted or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an
accident or when braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints
fitted.
#Before driving off, make sure forevery
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offerthe intended
level of protection if you have not movedthe
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in theevent of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, forexam‐
ple.
110 Seats and stowing
#Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul‐
der.
1Seat backrest inclination
2Seat height
3Seat cushion inclination
4Seat fore-and-aft position
#To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
1and slide the front section of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.
Seats and stowing 111
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1Head restraint height
2Seat backrest inclination
3Seat height
4Seat cushion length
5Seat cushion inclination
6Seat fore-and-aft position
#Save the settings with the memory function
(/page 119).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1Raise
2Soften
3Lower
4Harden
#Using buttons 1to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
mechanically
&WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
ing vehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of thevehicle in the
following situations:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, thesteering wheel or the mir‐
ror while thevehicle is in motion
Rif youfasten your seat belt while thevehi‐
cle is in motion
#Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
112 Seats and stowing
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not fitted or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an
accident or when braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints
fitted.
#Before driving off, make sure forevery
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
#To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#To lower: press release knob 1in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
#To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards.
#To move backwards: press and hold release
knob 2.
#Push the head restraint backwards and let go
of release knob 2.
Adjusting the head restraints of therear
seats mechanically
#To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#To lower: press release knob 1in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
Seats and stowing 113
Fitting/removing the rear seat head
restraints
Removal
#Release therear seat backrest and fold it for‐
wards slightly (/page 123).
#Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it
will go.
#Push release knob 1in the direction of the
arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting
#Insert the head restraint such that the
notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
#Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
#Fold therear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Configuring the seat settings
Multimedia system:
4©5Comfort 5Seat comfort
#Select a seat.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
#Select Side bolsters.
#Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar
region of the seat backrest (lumbar)
#Select Lumbar.
#Adjust the air cushions.
Overview of massage and workout programs
Massage programmes
The following programmes can be selected:
RWave Relaxation
RPulsating Massage
Active Workout
The Act. Workout backrest and Act. Workout
cushion programmes require your active cooper‐
ation. Tensing and releasing also helps to
improve blood flow to your muscles. Press
against a pressure point as soon as youfeel it.
114 Seats and stowing
Selecting the massage programme for the
front seats
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5aSeats
#Select Driver's seat or Passenger.
#Select Massage.
#Select a massage programme.
The massage programme runs for approx‐
imately 9to 15 minutes, depending on the
setting.
#To set the massage intensity: switch High
intensity on Oor off ª.
Resetting seat adjustments
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5aSeats 5Reset
#Select Yes or No.
Depending on whether the settings forthe driver
or front passenger seat are selected, only the
selected seat can be reset.
Switching the seat heating on/off
&WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
edly switching on the seat heater
Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
The health of persons with limited tempera‐
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
high temperatures may be affected or they
may even suffer burn-like injuries.
#Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heater.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated after it is
switched on repeatedly.
*NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, over‐
heating can occur due to objects or docu‐
ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions
or child seats. This could cause damage to
the seat surface.
#Make sure that no objects or docu‐
ments are on the seats when the seat
heater is switched on.
Requirements:
Rthe power supply is switched on
Seats and stowing 115
#To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton1repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps light up.
#To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton1repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heater
is switched off.
%The seat heater automatically switches down
from thethree heating levels after 8, 10 and
20 minutes until the seat heater is switched
off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements:
RThe power supply is switched on.
#To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton1repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
Depending on theventilation level, up to
three indicator lamps will light up.
#To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton1repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐
tion is switched off.
Steering wheel
Adjusts the steering wheel manually
&WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
ing vehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of thevehicle in the
following situations:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, thesteering wheel or the mir‐
ror while thevehicle is in motion
Rif youfasten your seat belt while thevehi‐
cle is in motion
#Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
116 Seats and stowing
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment forchil‐
dren when adjusting thesteering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust thesteering wheel.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the digital vehicle
key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function
is activated via Mercedes me connect.
#Push release lever1down as far as it will
go.
The steering column is unlocked.
#Adjust height 2and distance 3to the
steering wheel.
#Push release lever1up as far as it will go.
The steering column is locked.
#Check and make sure that thesteering col‐
umn is lockedby moving thesteering wheel.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
power supply is switched off.
1Adjusts the distance to thesteering wheel
2Adjusts the height
#Save the settings with the memory function
(/page 119).
Seats and stowing 117
Switching thesteering wheel heater on/off
Requirements:
RThe ignition is switched on.
#Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1or
2.
If indicator lamp 3lights up, thesteering
wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the ignition off, thesteering
wheel heater will switch off.
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature
&WARNING Risk of accident when pulling
away during the adjustment process of
the easy exit feature
If you pull away while the easy entry and
exit feature is making adjustments, you could
lose control of thevehicle.
#Alwayswait until the adjustment proc‐
ess is complete before pulling away.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while adjusting the easy entry and exit
feature
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts
thesteering wheel and the driver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants particularly
children could become trapped.
#During the adjustment process forthe
easy entry and exit feature, make sure
that no one has any body parts in the
sweep of thesteering wheel or the driv‐
er's seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
steering wheel:
#Move the adjustment lever of thesteer‐
ing wheel.
The adjustment process is stopped.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
driver's seat:
#Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process is stopped.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the digital vehicle
key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function
is activated via Mercedes me connect.
118 Seats and stowing
Vehicles with memory function: you can stop
the adjustment process by pressing one of the
memory function position buttons.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during activation of the easy entry and
exit feature by children
If children activate the easy entry and exit
feature, they can become trapped, particu‐
larly when unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
steering wheel will move upwards and the driv‐
er's seat will move back in thefollowing situa‐
tions:
Ryou switch the ignition off when the driver's
door is open
Ryou open the driver's door when the ignition
is switched off
%The steering wheel will move upwards only if
it is not already as high as it will go. The driv‐
er's seat will move backwards only if it is not
already in therearmost position.
The steering wheel and the driver's seat will
move back to the last drive position in thefol‐
lowing cases:
Ryou switch the power supply or the ignition
on when the driver's door is closed
Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on
The last drive position will be stored when:
Ryou switch the ignition off
RVehicles with memory function: call up the
seat settings via the memory function.
RVehicles with memory function: save the
seat settings via the memory function.
Vehicles with memory function: press one of
the memory function saved position buttons to
stop the adjustment process.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Easy Entry/Exit
#Select Steer. wheel and seat,Steering wheel
only or Off.
Operating the memory function
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the
memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv‐
er's side while driving, you could lose control
of thevehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when thevehicle is station‐
ary.
Seats and stowing 119
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐
ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat
or steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants particularly children could
become trapped.
#During the setting procedure of the
memory function, ensure that no body
parts are in the sweep of the seat or
thesteering wheel.
#If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐
ately release the memory function posi‐
tion button.
The adjustment process is stopped.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti‐
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Storing
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
The following systems can be selected:
RSeat, backrest and head restraint
RSteering wheel
ROutside mirrors
RHead-up display
#Set the seat, thesteering wheel, the head-up
display and the outside mirrors to the
desired position.
#Press memory button M and then press pre‐
set position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec‐
onds.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
120 Seats and stowing
#To call up: press and hold therelevant pre‐
set position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front
seat, thesteering wheel, head-up display and
outside mirror are in thestored position.
%When yourelease the preset position button,
steering wheel, the seat and mirror setting
functions stop immediately. The head-up dis‐
play continues to be adjusted.
Stowage areas
Notes on loading thevehicle
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter thevehicle interior if the
boot lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if thevehicle is in motion.
#Always switch off the engine before
opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
&WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in thevehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Alwaysstow objects in such a waythat
they cannot be thrown around.
#Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you inadequately stow objects in thevehi‐
cle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
alwaysrestrain the objects they contain in
theevent of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Alwaysstow objects in such a waythat
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Alwaysstow and secure objects that
are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or too large in the boot.
&WARNING Risk of burning from thetail‐
pipe or tailpipe trim
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
very hot. If you come into contact with these
car parts, you could burn yourself.
Seats and stowing 121
#Always be particularly careful when in
the vicinity of thetailpipe and tailpipe
trims and supervise children very
closely when in this area.
#Before any contact, allow the car parts
to cool down.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
thevehicle. You should bear thefollowing in
mind when loading thevehicle:
Rneverexceed the permissible gross mass or
the permissible axle loads forthevehicle
(including occupants).
Information can be found on thevehicle iden‐
tification plate (/page 446).
Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
Rsecure the load using the tie-down eyes and
distribute the load evenly.
Stowage spaces in thevehicle interior
Overview of the front stowage compart‐
ments
1Stowage space in the doors
2Stowage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection
3Stowage compartment in the front centre
console with a USB connection and charging
module for wireless charging of a mobile
phone (not available in all countries)
4Glove compartment
Locking and unlocking theglove compart‐
ment
#Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐
wise 2(to lock) or anti-clockwise 1(to
unlock).
122 Seats and stowing
Opening the spectacles compartment
#Press button 1.
Opening the stowage compartment in the
rear armrest
#Press release catch 1and swing the cover
of the armrest upwards.
Through-loading feature in therear bench
seat
Folding therear seat backrest forwards
&WARNING Risk of injury if therear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If therear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RIf this is the case, thevehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot/load com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#Make sure that the seat backrest and
therear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the left and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster. Awarning tone will also sound.
If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, thered lock verification indicator will be
visible.
The centre and outer seat backrests can be fol‐
ded forwards separately.
Seats and stowing 123
#Vehicles without a memory function:
move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐
wards, if necessary.
#Vehicles with a memory function: if at
least one section of therear seat backrest is
folded forwards, the corresponding front seat
will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to
avoid a collision.
#If necessary, fully insert therear seat back‐
rest head restraints.
#Left and right seat backrests: pull the left
or right release handle 1.
The corresponding seat backrest will fold for‐
wards.
#Centre seat backrest: pull therelease catch
3of the seat backrest 2forwards.
#Fold seat backrest 2forwards.
#If necessary, reset the driver's or front
passenger seat.
Folding therear seat backrest back
*NOTE Damage to the seat belt
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
damaged when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
#Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐
wards, if necessary.
124 Seats and stowing
#Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1
back until it engages.
Left and right seat backrests: if the seat
backrest is not engaged and locked, this will
be shown on the multifunction display on the
instrument cluster.
Awarning tone will also sound.
Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is
not engaged and locked, thered lock verifi‐
cation indicator 2will be visible.
Locking therelease catch of the centre rear
seat backrest
Requirements:
RThe left and centre seat backrests are
engaged and joined together.
You can lock the centre seat backrest release
catch if youwant to secure the boot against
unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest
can then be folded forwards only together with
the left seat backrest.
#Fold the centre and left seat backrests for‐
wards.
#To lock: slide catch 1upwards.
The release catch of the centre seat backrest
will be locked.
#To unlock: slide catch 1downwards.
Seats and stowing 125
Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading thevehicle
(/page 121).
1Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading
feature in therear bench seat)
Overview of bag hooks
&WARNING Risk of injury when using bag
hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage.
Objects or items of luggage could be thrown
around and thereby hit vehicle occupants
when braking or abruptly changing direc‐
tions.
#Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks.
#Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading thevehicle
(/page 121).
The bag hooks can bear a maximum load of
3kg. Do not use them to secure a load.
1Bag hook
Attaching the luggage net
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you inadequately stow objects in thevehi‐
cle interior, they could slip or be tossed
126 Seats and stowing
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
alwaysrestrain the objects they contain in
theevent of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Alwaysstow objects in such a waythat
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Alwaysstow and secure objects that
are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or too large in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading thevehicle.
#Vehicles with through-loading feature in
therear bench seat: fold up the tie-down
eyes.
#Hook the luggage net 1into the front and
rear tie-down eyes.
#Vehicles without a through-loading fea‐
ture in therear bench seat: hook therings
into the luggage net's hooks 1.
#Hook therings into the hooks on the boot
floor.
EASY-PACK boot box
Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK boot
box to any position
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
and injured when moving thefloor up
When thefloor moves up, your hands may
become trapped on the frame of the EASY-
PACK boot box and objects may be thrown
upwards.
#When thefloor moves up, make sure
that your hands are not within the
sweep of thefloor.
#If someone becomes trapped, carefully
push the centre of thefloor downward.
#Remove all objects from thefloor
before moving it up.
Seats and stowing 127
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when pressing in the EASY-PACK boot
box
When the EASY-PACK boot box is pressed
into theretracted position, your hands may
become trapped. Children, in particular, may
injure themselves when doing so.
#When pressing the EASY-PACK boot box
in, make sure that your hands are not
within therange of movement of the
EASY-PACK boot box.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
This also applies to the digital vehicle
key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function
is activated via Mercedes me connect.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to theextended EASY-
PACK boot box
The EASY-PACK boot box may be damaged
when it is extended.
#Do not place any objects on or press
down on the EASY-PACK boot box
frame.
#Do not close the boot lid when the
EASY-PACK boot box is extended.
*NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK boot
box by objects
Objects which are sharp-edged, pointed,
fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that
roll can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and
be thrown out.
#Do not transport objects which are
sharp-edged, pointed, rounded or frag‐
ile and objects that roll in the EASY-
PACK boot box.
#Alwaysstow and secure such objects
outside of the box in the boot.
#Always observe the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK boot box.
#Do not use the EASY-PACK boot box
when therear seats are folded for‐
wards.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK
boot box is 10 kg.To prevent the box from being
overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the boot
floor when the load reaches approximately 5 kg.
128 Seats and stowing
#To remove: pull handle 2on the box.
#To increase the load capacity: press the
centre of floor 1downwardsto the desired
position and box size.
#To reduce the load capacity: press button
3.
#To stow: press the box in completely using
handle 2until it locks in place.
%Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-
PACK boot box (/page 394).
Installing or removing the EASY-PACK boot
box
Fitting
#Insert theretainers 2of box 1into the
openings 3.
#Raise the box 1and press the hooks 5
into the anchorages 4.
#Turn rotating catch 6inward.
Removal
#Turn rotating catches 6outward.
#Lower box 1and pull it out of anchorages
4.
Seats and stowing 129
Opening thestowage space under the boot
floor
*NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot
floor
If the handle in the boot is left protruding,
the handle may be damaged.
#Unhinge the handle before you close
the boot lid and press the handle closed
again.
#Pull handle 1up and hook it into drip rail
2.
Attaching a roof rack
&WARNING Risk of injury if the maximum
roof load is exceeded
When you load theroof, the centre of gravity
of thevehicle rises and the usual driving
characteristics as well as thesteering and
braking characteristics change. During cor‐
nering, thevehicle tilts more strongly and
may react more sluggishly to steering move‐
ments.
If youexceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as thesteer‐
ing and braking characteristics, will be
greatly impaired.
#Always comply with the maximum roof
load and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
130 Seats and stowing
*NOTE Vehicle damage from non-
approvedroof racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks
which have not been tested and approvedby
Mercedes-Benz.
#Only use roof rackstested and
approvedby Mercedes-Benz.
#Depending on thevehicle equipment,
ensure that when theroof rack is fitted:
Rthe sliding sunroof can be fully
raised.
Rthe boot lid can be fully opened.
#Position the load on theroof rack in
such a waythat thevehicle will not sus‐
tain damage even when it is in motion.
*NOTE Damage to the panoramic sliding
sunroof when a roof rack is fitted
The panoramic sliding sunroof may be dam‐
aged by theroof rack if you attempt to open
it when theroof rack is fitted.
#Do not open the panoramic sliding sun‐
roof if a roof rack is fitted.
In order to allow ventilation of thevehicle
interior, you can raise the panoramic sliding
sunroof.
*NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof
when a roof rack is fitted
The sliding sunroof may be damagedby the
roof rack if you attempt to open it when the
roof rack is fitted.
#Do not open the sliding sunroof when
theroof rack is fitted.
In order to allow ventilation of thevehicle
interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. *NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched
when being opened.
#Do not use metallic or hard objects.
#Carefully fold the covers 1upwards in the
direction of the arrow.
Seats and stowing 131
#Secure theroof rack to the anchorage points
under the covers 1.
#Comply with theroof rack manufacturer's
installation instructions.
#Secure the load on theroof rack.
Cup holders
Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from
the centre console (automatic transmission)
&WARNING Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container
secure while thevehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while thevehicle is in
motion, the container may be flung around
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle
occupants may come into contact with the
liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
You could be distracted from traffic condi‐
tions and you may lose control of thevehicle.
#Only use the cup holder when thevehi‐
cle is stationary.
#Only use the cup holder for containers
of theright size.
#Always close the container, particularly
if the liquid is hot.
#To remove:slide catch 2forwards and pull
out cup holder 1.
#To fit: insert cup holder 1and slide back
catch 2.
%The cup holder rubber mat can be removed
for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.
Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from
the centre console (manual transmission)
&WARNING Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container
secure while thevehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while thevehicle is in
motion, the container may be flung around
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle
occupants may come into contact with the
liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
You could be distracted from traffic condi‐
tions and you may lose control of thevehicle.
132 Seats and stowing
#Only use the cup holder when thevehi‐
cle is stationary.
#Only use the cup holder for containers
of theright size.
#Always close the container, particularly
if the liquid is hot.
Removing
#Slide both cup holder upper sections 1
inwards until they release.
#Slide the cup holder forwards and remove
cup holder 2.
Fitting
#Insert the cup holder at the front and then
slide it until it reaches the edge 3.
The wedge of the upper section of the cup
holder must face upwards.
#Slide upper cup holder sections 1outwards
until both right and left sides 2engage.
%The cup holder rubber mat can be removed
for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.
Opening or closing the cup holder in therear
armrest
*NOTE Damage to therear armrest due to
body weight
When folded out, therear armrest can be
damaged due to body weight.
#Do not sit or support yourself on the
rear seat armrest.
*NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When therear armrest is folded back the cup
holder could become damaged.
#Only fold therear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.
Seats and stowing 133
#To open: press cup holder 1or 2.
Cup holder 1or 2extends automatically.
#To close: push cup holder 1or 2back
until it engages.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Using the ashtray in the front centre console
*NOTE Damage to thestowage compart‐
ment under the ashtray
The stowage compartment under the ashtray
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
yourest lit cigarettes on it.
#Ensure that the ashtray is fully engaged.
#To open: push up the cover2of the ash‐
tray on its right or left side.
#To remove the insert: press insert 1
upwards slightly and pull it out upwards.
#To refit the insert: press insert 1into the
holder until it engages.
Using the ashtray in the door stowage com‐
partment
134 Seats and stowing
#During a journey: place the closed ashtray
in the front door stowage compartment while
thevehicle is in motion.
#Check that it is seated firmly.
#Comply with the notes on loading thevehicle
(/page 121).
#To open: fold the lid 1upwards.
%Twist thetop part of the ashtray to remove it
for cleaning, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water,
or for emptying.
Using therear ashtray
#To open: pull cover2out by its top handle
edge.
#To remove the insert: push ribbing 3from
the left side and pull insert 1upwards and
out.
#To fit the insert: fit insert 1from above
and press down on the holder until it
engages.
Using the cigarette lighter in the front centre
console
&WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if youtouch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if:
Ryou drop the hot cigarette lighter
Rachild holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, forexample
#Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob.
#Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements:
RThe ignition is switched on.
#Press in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
Seats and stowing 135
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket in the front centre
console
Requirements:
ROnly devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible.
#Lift up socket cap 1.
#Insert the plug of the device.
If you have connected a device to the12 V
socket, leave the cover of thestowage compart‐
ment open.
Using the12 V socket in therear passenger
compartment
Requirements:
ROnly connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
#Pull cover2out by its top handle edge.
#Fold up the cap of socket1.
Using the 230 V socket in therear
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐
aged connecting cables or sockets
When a suitable device is connected, the
230 V power socket will be carrying a high
voltage. You could receive an electric shock
if the connecting cable or the 230 V power
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
or wet.
#Use only connecting cables that are dry
and free of damage.
#When the ignition is switched off, make
sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
#Immediately have the 230 V power
socketchecked or replaced at a quali‐
fied specialised workshop if it is dam‐
aged or has been pulled out of the trim.
#Never plug the connecting cable into a
230 V power socketthat is damaged or
has been pulled out of the trim.
136 Seats and stowing
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock:
Rif youreach into the socket.
Rif you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
#Do not reach into the socket.
#Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Requirements:
RDevices are equipped with a suitable plug
which conformsto thestandards specific to
the country you are in.
RA device up to a maximum of 150 W is used.
RDo not use multiple socket outlets.
#Open flap 3.
#Insert the plug of the device into 230 V
socket1.
When the on-board electrical system voltage
is sufficient, indicator lamp 2lights up.
USB port in therear
You can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile
phone, at USB ports 1using a suitable charg‐
ing cable.
The devices can be charged with 5 V (2.1 A) and
when the ignition is switched on.
Seats and stowing 137
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
connection with theexterior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile
phone
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in thevehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Alwaysstow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Alwaysstow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of fire from placing
objects in the mobile phone stowage
compartment
If you place objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, they may heat up
excessively and even catch fire.
#Do not place additional objects, espe‐
cially those mode of metal, in the
mobile phone stowage compartment.
*NOTE Damage to objects caused by
placing them in the mobile phone stow‐
age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, they may be dam‐
aged by electromagnetic fields.
#Do not place credit cards, storage
media or other objects sensitive to
electromagnetic fields in the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
*NOTE Damage to the mobile phone
stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage
compartment, the compartment may be
damaged.
#Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
RDepending on thevehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to thevehicle's
exterior aerial via thecharging module.
138 Seats and stowing
RThe charging function and wireless connec‐
tion of the mobile phone to thevehicle's
exterior aerial are only available if the ignition
is switched on.
RSmall mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
RLarge mobile phones which do not rest flat in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may
not be able to be charged or connected with
thevehicle's exterior aerial.
RThe mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This depends on the appli‐
cations (apps) currently open in the back‐
ground.
RTo ensure more efficient charging and con‐
nection with thevehicle's exterior aerial,
remove the protective cover from the mobile
phone. Protective covers which are neces‐
sary for wireless charging are excluded.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. You can find a list of compatible
mobile phones at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
#Place the mobile phone as close to the
centre of mat 1as possible with the display
facing upwards.
When thecharging symbol is shown in the
multimedia system, the mobile phone is
being charged.
Malfunctions during thecharging process are
shown in the media display.
%The mat can be removedby thetabfor
cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
Fitting/removing the floor mats
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of thevehicle.
#Stow all objects in thevehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Alwaysfitthefloor mats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that
there is always sufficient room forthe
pedals.
#Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
Seats and stowing 139
#To fit: slide the corresponding seat back‐
wards and lay thefloor mat in thefootwell.
#Press thestuds 1onto the holders 2.
#Adjust the corresponding seat.
#To remove: pull thefloor mat off the holders
2.
#Remove thefloor mat.
140 Seats and stowing
Exterior lighting
Notes on changing the lights when driving
abroad
Vehicles with halogen or static LED head‐
lamps: it is not necessary to change the head‐
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in
countries in which traffic drives on theother
side of theroad.
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: before
crossing the border into countries in which traf‐
fic drives on theother side of theroad, it is nec‐
essary to set the headlamps to symmetrical low
beam (/page 149).
Once the headlamps have been changed:
Roncoming traffic will not be dazzled
Rthe edge of theroad will not be illuminated
as far or as high
Rthe "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog
light" functions will not be available
The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical
low beam when youreturn from abroad.
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of thevehicle are
only aids. The driver of thevehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1WLeft-hand parking lights
2XRight-hand parking lights
3TStanding lights and licence plate light‐
ing
4ÃAutomatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
Light and sight 141
5LLow beam / high beam
6RSwitches therear fog lights on/off
When low beam is activated, the indicator lamp
forthestanding lights Tis deactivated and
replaced by the low beam indicator lamp L.
#Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-
lit area, in accordance with therelevant legal
stipulations.
*NOTE Battery discharging by operating
thestanding lights
Operating thestanding lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery.
#Where possible, switch on the
right Xor left Wparking light.
In the case of severe battery discharging, the
standing lights or parking lights are automati‐
cally switched off to facilitate the next engine
start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐
ing lights) switches off automatically when the
driver's door is opened.
RObserve the notes on surround lighting
(/page 149).
Automatic driving lights function
The standing lights, low beam and daytime run‐
ning lights are switched on automatically
depending on the ignition status and the light
conditions.
&WARNING Risk of accident when the
dipped beam is switched off in poor visi‐
bility
When the light switch is set to Ã,the
dipped beam may not be switched on auto‐
matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
of poor visibility such as spray.
#In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible forvehicle lighting.
Switching therear fog lights on or off
Requirements:
RThe light switch is in theLor Ãposi‐
tion.
#Press theRbutton.
Please observe the country-specific laws on the
use of rear fog lamps.
Adjusting the headlamp range (vehicles with
halogen headlamps)
The headlamp range adjuster allows youto
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in
relation to thevehicle's load condition.
142 Light and sight
gDriver's seat and front passenger seat occu‐
pied
1Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear
seats occupied
2Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear
seats occupied, boot laden
3Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu‐
pied and maximum permissible rear axle
load utilised
#Turn the headlamp range adjusterto the
position that corresponds to the load condi‐
tion of your vehicle.
Operating the combination switch for the
lights
1High beam
2Turn signal indicator, right
3Headlamp flasher
4Turn signal indicator, left
#Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
High beam
#To switch on: turn the light switch to the
Lor Ãposition.
#Press the combination switch beyond the
point of resistance in the direction of arrow
1.
When the main beam is activated, the indica‐
tor lamp for dipped beam Lis deactiva‐
ted and replaced by the indicator lamp for
the main beam K.
#To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its starting position.
Headlamp flasher
#Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Light and sight 143
Turn signal indicators
#To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2or 4.
The corresponding turn signal indicator will
flash three times.
#To indicate permanently: press the combi‐
nation switch beyond the point of resistance
in the direction of arrow 2or 4.
Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:
RIndicator operation activated by the driver
can extend forthe duration of the lane
change.
RIf the driver indicated directly beforehand
but a lane change was not immediately
possible, the turn signal indicator may
activate automatically.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
lights
#Press button 1.
The hazard warning lights will switch on auto‐
matically if:
Rthe airbag has been deployed.
Rthevehicle is heavily braked from a speed of
more than 70 km/h to astandstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning
lights will switch off automatically at approx‐
imately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the
hazard warning lights using button 1.
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Intelligent Light System function
The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the
driving and weather situation and provide exten‐
ded functions for improved illumination of the
road.
The system comprises thefollowing functions:
RActive headlamps (/page 145)
RCornering light (/page 145)
RMotorway mode (/page 145)
REnhanced fog light function (/page 146)
RAdverseweather light (/page 146)
RCity lighting (/page 146)
System limitations
RThe system is active only when it is dark.
144 Light and sight
Active headlamps function
RThe headlamps follow thesteering move‐
ments.
RRelevant areas are better illuminated during
travel.
The functions are active when the dipped beam
is switched on.
Depending on thevehicle's equipment, the
course of the lane in which you are driving is
also evaluated and the active headlamps func‐
tion adjusts the light in advance.
Cornering light function
The cornering light improvesthe illumination of
the carriagewayover a wide angle in the turning
direction, enabling better visibility on tight
bends, forexample. It can be activated only
when the low beam is switched on.
The function is active in thefollowing cases:
Rat speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig‐
nal indicator is switched on or thesteering
wheel is turned
Rat speeds between 40 km/hand 70 km/h
when thesteering wheel is turned
Roundabout and intersection function: the
cornering light will be activated on both sides
based on an evaluation of the current GPS posi‐
tion of thevehicle. It will remain active until after
thevehicle has left theroundabout or the inter‐
section.
Motorway mode function
Motorway mode increases therange and bright‐
ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil‐
ity.
The function is enabled if a motorway journey is
detected by:
Rthevehicle's speed
Light and sight 145
Rthe multifunction camera
Rthe GPS
The function will not be enabled in thefollowing
cases:
Rat speeds below 80 km/h.
Enhanced fog light function
The enhanced fog light function reduces glare
forthe driver and improves the illumination of
the edge of the carriageway.
The function is automatically activated under the
following conditions:
Rat speeds below 70 km/h when therear fog
lights are switched on.
The function is automatically deactivated under
thefollowing conditions:
Rat speeds above 100 km/h after activation.
Rwhen therear fog light is switched off.
%The enhanced fog light function can be acti‐
vated up to a speed of 100 km/h by switch‐
ing on therear fog light.
Function of the adverseweather light
The adverse weather light reduces reflections in
rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in
the headlamps. This reduces theglare forthe
driver and other road users.
Function of city lighting
City lighting improves the illumination of road‐
sides within built-up areas using broader distri‐
bution of light.
The function is active in thefollowing cases:
Rat low speeds
Rin illuminated parts of built-up areas
Switching the Intelligent Light System
on/off
Requirements:
RThe ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5÷Light settings
5Intell. Light System
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
&WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐
nise thefollowing road users:
RRoad users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
trians
RRoad users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
146 Light and sight
RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognise other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late.
In this, or in similar situations, the automatic
main beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the main beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Detection may be restricted in thefollowing
cases:
RIn poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
RIf there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting thevehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐
tions.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically
switches between thefollowing types of light:
RLow beam
RHigh beam
At speeds above 30 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
The high beam switches off automatically in the
following cases:
RAt speeds below 25 km/h.
RIf other road users are detected.
RIf street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds above approximately 50 km/h:
RThe headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐
lated automatically based on the distance to
other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near theoverhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
#To switch on: turn the light switch to the
Ãposition.
Light and sight 147
#Switch on the main beam using the combina‐
tion switch.
When the main beam is switched on auto‐
matically in the dark, the_indicator
lamp on the multifunction display comes on.
#To switch off: switch off the main beam
using the combination switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function
&WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec‐
ognise thefollowing road users:
RRoad users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
trians
RRoad users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
users that have lights, or may recognise
them too late.
In this, or in similar situations, the automatic
main beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the main beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Detection may be restricted in thefollowing
cases:
RIn poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
Rif there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid.
You are responsible for adjusting thevehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf‐
fic conditions.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automati‐
cally switches between thefollowing types of
light:
RLow beam
RPartial high beam
RHigh beam
RULTRA RANGE Highbeam
148 Light and sight
ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright‐
ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted
maximum.
Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine
past other road users rather than dazzling them.
The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low
beam.
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi‐
cient street lighting:
RThe partial high beam and the high beam will
be switched off automatically.
At speeds above 30 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
RIf other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will be switched on automatically.
At speeds above 40 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected on a
straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will
be switched on automatically.
RIf other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will be switched on automatically.
RIf highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA
RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto‐
matically.
At speeds above approximately 50 km/h:
RThe headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐
lated automatically based on the distance to
other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near theoverhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
on/off
#To switch on: turn the light switch to the
Ãposition.
#Switch on the main beam using the combina‐
tion switch.
When the main beam is switched on auto‐
matically in the dark, the_indicator
lamp on the multifunction display will light
up.
#To switch off: switch off the main beam
using the combination switch.
Setting the dipped beam
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5÷Light settings
5Dipped-beams
#Select Left-side traffic or Right-side traffic.
Setting theexterior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5÷Light settings
5Exterior light shut-off
#Set the switch-off delay time.
Setting the surround lighting
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5÷Light settings
5Locator lighting
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
If the surround lighting is switched on, theexte‐
rior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds afterthe
Light and sight 149
vehicle is unlocked. When youstart thevehicle,
the surround lighting is deactivated and the
automatic driving lights are activated.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1pFront left reading lamp
2|Automatic interior lighting control
3cFront interior lighting
4uRear interior lighting
5pFront right reading lamp
#To switch on or off: press button 15
accordingly.
Control panel in thegrab handle
1pRear reading lamp
#To switch on or off: press button 1.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5÷Light settings
5Ambient lighting
Setting the colour
#Select Colour.
#Set a colour.
Adjusting the brightness
#Select Brightness.
#Set a brightness value.
Activating the brightness for zones
#Select Brightness zones.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
The Display,Front and Rear zones can be set
separately.
150 Light and sight
Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5÷Light settings
5Interior light shut-off
#Set the switch-off delay time.
Changing bulbs (only forvehicles with halo‐
gen headlamps)
Notes on changing bulbs
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hot
during operation.
When replacing a bulb, you could burn your‐
self on these component parts.
#Allow the component parts to cool
down before replacing the bulb.
RDo not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if
its glass has been scratched. The bulb may
otherwise explode.
RDo not touch theglass bulb with your bare
hands.
RProtect bulbs from moisture and do not allow
bulbs to come into contact with liquids.
Overview of the bulbs to be changed
Halogen headlamps
1Turn signal indicator: PWY 24 W bulb
2Main beam: H7 55 W bulb
3Dipped beam: H7 55 W bulb
Light and sight 151
Tail lamps
1Turn signal indicator: PY 21 W bulb
2Reversing light: W 16 W bulb
Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo‐
gen headlamps)
Fitting/removing the cover in the front
wheel arch
Requirements:
RThe lighting system is switched off.
RThe appropriate front wheel is turned
inwards.
#To remove:using a suitable object, turn the
two mounts 1of the cover2in an anti-
clockwise direction as far as they will go.
#Remove the unlocked cover2from the
wheel arch liner by pulling it upwards.
#To fit: insert cover2at bottom of the wheel
arch liner.
#Using a suitable object, turn the two mounts
1of the cover2in clockwise direction as
far as they will go.
Replacing bulbs in the halogen headlamp
Requirements:
The lighting system is switched off.
Low beam/high beam
RA H7 55 W light bulb is available.
RThe bonnet is open.
Turn signal lights:
RA PWY 24 W light bulb is available.
RThe cover in the front wheel arch has been
removed.
152 Light and sight
1Low beam
2High beam
3Turn signal lights
#Turn therelevant housing cover13anti-
clockwise and remove it.
#Low beam / high beam: turn the socket
anti-clockwise and remove it.
#Indicator: turn the socket anti-clockwise,
release it and remove it.
#Pull the bulb out of the socket.
#Insert the new bulb into the socket such that
the entire base of the bulb is resting on the
bottom of the socket.
#Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.
#Press on the housing cover and turn it clock‐
wise.
#Turn signal lights: install the cover in the
front wheel arch.
Changing therear bulbs (vehicles with halo‐
gen headlamps)
Opening and closing the side trim panels in
the boot
#To open: release right-hand or left-hand side
trim panels 1at thetop and remove.
#To close: reinsert side trim panel 1.
Replacing the tail lamp bulbs
Requirements:
The lighting system is switched off.
The side trim panel in the boot is open.
Turn signal lights:
RA PY 21 W light bulb is available.
Reversing lights:
RA W 16 W light bulb is available.
Light and sight 153
#Push the upper and lower catches on the
plug together and remove the plug.
#Turn wing screw 190° anti-clockwise and
remove the bulb holder.
#Indicator: push bulb 2gently into the bulb
mount, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it
from the bulb mount.
#Insert the new bulb into the bulb mount and
turn it clockwise.
#Reversing light: pull bulb 3out of the bulb
mount.
#Insert the new bulb into the bulb mount.
#Insert the bulb mount again.
#Turn wing screw 190° clockwise.
#Insert the plug until the catch hooks engage
audibly.
#Close the side trim panel.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer
system
Switching the windscreen wipers on/off
1gWindscreen wipers off
2ÄIntermittent wiping, normal
3ÅIntermittent wiping, frequent
154 Light and sight
4°Continuous wiping, slow
5¯Continuous wiping, fast
#Turn the combination switch to the corre‐
sponding position 1-5.
#Single wipe/washing: push the button on
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1.
RíSingle wipe
RîWiping with washer fluid
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the windscreen wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
#Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before changing the
wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms to thechange posi‐
tion
#Switch the ignition on and switch off again
immediately.
#Within around 15 seconds, press theî
button on the combination switch for approx‐
imately three seconds (/page 154).
The wiper arms will move into thechange
position.
Removing the wiper blades
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
screen.
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
tion of arrow 1away from the wiper arm as
far as it will go.
#Slide catch 2in the direction of arrow3
until it engages in theremoval position.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 4.
Light and sight 155
Fitting the wiper blades
#Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper
arm in the direction of arrow 1.
#Slide catch 2in the direction of arrow3
until it engages in the locking position.
#Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐
screen.
#Switch on the ignition.
#Press theîbutton on the combination
switch (/page 154).
The wiper arms will move into the original
position.
#Switch off the ignition.
Maintenance display
#Remove the protective film 1from the
maintenance display on the tip of the newly
fitted wiper blades.
If the colour of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
%The duration until the colour changes varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
&WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
ing vehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of thevehicle in the
following situations:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, thesteering wheel or the mir‐
ror while thevehicle is in motion
Rif youfasten your seat belt while thevehi‐
cle is in motion
156 Light and sight
#Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgement of distances when using the
outside mirror
The outside mirrors reflect objects on a
smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear.
As a result, you may misjudge the distance
between you and theroad user driving
behind you, e.g. when changing lanes.
#Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
der in order to ensure that you are
aware of the actual distance between
you and theroad users driving behind
you.
Folding the outside mirrors in/out
#Briefly press button 1.
Resetting the outside mirrors
%If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must
be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror
folding function work properly.
#Briefly press button 1.
Adjusting the outside mirrors
#Press button 3or 4to select the outside
mirrorto be adjusted.
#Press button 2to adjust the position of the
mirrorglass.
Engaging the outside mirrors
#Vehicles without electrically folding out‐
side mirrors: manually move the outside
mirror into the correct position.
#Vehicles with electrically folding outside
mirrors: press and hold button 1.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐
bly engage in position. The outside mirror will
now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
&WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning
due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte
Electrolyte may escape if theglass in an
automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
Light and sight 157
The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita‐
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or
be swallowed.
#If you come into contact with electro‐
lyte, observe thefollowing:
RRinse the electrolyte from your skin
and seek medical attention immedi‐
ately.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water and seek
medical attention immediately.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing
which has come into contact with
electrolyte.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐
ror on the driver's side automatically go into
anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits
the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limitations
The system does not go into anti-dazzle mode in
thefollowing situations:
Rthe engine is switched off
Rreversegear is engaged
Rthe interior lighting is switched on
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐
tion function
The parking position makes parking easier.
In thefollowing situations, the front-passenger
outside mirror will swivel downwards in the
direction of therear wheel on the front passeng‐
er's side:
Rthe parking position is stored (/page 159)
Rthe front-passenger mirror is selected
Rreversegear is engaged
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
back to its original position in thefollowing sit‐
uations:
Ryou shift the transmission to another trans‐
mission position
Ryou are travelling at speeds greater than
15 km/h
Ryou press the button forthe outside mirror
on the driver's side
158 Light and sight
Storing the parking position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using reversegear
Storing
#Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button2.
#Engage reversegear.
#Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
Calling up
#Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button2.
#Engage reversegear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
to thestored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Auto. fold-in mirrors
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Operating the sun visors
Using the single sun visor
#Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1
down.
#Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1to
the side.
Light and sight 159
#Vehicles with an extendable sun visor: slide
sun visor 1horizontally as required.
160 Light and sight
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control
An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐
filter in the engine compartment must always be
used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐
tion lebuttonvel monitoring and the air filtration
work correctly. Make sure that thefilter is instal‐
led correctly and thefilter housing in the engine
compartment is closed correctly using the cap
and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use
filters recommended and approvedby
Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
THERMATIC control panel overview
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that
the corresponding function is activated.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
1wSets the driver's side temperature
2_Sets the air distribution
3HSets the airflow or switches off climate
control
4ÃSets climate control to automatic
mode (/page 163)
5¬Defrosts the windscreen
6Vehicles without residual heat: tcalls up
the air conditioning menu
Vehicles with residual heat: !calls up
the air conditioning menu; switches residual
heat on/off (/page 164)
7¤Switches therear window heater
on/off
8Vehicles without a stationary heater: 0
switches synchronisation on or off
(/page 164)
Vehicles with a stationary heater: &
switches thestationary heater on/off
(/page 166)
9gSwitches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/page 164)
A¿Switches the A/C function on/off
(/page 163)
BwSets the front passenger side tempera‐
ture
THERMOTRONIC control panel overview
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that
the corresponding function is activated.
Climate control 161
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
1wSets the driver's side temperature
2_Sets the driver's side air distribution
3HSets the airflow or switches off climate
control
4ÃSets climate control to automatic
mode (/page 163)
5¬Defrosts the windscreen
6!Calls up the air conditioning menu
Switches theresidual heat on or off
(/page 164)
7¤Switches therear window heater on or
off
8Vehicles without a stationary heater:
¿switches the A/C function on/off
(/page 163)
Vehicles with a stationary heater: &
switches thestationary heater on/off
(/page 166)
9gSwitches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/page 164)
A_Sets the front passenger side air distri‐
bution
BwSets the front passenger side tempera‐
ture
Rear operating unit
1Sets thetemperature
2Display
3Sets the airflow
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off
#To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using theHbutton.
#To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
theHbutton.
162 Climate control
%If climate control is switched off, the win‐
dows may mist up more quickly. Switch off
climate control only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on or off via the
control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
thevehicle's interior air.
#Press button ¿.
Switch off the A/C function only briefly;other‐
wise, the windows may mist up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
thevehicle when cooling mode is active. This is
not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control 5A/C
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
thevehicle's interior air.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐
trolled and maintained at a constant levelby the
air supply.
#Press theÃbutton.
#To switch to manual mode: press theH
or _button.
Climate style
Climate style function
In automatic mode, you can select thefollowing
climate style settings forthe driver's and front
passenger areas:
RFOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
RMEDIUM: medium airflow,standard setting
RDIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draught-free setting
Setting the climate style
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control
5Climate mode
#Select Driver and/or Passenger.
#Select FOCUS,MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.
%To feel the effect of the climate style, the
Ãfunction must be active (/page 163).
Overview of the air distribution settings
The symbols on the display indicate which vents
the airflow is being directed through:
¯defroster vents
Pcentre and side air vents
Ofootwell vents
Scentre, side and footwell vents
adefroster and footwell vents
_all vents
bdefroster, middle and side air vents
Wautomatic air distribution
Climate control 163
Setting therear climate control using the
multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control 5Rear
Setting the airflow
#Select Airflow.
#Set the airflow.
Setting thetemperature
#Select Temperature.
#Set thetemperature.
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronisation function via the control
panel
The climate control can be operated centrally
using the synchronisation function. The tempera‐
ture and air distribution setting forthe driver
side is adopted automatically forthe front
passenger side.
#Press the0button.
The synchronisation function is deactivated if
the settings for one of theother climate zones
are changed.
Activating or deactivating the climate con‐
trol synchronisation function using the mul‐
timedia system
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control
5SYNC
The climate control can be controlled centrally
using the synchronisation function. The tempera‐
ture setting is automatically adoptedfor all cli‐
mate zones.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside
#Press theÃbutton.
#If the windows continue to mist up: press the
¬button.
Windows misted up on the outside
#Switch on the windscreen wipers.
#Press theÃbutton.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
#Press thegbutton.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
fresh air mode after some time.
%If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch
on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching theresidual heat on/off
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is parked.
It is possible to make use of theresidual heat
from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐
ing the front compartment of thevehicle for
approximately 30 minutes.
#To switch on: press the!button.
164 Climate control
Residual heat is switched off automatically.
Activating/deactivating ionisation
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control
5Ionisation
Ionisation cleans and refreshes the interior air of
thevehicle. The ionisation of the interior air is
odourless.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Fragrance system
Setting the fragrance system
Requirements:
RAutomatic climate control is activated.
RThe glove box is closed.
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control
5Air freshener
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐
grance throughout thevehicle interior from a fla‐
con located in theglove box.
#To set the intensity: select High,Medium,
Low or Off.
Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐
grance system
&WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐
fume
If children open theflacon, they could drink
the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐
tact with their eyes.
#Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk.
#If liquid perfume comes into contact
with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes
with clean water.
#If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full
flacons
Full flacons must not be disposed
of with household waste.
#
Full flacons must be takento
a harmful substance collection point.
Climate control 165
#To insert: slide flacon 2into the holder as
far as it will go.
#To remove:pull out flacon 2.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfumes, observethe manufacturers' safety
notices on the perfume packaging.
Dispose of thegenuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill
it.
Refillable flacon
#Unscrew cap 1of emptyflacon 2.
#Fill flacon 2with a maximum of 15 ml.
#Screw cap 1back onto flacon 2.
Alwaysrefill the emptyrefillable flacon with the
same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐
tion sheet attached to theflacon.
Stationary heater/ventilation
Stationary heater/stationary ventilation
function
The following functions are performed:
RThe air inside thevehicle is heated or ventila‐
tedto the set temperature.
RThe air inside thevehicle cannot be cooled
down to temperatures below the outside
temperature.
RIf the outside temperature changes, ventila‐
tion mode automatically switches to heating
mode or heating mode automatically
switches to ventilation mode.
The stationary heater and theexhaust gas outlet
are situated at theright-hand front wheel.
Switching thestationary heater/stationary
ventilation on/off via the control panel
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
If thetailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter thevehi‐
cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if
thevehicle gets stuck in snow,forexample.
#Always switch thestationary heater off
in enclosed spaces without an air
extraction systems, e.g. in garages.
#Keep thetailpipe and the area around
thevehicle free from snow when the
engine or thestationary heater are run‐
ning.
166 Climate control
#Open a window on the windward side of
thevehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐
ply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station‐
ary heater components
When thestationary heater is switched on,
parts of thevehicle can become very hot,
e.g. thestationary heater exhaust system.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with:
Rhot parts of thestationary heater exhaust
system
Rtheexhaust gas itself
There is a risk of fire.
#When thestationary heater is switched
on, make sure that:
Rhot vehicle parts do not come into
contact with flammable materials.
Rtheexhaust gas can flow out of the
stationary heater exhaust pipe
unhindered.
Rtheexhaust gas does not come into
contact with flammable materials.
*NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta‐
tionary heater or stationary ventilation
operation
Operating thestationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery.
#After heating or ventilating thevehicle
twice, drive for a longer period of time.
Requirements:
RThe fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel
level.
#Set the desired temperature using thew
button.
#Press button 1.
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1
lights up or goes out.
The colours of the indicator lamp have thefol‐
lowing meaning:
RBlue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
Climate control 167
RRed: thestationary heater is switched on.
RYellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/stationary ventilation will
switch off automatically after 50 minutes.
Operation using the app: thestationary
heater/ventilation can also be operated via the
Mercedes me connect app. Further information
can be found in the separate Owner's Manual
under http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/
connectme/en_GB/index.html.
Setting thestationary heater/stationary ven‐
tilation via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5bClimate control
5Auxiliary heating
You can pre-set three departure times for auto
matic activation of thestationary heater.
#Select an option.
Setting thestationary heater/stationary ven‐
tilation via remote control
Requirements:
RThe fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel
level.
Switching on immediately
#Press and hold theubutton.
Setting the departure time
#Briefly press theubutton.
#Press the,or .button repeatedly
until the time to be changed appears on the
display.
#Press theuand ^buttons simultane‐
ously.
The Îsymbol on theremote control display
flashes.
#Press the,and .buttons to set the
desired departure time.
#Press theuand ^buttons simultane‐
ously.
The new departure time will be stored.
Up to three departure times can be stored.
#To activate the departure time: select the
desired departure time and press and hold
theubutton.
The Ísymbol, the departure time and,
depending on the selected departure time,
the letter A, B or Cappear on the display.
168 Climate control
#To deactivate the departure time: select
the desired departure time and press and
hold the^button.
OFF will appear on the display.
#To check thestatus of thestationary
heater: briefly press theubutton.
Switching off immediately
#Press and hold the^button.
Overview of theremote control displays (sta‐
tionary heater/stationary ventilation)
1Stationary ventilation switched on
2Stationary heater switched on
3Selected departure time
4Remaining time forthestationary heater/
stationary ventilation (in minutes)
5Stationary heater/stationary ventilation
active
6Departure time activated
7Signal strength
Further possible displays:
RTime: activated departure time.
RZero minutes: therunning time forthesta‐
tionary heater is increased, as the engine has
not yetreached operating temperature when
it is started.
ROFF: thestationary heater/stationary venti‐
lation is switched off.
Replacing the remote control battery (sta‐
tionary heater)
&DANGER Serious damage to health
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
serious damage to health.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
#Keep batteries out of thereach of chil‐
dren.
#If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+ENVIRONMENTALNOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
teries
Batteries contain toxic and corro‐
sive substances.
Climate control 169
#
Take discharged batteries to a
qualified specialist workshop or to a
collection point for used batteries.
Requirements:
Ra CR2450 lithium battery
#Push a pointed object into recess 1.
#Slide battery cover2backwards in the
direction of the arrow.
#Insert new battery 3with the lettering
facing upwards.
#Slide battery cover2in the opposite direc‐
tion to the arrow onto theremote control
until the battery cover engages.
Problems with theremote controlfor the stationary heater/stationary ventilation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
FAIL ¨The signal transmission between the transmitter and thevehicle is faulty.
#Change your position in relation to thevehicle, moving closer if necessary.
FAIL The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
#Charge thestarter battery.
The fuel tank content is below thereserve fuel level.
#Refuel at the nearest filling station.
FAIL ¯The stationary heater is malfunctioning.
#Have thestationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
170 Climate control
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
&WARNING Risk of burns/frostbite due
to not maintaining a sufficient distance
to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents.
#Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
pants maintain a sufficient distance to
the air vents.
#If necessary,redirect the airflow to
another area of thevehicle interior.
To guarantee theflow of fresh air through the air
vents into thevehicle interior, comply with the
following:
RAlwayskeep thevents and theventilation
grille in thevehicle interior free.
RKeep the air inlet free of deposits
(/page 386).
#To open or close: hold air vent 1in the
centre and turn it to the left (open) or right
(closed) as far as it will go.
#To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the centre and move it up or down or to
the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
#To open or close: turn controller 2to the
left or right as far as it will go.
#To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the centre and move it up or down or to
the left or right.
Climate control 171
Driving
Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on thefollowing topics in the
Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recog‐
nise dangers:
RRACE START
RAMG RIDE CONTROL
R(DYNAMIC SELECT switch) drive programs
RFunctions of ESP®
RTraction control
Switching the power supply or ignition on
without starting the engine
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can lead to poisoning.
#Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐
mable material on theexhaust system
Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
mals or environmental influences may ignite
if they come into contact with hot parts of
the engine or exhaust system.
#Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the
engine compartment or on theexhaust
system.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Requirements:
Rthekey is in thevehicle and is recognised.
172 Driving and parking
Ror: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the
marked space (/page 174).
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the
brake pedal is not depressed.
RVehicles with manual transmission: the
clutch pedal is not depressed.
#To switch on the power supply:press but‐
ton1once.
You can activate the windscreen wiper, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if thefol‐
lowing conditions are met:
Ryou open the driver's door.
Ryou press button1twice more.
#To switch on the ignition: press button 1
twice.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the
following conditions is met:
Rvehicles with automatic transmission:
you do not start thevehicle within
15 minutes.
Rvehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position jor the electric
parking brake has been applied.
Rvehicles with manual transmission: you
do not start thevehicle within 15 minutes
and the electric parking brake is applied.
Ryou press button1once.
Starting thevehicle
Starting thevehicle with thestart/stop but‐
ton
Requirements:
Rthekey is in thevehicle and is recognised.
Ror: a DigitalVehicle Key is located in the
marked space and is recognised
(/page 174).
#Vehicles with manual transmission:
depress the clutch pedal.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position jor i.
#depress the brake pedal and press button 1
once.
#If thevehicle does not start: switch off non-
essential consumers and press button 1
once.
Driving and parking 173
If thevehicle still does not start, one of thefol‐
lowing display messages appears in the multi‐
function display:
#Place the key in the marked space See Own-
er's Manual:start thevehicle in emergency
operation mode (/page 175).
or
#Key not detected Place smartphone in charg-
ing bracket: place the mobile phone in the
marked space (/page 139).
You can switch off the engine while driving by
pressing button 1for about three seconds or
by pressing button 1three times within a sec‐
ond. Be sure to observe the safety notes under
"Driving tips".
Starting thevehicle with a Digital Vehicle
Key
Requirements:
Rone of thefollowing versions of the Digital
Vehicle Key is available:
-suitable mobile phone
-Digital Vehicle Keysticker
Rthevehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi‐
cle Key" function.
Rthe "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated
via Mercedes me connect: http://
www.mercedes.me.
Rthe mobile phone is sufficiently charged.
%You can check the suitability of your mobile
phone by entering the phone number at
http://www.mercedes.me.
Information about suitable mobile phones
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect.
%Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry
the emergency key in case of function
restrictions.
%The function is only available in combination
with Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐
tain countries.
%Protective cases around the mobile phone
can impair the functionality.
Using the Digital Vehicle Keyfor the first
time
#Deactivate thekey2(/page 79).
#Place key2in marked space 3on the
symbol 4.
#Place the mobile phone or Digital Vehicle Key
sticker in the marked space 1.
#Start thevehicle using thestart/stop button.
174 Driving and parking
Any further starts with the Digital Vehicle
Key
The key is not needed for any further starts.
#Place the mobile phone or Digital Vehicle Key
sticker in the marked space 1.
#Start thevehicle using thestart/stop button.
The "Digital Vehicle Key" service can be deacti‐
vated in Mercedes me connect at http://
www.mercedes.me. The function is then deacti‐
vated in the mobile phone via an online connec‐
tion. If connection to the Internet is not possible,
e.g. afterthe mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle
Keysticker has been stolen, thekey function can
be deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
Starting thevehicle with key in the marked
space (emergency operation mode)
If thevehicle does not start and thePlace the
key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
message appears in the multifunction display,
you can start thevehicle in emergency operation
mode.
#Make sure that marked space 2is empty.
#Remove key1from thekeyring.
#Place key1in marked space 2on the
symbol 3.
The vehicle will start after a short time.
If youremove key1from marked space 2
the engine continues running. For further
engine starts however, key1must be loca‐
ted in marked space 2on symbol 3during
the entire journey.
#Have thekey1checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
If thevehicle does not start:
#place key1in marked space 2and leave
it there.
#Vehicles with manual transmission:
depress the clutch pedal.
#Depress the brake pedal and start thevehi‐
cle using thestart/stop button.
%You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with thestart/stop button.
Starting thevehicle via Remote Online serv‐
ices
Cooling or heating thevehicle interior before
commencing your journey
%This function is not available in all countries.
If youstart thevehicle via your smartphone, the
previously selected air conditioning adjustment
is active.
Driving and parking 175
Ensure thefollowing before starting the engine:
Rthe legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
Rit is safe to start and runthe engine where
your vehicle is parked.
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
Rthestarter battery is sufficiently charged.
%You can also set thetemperature with your
smartphone. Information on Mercedes me
connect and other services: http://
www.mercedes.me
This function is not available for all models.
Charging the battery before commencing
your journey
If thevehicle battery is discharged, youreceive a
message on your smartphone. You can then
start thevehicle with the smartphone to charge
the battery. The vehicle is automatically
switched off afterten minutes.
Ensure thefollowing before starting the engine:
Rthe legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
Rit is safe to start and runthe engine where
your vehicle is parked.
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
Starting thevehicle (Remote Online)
&WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐
ment due to unintentional starting of the
engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during
service or maintenance work.
#Always secure the engine against unin‐
tentional starting before carrying out
maintenance or repair work.
Requirements:
Rpark position jis selected.
Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
Rthe panic alarm is not activated.
Rthe hazard warning lights are switched off.
Rthe bonnet is closed.
Rthe doors are closed and locked.
Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
#Start thevehicle using the smartphone:
afterevery vehicle start, the engine runs for
ten minutes.
you can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐
tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star‐
ted once with thekey before trying to start the
vehicle again with the smartphone. you can stop
thevehicle again at any time.
%further information can be found in the
smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before
carrying out maintenance or repair work:
#switch on the hazard warning lights.
or
#unlock the doors.
or
#open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
176 Driving and parking
Running-in notes
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
To preserve the engine during thefirst1,500 km:
Rdrive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
Rdrive thevehicle in drive program A
or ;.
Rchange gear before therev counter needle is
Ôof thewayto thered area of therev coun‐
ter.
Rdo not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake.
Ravoid overstraining thevehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
Rvehicles with automatic transmission: do
not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown).
Ronly increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate thevehicle to full speed after
1,500 km.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe thefollowing running-in
notes:
Rin certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐
tain distance is being driven afterthevehicle
has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full sys‐
tem effectiveness is not reached until the
end of this teach-in process.
Rbrakepads, brake discs and tyres that are
either new or have been replaced only ach‐
ieve optimum braking effect and grip after
several hundred kilometres of driving. Com‐
pensate forthereduced braking effect by
applying greaterforceto the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of thevehicle.
#Stow all objects in thevehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Alwaysfitthefloor mats securely and
as prescribed in order to ensure that
there is always sufficient room forthe
pedals.
#Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable footwear
Operating the pedals may be impaired by
wearing unsuitable footwear, e.g.:
Rplatform shoes
Rhigh-heeled shoes
Rslippers
#Alwayswear suitable footwear when
driving so that you can operate the ped‐
als safely.
Driving and parking 177
&WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐
ing off the ignition when driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available. This may affect the powersteering
system and the brake force boosting, for
example.
You will then need to use considerably more
forceto steer and brake.
#Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐
ing.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can lead to poisoning.
#Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
If thetailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter thevehi‐
cle. This is the case, forexample, if thevehi‐
cle is stuck in snow.
#When the engine or thestationary
heater are running, keep thetailpipe
and the area around thevehicle clear of
snow.
#Open a window on the side of thevehi‐
cle facing the wind to ensure an ade‐
quate supply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
when driving, the brake system may over‐
heat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may evenfail.
#Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
#Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time
while driving.
*NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings
by permanently depressing the brake
pedal
#Do not permanently depress the brake
pedal while driving.
178 Driving and parking
#To use braking effect of the engine,
shift to a lowergear in good time.
*NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
engine when pulling away
#Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
ately.
#Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
*NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is
misfiring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐
lytic converter.
#Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
#Have the cause rectified immediately at
aqualified specialist workshop.
Limited braking effect on salt-treatedroads:
Rdue to salt build-up on the brake disks and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase
considerably or result in braking only on one
side
Rmaintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front
To prevent salt build-up:
Rbrake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions
Rcarefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
journey
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function
Vehicles without a 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ Boost technology)
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
The engine is switched off automatically in the
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
Rvehicles with manual transmission: you
brake thevehicle, shift to transmission posi‐
tion iwhen travelling at a low speed and
then release the clutch pedal.
Rvehicles with automatic transmission:
you brake thevehicle to astandstill in trans‐
mission position hor i.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Driving and parking 179
if you switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐
sion position hor i,the engine will automati‐
cally stop in thefollowing situations:
Ryoustop behind a vehicle that is pulling
away.
Ryoustop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐
cle in front of you.
Ryou turn thesteering wheel hard at a low
speed.
%In transmission position k,the engine is
not switched off automatically even when
the HOLD function is switched on.
The engine is restarted automatically if:
Rvehicles with manual transmission: you
depress the clutch pedal.
Rvehicles with automatic transmission: in
transmission position h,yourelease the
brake pedal when the HOLD function is not
active.
Rvehicles with automatic transmission:
you shift into transmission position hor
k.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Ran automatic engine start is necessary.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave thevehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.
The display message Vehicle is operational
Switch off ignition before exiting also appears in
the multifunction display. If you do not switch off
the ignition, the ignition is automatically
switched off afterthree minutes.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐
tem (EQ Boost technology)
The engine is switched off automatically in the
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
Ryou brake thevehicle to astandstill in trans‐
mission position hor i.
Ryou depress the brake pedal when travelling
at a low speed.
if you switch on the HOLD function or select a
different transmission position than k,the
engine will automatically stop in thefollowing
situations:
Ryoustop behind a vehicle that is pulling
away.
Ryoustop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐
cle in front of you.
Ryou turn thesteering wheel hard at a low
speed.
The engine is restarted automatically if:
Ryourelease the brake pedal in transmission
position hwhen the HOLD function is not
active and one of thefollowing conditions are
met:
-drive programAor ;is not selec‐
ted.
-drive program Aor ;is selected
but the does not start to move.
-drive programAor ;is selected,
thevehicle is moving at a speed of more
that 20 km/h and Glide mode is not acti‐
vated.
180 Driving and parking
Ryou engage transmission position hor k.
Ryourelease the brake pedal, thevehicle is
not in Glide mode and it starts to move on a
gentle downhill gradient at a speed below
3 km/h.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Ran automatic engine start is necessary.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave thevehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.
The display message Vehicle is operational
Switch off ignition before exiting also appears in
the multifunction display. If you do not switch off
the ignition, the ignition is automatically
switched off afterthree minutes.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/
stop function
#Press button 1.
If indicator lamp 2lights up, the ECO start/
stop function is activated.
%Depending on the model and thevehicle
equipment, the button may also be located
at a different position in the centre console.
ECO display function
The ECO display summarises your driving char‐
acteristics from thestart of the journey to its
completion and assists you in achieving the
most economical driving style.
You can influence consumption by doing thefol‐
lowing:
RDriving with particular care
RDriving thevehicle in drive program ;
RObserving thegearshift recommendations
Driving and parking 181
The inner segment lights up and the outer seg‐
ment fills up when thefollowing driving style is
adopted:
R1moderate acceleration
R2gentle deceleration and rolling
R3consistent speed
The inner segment does not light up and the
outer segment empties when thefollowing driv‐
ing style is adopted:
R1sporty acceleration
R2heavy braking
R3fluctuations in speed
The ECO display will show you when you have
driven economically:
Rthethree outer segments are completely fil‐
led simultaneously
Rthe ECO display lights up
The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison to a driver with a
very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus
from start. The range displayed does not indicate
afixedreduction in consumption.
ECO Assist function
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐
tem (EQ Boost technology) and plug-in
hybrids:
ECO Assist analyses data forthevehicle's expec‐
tedroute. This allows the system to optimally
adjust the driving stylefortheroute ahead, save
fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an
event ahead (e.g. a speed limit or a roundabout),
it will appear on the multifunction display. The
following symbols can be displayed:
Not all events can be displayed, depending on the
engine type.
182 Driving and parking
1Event ahead
2Distance to theevent ahead
3"Foot off the accelerator" prompt
A different number of segments 2will light up
around the symbol depending on the distance to
theevent ahead:
RFew segments: theevent ahead is near.
RMany segments: theevent ahead is further
away.
The "Foot off the accelerator" symbol 3will
appear on the multifunction display as well as
the "Event ahead" symbol 1. In drive pro‐
gram ;,the "Foot off the accelerator" sym‐
bol 3will also appear on the head-up display
beside the transmission position display.
When thevehicle nears an event, ECO Assist will
calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel
economy and recuperative energy based on the
distance, speed and downhill gradient. The "Foot
off the accelerator" symbol 3will appear on
the multifunction display.
If the driver lifts off the accelerator pedal in
good time, theremaining segments on the dis‐
play will turn green until theevent shown is
reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum
fuel economy. The vehicle will coast, with the
combustion engine switched off if necessary,
and recuperate on its own using the electric
motor. Recuperation will charge the battery.
If there is no response to the "Foot off the accel‐
erator" 3prompt,the segments will remain
white.
The event will be shown for a short time after it
has been passed.
If theevent involves a vehicle ahead and when
the coast-down recommendation is given, all
segments will immediately turn green once there
is a response to the "Foot off the accelerator"
3prompt.
If the system does not intervene during the
event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The sys‐
tem is passive.
ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ;
(maximum recuperation) and A(reduced
recuperation).
In drive program A, only theresult "Vehicle
ahead" is displayed.
System limits
ECO Assist can function more precisely if the
route is maintained when route guidance is
active. The basic function is also available with‐
out active route guidance. Not all information
and traffic situations can be foreseen. The qual‐
ity depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi‐
ble forkeeping a safe distance to thevehicle in
front, forvehicle speed and for braking in good
time. The driver must be ready to brake at all
times irrespective of whether the system inter‐
venes.
Driving and parking 183
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing situations:
RIf visibility is poor (e.g. due to insufficient illu‐
mination of theroad, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray).
RIf there is glare (e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections).
RIf there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin‐
ity of the multifunction camera or the camera
is misted up, damaged or obscured.
RIf the traffic signs are hard to discern (e.g.
due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or
because they are obscured).
RIf the information on the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out of date.
RIf the signs are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs
in roadworks or in adjacent lanes).
Displaying ECO Assist
On-board computer:
4Assistance
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Function of theDYNAMIC SELECT switch
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Use theDYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
between thefollowing drive programs:
=(Individual): individual settings
B(Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving
style
C(Sport): sporty driving style
A(Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style
;(Eco): particularly economical driving
style
%The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display of the on-board com‐
puter.
Depending on the drive program, thefollowing
systems change their characteristics:
Rdrive
-engine and transmission management
-Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RESP®
Rvehicles with AIRMATIC or DYNAMIC
BODY CONTROL: suspension
Relectric powersteering
184 Driving and parking
Selecting the drive program
#Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1forwards
or backwards.
The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display.
Configuring drive program I
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5eDYNAMIC SELECT
5Individual
#Select the individual setting.
Switching the operation feedback for drive
programmes on/off
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5eDYNAMIC SELECT
#Switch User notification on Oor off ª.
When this function is active, a corresponding
message is shown in the media display when
a drive programme is selected with the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5eDYNAMIC SELECT
#Select Vehicle data.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5eDYNAMIC SELECT
#Select Engine data.
%The values for engine output and engine tor‐
que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, forexam‐
ple:
RSea level
RFuel grade
ROutside temperature
Driving and parking 185
Manual transmission
Operating thegearshift lever
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
*NOTE Damage to the engine and trans‐
mission by shifting to agear that is too
low
#If you shift between gears 5and 6,
you have to push thegearshift lever all
thewayto theright, otherwise you
could inadvertently shift to a lower
gear.
#Do not shift down at high speeds.
*NOTE Damage of the coupling due to
improper use
Holding thevehicle on inclines with a slipping
clutch can damage it.
#Do not allow the clutch to slip in order
to hold thevehicle on inclines.
*NOTE Damage to the transmission by
shifting to reversegear kwhile the
vehicle is in motion
#Only shift into reversegear kwhen
thevehicle is stationary.
186 Driving and parking
kReversegear
1-6Forward gears
iNeutral
#Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the
gearshift lever into the desired position.
#Engaging forward gears 1-6or neu‐
tral i:
Rdepress the clutch pedal completely.
Rturn thegearshift leverto the desired
position.
#Engaging reversegear k:
Rdepress the clutch pedal completely.
Rpress thegearshift lever with forceto the
left past the point of resistance and then
push forwards.
Gearshift recommendation
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
#If gearshift recommendation message 1is
shown on the multifunction display, shift to
therecommended gear.
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion hor k,thevehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#If you engage the transmission position
hor kalways depress the brake
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time.
Driving and parking 187
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Use the DIRECT SELECT leverto shift the trans‐
mission position. The current transmission posi‐
tion is displayed in the multifunction display.
jPark position
kReversegear
iNeutral
hDrive position
188 Driving and parking
Engaging reversegear R
#Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past thefirst
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows k
in the multifunction display.
Engaging neutral N
#Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows i
in the multifunction display.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will
allow youto move thevehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if youwant the automatic
transmission to remain in neutral iieven if
the ignition is switched off:
#Start thevehicle.
#Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i.
#Release the brake pedal.
#Switch off the ignition.
%If youthen exit thevehicle leaving thekey in
thevehicle, the automatic transmission
remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P
#Observe the notes on parking thevehicle
(/page 199).
#Depress the brake pedal until thevehicle is
stationary.
#When thevehicle is stationary, press button
j.
Park position is only engaged when the
transmission position display jis shown in
the multifunction display. If no transmission
position display jappears, secure thevehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away.
Park position jis engaged automatically if one
of thefollowing conditions is met:
Ryou switch off the ignition when thevehicle
is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐
tion hor k.
Ryou open the driver's door when thevehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k.
%To manoeuvre with an open driver's door,
open the driver's door while stationary and
engage transmission position hor k
again.
Engaging drive position D
#Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past thefirst
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows h
in the multifunction display.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐
sion position h, it shifts thegears automati‐
cally. This depends on thefollowing factors:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe driving speed
Driving and parking 189
Manual gearshifting
&WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
When the automatic transmission is shiftedto
position h,you can manually shift it with the
steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the
automatic transmission shifts to the next gear
up or down depending on thesteering wheel
gearshift paddle being pulled.
You have two options to manually shift the auto‐
matic transmission:
Rtemporary setting
Rpermanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual gear‐
shifting is deactivated.
Temporary setting:
#to activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1or 2.
Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
time. The current gear is displayed in the
multifunction display.
%How long the manual gearshifting stays acti‐
vated is dependant on the driving style.
#to shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2.
#to shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1.
#to deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2and hold it in place.
The transmission position happears in the
multifunction display.
Permanent setting:
#change to drive program=(/page 185).
#select drive program Manual (/page 185).
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Gearshift recommendation
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
190 Driving and parking
#If gearshift recommendation message 1is
shown on the multifunction display, shift to
therecommended gear.
Using kickdown
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
#Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the next
gear when the maximum engine speed is
reached to protect the engine from overrevving.
Glide mode function
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode
helps youto reduce fuel consumption.
Glide mode is characterised by thefollowing:
Rthe combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and the engine continues to
run in neutral.
Rthe transmission position his displayed in
green in the multifunction display.
Rvehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ Boost technology): the com‐
bustion engine is switched off depending on
the driving situation. All of thevehicle func‐
tions remain active.
Glide mode is activated if thefollowing condi‐
tions are met:
Rdrive program;is selected.
Rthe speed is within a suitable range.
Rtheroad's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
Rthere is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch,
and no bicycle rack fitted.
Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator
or brake pedal.
%Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting forthe drive in the
drive program=.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Glide mode can also be prevented by thefollow‐
ing parameters:
Rincline
Rdownhill gradient
Rtemperature
Rheight
RSpeed
Roperating status of the engine
Rtraffic situation
Driving and parking 191
%Glide mode can be ended by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle
(/page 190).
Problems with the transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
The transmission has a faulty gear
shift. The transmission is losing oil.
#Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration characteristics are
deteriorating.
The transmission no longer shifts gear.
The transmission is in emergency operation mode.
It is only possible to shift to one gear and reversegear.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#Switch the transmission to position j.
#Switch off the engine.
#Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
#shift the transmission to position hor k.
If his selected, the transmission only shifts to one gear; if kis selected, the transmission shifts to
reversegear.
#Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
192 Driving and parking
Function of the 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven
when needed. Together with ESP®and 4ETS,
4MATIC improvesthe traction of your vehicle
whenever a driven wheel spins due to insuffi‐
cient traction.
If youfail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce therisk of an accident nor over‐
ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐
cially for maintaining a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in
good time and forstaying in lane.
%In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you
use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary.
Refuelling
Refuelling thevehicle
&WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea‐
tion of sparks must be avoided.
#Switch off the ignition and, if available,
thestationary heater, before and while
refuelling thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
therefuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe thefollowing:
#Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can create sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapours.
Driving and parking 193
#Before opening the fuel filler cap or tak‐
ing hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic body of thevehicle.
This discharges any electrostatic charge
that may have built up.
#Do not get into thevehicle again during
therefuelling process.
Otherwise, electrostatic charge could
build up again.
&WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, theflash
point of the fuel mixture is lowerthan that of
pure diesel fuel.
While the engine is running, component
parts in theexhaust system may overheat
without warning.
#Neverrefuel using petrol.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a petrol engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
fuel that conformsto European EN 228,
or an equivalent specification.
#The RONrequirement is located in the
fuel filler flap.
Fuel of this specification may contain up to
10%ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use
with E10 fuel.
Neverrefuel using any of thefollowing fuels:
Rdiesel
Rregular petrol with an octane number
lowerthan 91 RON
Rpetrol with more than 10%ethanol by vol‐
ume, e.g. E15, E30, E85, E100
Rpetrol with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30
Rpetrol with additives containing metal
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
#Do not switch the ignition on.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel
fuel that conformsto European stand‐
ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica‐
tion.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content less than
50 ppm.
194 Driving and parking
#Vehicles without diesel particulate
filter: refuel using only diesel fuel with
a sulphur content less than 500 ppm.
Neverrefuel using any of thefollowing fuels:
Rpetrol
Rmarine diesel
Rheating oil
Rpure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil
Rparaffin or kerosene
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
#Do not switch the ignition on.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐
cles with a petrol engine.
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
RDo not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
*NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi‐
cles with a diesel engine.
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
RDo not switch the ignition on. Otherwise,
fuel can enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
*NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle.
#Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
Requirements:
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
RThe vehicle or the fuel filler flap is unlocked
(/page 78).
%Do not get into thevehicle again during the
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
Driving and parking 195
1Fuel filler flap
2Bracketforthe fuel filler cap
3Tyre pressure table
4QR code forrescue card
5Fuel type
#Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
#Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
#Insert the fuel filler cap into bracket2.
#Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
#Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: thetank
filler neck is designed forrefuelling at diesel
filling pumps.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the
fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at
least 5 litres of diesel.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a filler
neck with a large diameterforvehicles with
a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a
fuel can. Otherwise, thefiller neck cannot
slide into thetank.
#Replace the cap on thefiller neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#Close the fuel filler flap.
AdBlue®(vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on refilling AdBlue®
*NOTE When you open theAdBlue®tank,
small amounts of ammonia vapour may
escape.
#Only fill theAdBlue®tank in well-venti‐
lated areas.
#Do not let AdBlue®come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothes.
#Keep AdBlue®away from children.
*NOTE Do not ingest AdBlue®.
If AdBlue®is swallowed:
#Immediately rinse out your mouth thor‐
oughly.
#Drink plenty of water.
#Seek medical attention immediately.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
196 Driving and parking
AdBlue®is a water-soluble fluid forthe NOx
exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In
order fortheexhaust gas aftertreatment to func‐
tion properly, only use AdBlue®in accordance
with ISO 22241.
AdBlue®is characterised by thefollowing:
Rnon-toxic
Rcolourless and odourless
Rnon-flammable
AdBlue®is available here:
RAdBlue®may be topped up by fast service at
aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
RAdBlue®is available at many filling stations
from AdBlue®filling pumps.
RAlternatively, AdBlue®is available at qualified
specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz
Service Centres, and at many filling stations
in AdBlue®refill canisters or AdBlue®refill
bottles.
%Ensure the connection between therefill
container and vehicle filler neck does not
drip.
Topping up AdBlue®
*NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®
being in the fuel
#AdBlue®must not be used to fill the
fuel tank.
#Only use AdBlue®to fill theAdBlue®
tank.
#Do not overfill theAdBlue®tank.
*NOTE Contamination of thevehicle inte‐
rior due to AdBlue®leakage
#Aftertopping up, carefully close the
AdBlue®refill container.
#Avoid carrying AdBlue®refill containers
permanently in thevehicle.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
The following messages appear in order in the
multifunction display when theAdBlue®tank
requires refilling:
RRefill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The
AdBlue®tank is down to thereserve level.
RTop up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles
See Owner's Manual.You can only drive the
vehicle overthe distance shown. The
AdBlue®tank is down to thereserve level.
RTop up AdBlue Perf. reduced: XXX km/h No
start in XXX km.You can only drive thevehi‐
cle overthe distance shown. Refill AdBlue®
as soon as possible.
RRefill AdBlue No start in XXX km.You can
only drive thevehicle overthe distance
shown. Refill AdBlue®as soon as possible.
RRefill AdBlue Start not possible. The vehicle
can no longer be started.
You can see theAdBlue®range and level in the
multifunction display (/page 280).
Driving and parking 197
%The AdBlue®range shown depends strongly
on the driving style and operating condi‐
tions. The actual range can therefore deviate
from the calculated range.
Opening the AdBlue®filler cap
#Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
#Turn AdBlue®filler cap 2anti-clockwise and
remove it.
%You can also store theAdBlue®filler cap in
the fuel filler cap holder in the fuel filler flap
hinge arm.
Preparing theAdBlue®refill canister
#Screw on thefastener of AdBlue®refill canis‐
ter2.
#Screw disposable hose 1onto the opening
of AdBlue®refill canister2until hand-tight.
Topping up AdBlue®
#Screw disposable hose 1onto thefiller
neck of thevehicle until hand-tight.
#Lift up and tip AdBlue®refill canister2.
The filling process stops when theAdBlue®
tank is completely full.
AdBlue®refill canister2can be removed
when it has been only partially emptied.
#Unscrew and close disposable hose 1and
AdBlue®refill canister2in reverse order.
#Replace theAdBlue®fuel filler cap and turn it
clockwise.
198 Driving and parking
#Close the fuel filler flap.
#Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec‐
onds.
%If thevehicle could not be started as the
AdBlue®tankwas empty, it can take up to
60 seconds fortherefill to be detected.
#Start thevehicle.
%Avoid storing AdBlue®refill containers per‐
manently in thevehicle.
Parking
Parking thevehicle
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insufficiently securedvehi‐
cle rolling away.
If thevehicle is not securely parked suffi‐
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled
wayeven at a slight downhill gradient.
#Ensure that the parkedvehicle is always
properly secured against rolling away as
follows:
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, turn
the front wheels so that thevehicle
rolls towardsthekerb if it starts
moving.
Rapply the parking brake.
Rvehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: shift the transmission to posi‐
tion j.
Rvehicles with manual transmission:
engage first1or reversegear k.
&WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of theexhaust system or
exhaust gasflow.
#Park thevehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
#In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
Driving and parking 199
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle due to it
rolling away
#Always secure thevehicle against roll‐
ing away.
#Bring thevehicle to astandstill by applying
the brake pedal.
#On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front
wheels so that thevehicle rolls towardsthe
kerb if it starts moving.
#Apply the electric parking brake.
#Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first1or reversegear k.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission:
engage transmission position jin a station‐
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
(/page 189).
#Switch off the engine and the ignition by
pressing the1button.
#Release the service brake slowly.
#Get out of thevehicle and lock it.
%When you park thevehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic
sliding sunroof for approximately five
minutes if the driver's door is closed.
%When you park thevehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the sliding
sunroof for approximately five minutes if the
driver's door is closed.
200 Driving and parking
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and can lead to poisoning.
#Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury when opening
or closing a door with thegarage door
opener
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, people in
therange of movement of the door may
become trapped or struck by the door.
#When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
is within therange of movement of the
door.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside therange of movement of
the door.
RThe engine is switched off.
Rthe ignition is switched on.
%The garage door opener function is always
available when the ignition is switched on.
#Press and hold button 1,2or 3that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4flashes yellow.
%It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐
cator lamp flashes yellow.
#Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4continues to flash yellow.
Driving and parking 201
#Point remote control 5from a distance of
1 cm to 8 cm towards buttons 1,2or 3.
#Press and hold button 6of remote control
5until one of thefollowing signals appears:
RIndicator lamp 4lights up green contin‐
uously. Programming is complete.
RIndicator lamp 4flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronisation of therolling code with
the door system must also be carried out.
#If indicator lamp 4does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
#Release all of the buttons.
%The remote control forthe door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the
garage door opener.
Synchronising therolling code
Requirements:
RThe door system uses a rolling code.
RThe vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive.
RThe vehicle as well as persons and objects,
are located outside therange of movement
of the door.
#Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
#Press previously programmed button 1,2
or 3repeatedly until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com‐
pleted.
%Please also read the operating instructions
forthe door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the
remote control
202 Driving and parking
#Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5is supported.
#Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
#Hold remote control 5at various angles at
a distance between 1 cm to 8 cm in front of
the inside rearview mirror. You should test
every position for at least 25 seconds before
trying another position.
#Hold remote control 5at the same angles
at various distances in front of the inside rear
view mirror. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
#Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6on
remote control 5again before transmission
ends.
#Align the aerial line of the door opener unit
with theremote control.
%Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
ROn the HomeLink®Hotline on (0) 08000
466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277.
ROn the Internet at http://
www.homelink.com.
Opening/closing a garage door
Requirements:
RThe corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
#Press and hold buttons 1,2or 3until
the door opens or closes.
#If indicator lamp 4flashes yellow after
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
the previously pressed button again until the
door opens or closes.
Clearing thegarage door opener memory
Driving and parking 203
#Press and hold buttons 1and 3.
Indicator lamp 4lights up yellow.
#If indicator lamp 4flashes green: release
buttons 1and 3.
The entire memory has been deleted.
Radio equipment approval numbers for the
garage door opener
Radio equipment approval numbers
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐
ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
tipo, e não pode causar interfencia a sistemas
operando em caráter primário.
Para maiores informações acessar
www.anatel.gov.br
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
EgyptTAC.2511151293.WIR
Andorra CE
Australia R-NZ
Barbados MED1578
Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74
European
Union CE
GibraltarCE
Iceland CE
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/299
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
Canada IC: 4112A-MUAHL5
Kuwait CE
Liechten‐
stein CE
Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448
Monaco CE
New Zea‐
land R-NZ
NorwayCE
Russian
Federa‐
tion
Not required
Saudi Ara‐
bia TA 10525
Switzer‐
land CE
204 Driving and parking
Country Radio equipment approval
number
South
Africa
TA-2015/1386
Turkey Not required
United
Arab Emi‐
rates
ER41849/15
Dealer No: DA35176/14
United
States FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(/page 25).
Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake function (applying
automatically)
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in thevehicle,
they could:
ROpen doors,thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
RGet out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, thechildren could also set the
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
RReleasing the parking brake.
RChanging the transmission position.
RStarting thevehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey with you and lock thevehicle.
#Keep thevehicle key out of reach of
children.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Vehicles with manual transmission:
When thevehicle comes to astandstill, the elec‐
tric parking brake is applied if one of thefollow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
RThe engine is switched off.
RThe driver's door is opened.
The electric parking brake is also applied while
thevehicle is kept stationary by the HOLD func‐
tion if one of thefollowing conditions is fulfilled:
RThe engine is switched off.
RThe seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
Driving and parking 205
RThere is a system malfunction.
RThe power supply is insufficient.
RThe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red!indicator lamp appears in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
%To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐
mission is in position jand one of thefollow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
RThe engine is switched off.
RThe seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
%To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake.
In thefollowing situations, the electric parking
brake is also applied:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
thevehicle to astandstill.
RThe HOLD function is keeping thevehicle sta‐
tionary.
RActive Parking Assist is keeping thevehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of thefollowing conditions
is also fulfilled:
RThe engine is switched off.
RThe seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
RThere is a system malfunction.
RThe power supply is insufficient.
RThe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red!indicator lamp appears in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing
automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fulfilled:
RThe driver's door is closed.
RThe engine is running.
RVehicles with manual transmission: agear
has been selected, yourelease the clutch
pedal and depress the accelerator pedal.
ROr: you apply the brakes and shift from neu‐
tral iinto reversegear kor a forward
gear (1-6).
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position hor kand you
depress the accelerator pedal or you shift
from transmission position jto hor k.
RIf the transmission is in position k,the boot
lid must be closed.
206 Driving and parking
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, thefollow‐
ing conditions must be fulfilled:
RThe driver's door is closed.
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
you move the transmission out of transmis‐
sion position jor you have previously
driven faster than 3 km/h.
When the electric parking brake is released, the
red!indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking
brake manually
Applying
#Push handle 1.
The red!indicator lamp appears in the
instrument cluster.
%The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐
ously.
Releasing
#Switch on the ignition.
#Pull handle 1.
The red!indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster goes out.
Emergency braking
#Press and hold handle 1.
When thevehicle has been braked to a
standstill, the electric parking brake is
applied. The red!indicator lamp appears
in the instrument cluster.
Information on detecting damage on a
parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when thetow-away pro‐
tection is primed on a lockedvehicle, you will
receive a notification in the multimedia system
when you switch on the ignition.
Driving and parking 207
You will receive information about thefollowing
points:
RThe area of thevehicle that may have been
damaged.
RThe force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent
activation:
RThe parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
storey garage.
%Deactivate tow-away protection in order to
prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐
vate tow-away protection, damage detection
will also be deactivated.
System limitations
Detection may be restricted in thefollowing sit‐
uations:
RThe vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is
damaged by akey.
RImpact occurs at low speed.
RThe electric parking brake is not applied.
Notes on parking up thevehicle
If you leave thevehicle parked up for longer than
four weeks, the disconnected battery may be
damaged by deep discharge.
If you leave thevehicle parked up for longer than
six weeks, it may suffer disuse damage.
%Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐
tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function
%This function is not available for all models.
If standby mode is activated, thevehicle can be
parkedfor an extended period of time without
losing power.
Standby mode is characterised by thefollowing:
Rthestarter battery is preserved.
Rthe maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display.
Rthe connection to online services is interrup‐
ted.
RtheATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail‐
able.
Rthe interior protection and tow-away protec‐
tion functions are not available.
Rthe function for detecting damage on a
parked vehicle is not available.
If thefollowing conditions are fulfilled, standby
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
multimedia system:
Rthe engine is switched off.
Rthe ignition is switched on.
Exceeding thevehicle's displayed non-opera‐
tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can‐
not be guaranteed that thestarter battery will
reliably start the engine.
208 Driving and parking
The starter battery must be chargedfirst in the
following situations:
RThe vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended.
RThe Battery charge insufficient for standby
mode message appears in the media display.
%Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Standby mode
%This function is not available for all models.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
When you activate the function, a prompt
appears.
#Select Yes.
Standby mode is activated.
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu‐
vring thevehicle. The driving systems are aids
and do not relieve you of your responsibility per‐
taining to road traffic law. Pay attention to the
traffic conditions at all times and intervene
when necessary. Be aware of the limitations
regarding the safe use of these systems.
Information about radar sensors
Some driving and driving safety systems use
radar sensors to monitor the area in front of,
behind or next to thevehicle (depending on the
vehicle's equipment).
Depending on thevehicle's equipment, theradar
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers
and/or behind the Mercedes star. Keep these
parts free of dirt, ice and slush (/page 392).
The sensors must not be covered, forexample
by cycle racks, overhanging loads, stickers,foil
or foils to protect against stone chipping. In the
event of damage to the bumpers or radiator
grille, or following a collision impacting the
bumpers or radiator grille, have the function of
theradar sensors checked at a qualified special‐
ist workshop. The driving systems and driving
safety systems may no longer function properly
in such cases.
Overview of driving systems and driving
safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
thefollowing driving systems and driving safety
systems:
R360° Camera (/page 250)
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/page 210)
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/page 225)
RAdaptive Brake Lights (/page 221)
RAIRMATIC (/page 239)
RActive Brake Assist (/page 215)
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (/page 265)
Driving and parking 209
RATTENTION ASSIST (/page 260)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (/page 210)
RHill Start Assist (/page 237)
RDYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/page 239)
REBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/page 214)
RESP®(Electronic Stability Program)
(/page 211)
RActive Speed Limit Assist (/page 229)
RHOLD function (/page 238)
RSTEER CONTROL (/page 215)
RActive Steering Assist (/page 231)
RLimiter (/page 222)
RActive Parking Assist (/page 254)
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (/page 242)
RReversing camera (/page 247)
RCruise control (/page 221)
RBlind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
with exit warning (/page 262)
Function of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv‐
ing situations:
RDuring braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are
prevented from locking.
RVehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
System limitations
RABS is active from speeds of approx.
8 km/h.
RABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and theyel‐
low !ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐
uously in the instrument cluster afterthe
engine is started.
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
&WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐
tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
#Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS
prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS supportsyour emergency braking situation
with additional brake force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
RBAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐
sure.
RBAS can shorten the braking distance.
RABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
210 Driving and parking
Function of ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram)
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP®is
malfunctioning
If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP®cannot carry
out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other
driving safety systems are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP®checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP®is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP®cannot carry
out vehicle stabilisation.
#ESP®should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: always observe the
notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may
fail to recognise dangers.
ESP®can monitor and improve driving stability
and traction in thefollowing situations, within
physical limits:
RWhen pulling away on wet or slippery carria‐
geways.
RWhen braking.
RVehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer opera‐
tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if thevehicle/
trailer combination begins to sway from side
to side.
RIn strong side winds when you are driving
faster than 80 km/h.
If thevehicle deviates from the direction desired
by the driver, ESP®can stabilise thevehicle by
intervening in thefollowing ways:
ROne or more wheels are braked.
RThe engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP®is deactivated if theåESP®OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster:
RDriving stability will no longer be improved.
RVehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of
thevehicle/trailer combination is no longer
active.
RCrosswind Assist is no longer active.
RThe drive wheels could spin.
RETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
%When ESP®is deactivated, you are still assis‐
tedby ESP®when braking.
If the÷ESP®warning lamp flashes in the
instrument cluster, one or severalvehicle wheels
has reached its grip limit:
RAdapt your driving styleto suit the current
road and weather conditions.
RDo not deactivate ESP®.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary.
Deactivate ESP®in thefollowing situations to
improve traction:
RWhen using snow chains.
RIn deep snow.
ROn sand or gravel.
Driving and parking 211
%Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
If the÷ESP®warning lamp lights up continu‐
ously, ESP®is not available due to a malfunction.
Observethefollowing information:
RWarning and indicator lamps (/page 519)
RDisplay messages (/page 463)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®and
makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on
a slippery carriageway.
ETS/4ETS can improve thevehicle's traction by
intervening in thefollowing ways:
RThe drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin.
RMore drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP®
The drive programs enable ESP®to adapt to dif‐
ferent weather and road conditions as well as
the driver's preferred driving style. You can
select the drive programs using theDYNAMIC
SELECT switch (/page 185).
212 Driving and parking
ESP®characteristics per drive program
Drive program ESP®mode Characteristics
A(Comfort)
;(Eco)
ESP®Comfort These drive programs provide the ideal balance
between traction and stability.
Select drive program ;or Ain difficult
road conditions, such as snow or ice, or when
theroad is wet from rain.
C(Sport) ESP®Sport This drive program continues to offerstability
but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐
siastic driver a more active driving style.
Select drive program Cin good road condi‐
tions, forexample on dry roads and clear
stretches of road.
B(Sport Plus) ESP®Sport Plus The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer‐
ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows
a more active driving styleto be adopted.
Select drive program Bin good road condi‐
tions, forexample on dry roads and clear
stretches of road.
Driving and parking 213
Activating/deactivating ESP®(Electronic Sta‐
bility Program)
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance 5ESP
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
ESP®is deactivated if theåESP®OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster.
Observe the information on warning lamps and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster.
Function of ESP®Crosswind Assist
ESP®Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep thevehi‐
cle in the lane:
RESP®Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between 80 km/h and 200 km/h
when driving straight ahead or cornering
slightly.
RThe vehicle is stabilised by means of individ‐
ual brake application on one side.
Function of ESP®trailer stabilisation
&WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the
trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of
thevehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with
a high centre of gravity may tip over before
ESP®detects this.
#Always adapt your driving styleto suit
the current road and weather condi‐
tions.
When driving with a trailer, ESP®can stabilise
your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from
side to side:
RESP®trailer stabilisation is active above
speeds of 65 km/h.
RSlight swerving is reduced by means of a tar‐
geted, individual brake application on one
side.
RIn theevent of severe swerving, the engine
output is also reduced and all wheels are
braked.
ESP®trailer stabilisation may be impaired or
may not function if:
RThe trailer is not connected correctly or is
not detected properlyby thevehicle.
Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis‐
tribution)
EBD is characterised by thefollowing:
RMonitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on therear wheels.
RImproved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
214 Driving and parking
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL helps youby transmitting a
noticeable steering forceto thesteering wheel in
the direction required forvehicle stabilisation.
This steering recommendation is given particu‐
larly in thefollowing situations:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthevehicle starts to skid
System limitations
STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
function in thefollowing situations:
RESP®is deactivated
RESP®is malfunctioning
Rthesteering is malfunctioning
If ESP®is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electric powersteering.
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of thefollowing
functions:
RDistance warning function
RAutonomous braking function
RSituation-dependent braking assistance
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assist
Active Brake Assist can help youto minimise the
risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or
pedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a colli‐
sion.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐
sion, a warning tone sounds and theLdis‐
tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster.
If you do not react to thewarning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.
In this case, thewarning lamp and warning tone
occur simultaneously with the braking applica‐
tion.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐
imum full-stop braking if necessary.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
braking assistance has occurred, display 1
appears in the multifunction display and then
automatically goes out after a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
Driving and parking 215
additional preventive measuresfor occupant
protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.
&WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
RGive a warning or brake without reason
RNot give a warning or not brake
#Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only
an aid. The driver is responsible for
maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for
braking in good time.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
essary.
Also observe the system limitations of Active
Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in
thefollowing speed ranges:
The distance warning function issues a warning
in thefollowing situations:
RFrom approximately 30 km/h, if over several
seconds the distance maintained to thevehi‐
cle travelling in front is insufficient forthe
driven speed, theLdistance warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
RFrom approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle
is critically close to avehicle or pedestrian,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone
and theLdistance warning lamp lights
up in the instrument cluster.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐
ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation
allows this.
216 Driving and parking
The distance warning function can aid you in thefollowing situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles
travelling in
front
Stationary
vehicles
Crossing
vehicles
Moving
pedestrians
Stationary
pedestrians
Crossing
cyclists
Cyclists travel‐
ling in front
Stationary
cyclists
Vehicles
without Driv‐
ing Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
250 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h No reaction Up to approx.
80 km/h No reaction Up to approx.
60 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h No reaction
Vehicles with
Driving Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
250 km/h Up to approx.
100 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h
Driving and parking 217
The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in thefollowing situations:
Vehicles
travelling in
front
Stationary
vehicles
Crossing
vehicles
Moving
pedestrians
Stationary
pedestrians
Crossing
cyclists
Cyclists travel‐
ling in front
Stationary
cyclists
Vehicles
without Driv‐
ing Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
200 km/h Up to approx.
50 km/h No reaction Up to approx.
60 km/h No reaction Up to approx.
60 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h No reaction
Vehicles with
Driving Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
250 km/h Up to approx.
100 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h
218 Driving and parking
Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in thefollowing situations:
Vehicles
travelling in
front
Stationary
vehicles
Crossing
vehicles
Moving
pedestrians
Stationary
pedestrians
Crossing
cyclists
Cyclists travel‐
ling in front
Stationary
cyclists
Vehicles
without Driv‐
ing Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
250 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h No reaction Up to approx.
60 km/h No reaction Up to approx.
60 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h No reaction
Vehicles with
Driving Assis‐
tance Pack‐
age
Up to approx.
250 km/h Up to approx.
100 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h Up to approx.
80 km/h Up to approx.
70 km/h
Cancelling a brake application of Active
Brake Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
RFully depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown.
RReleasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐
cation when one of thefollowing conditions is
fulfilled:
RYou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
RThere is no longer a risk of collision.
RAn obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with
Driving Assistance Package)
Evasive Steering Assist has thefollowing charac‐
teristics:
RThe ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians.
RAssistance through power-assistedsteering if
it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
Driving and parking 219
RActivation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving manoeuvre.
RAssistance during swerving and straightening
of thevehicle.
RReaction from a speed of approximately
20 km/h up to a speed of approximately
70 km/h.
You can prevent the assistance at any time by
actively steering.
&WARNING Risk of an accident despite
Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In addition, thesteering support of Evasive
Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to
avoid a collision.
In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:
Rgive an unnecessary warning or provide
assistance
Rnot give awarning or not provide assis‐
tance
#Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
Steering Assist alone.
#Be ready to brake and take evasive
action, if necessary.
#Prevent the assistance by actively
steering in non-critical driving situa‐
tions.
#Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐
trians are close to the path of your vehi‐
cle.
System limits
Full system performance is not available for a
few seconds after switching on the ignition or
after driving off.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing situations:
RIn snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
light conditions.
RIf the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered.
RIf the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong
radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.
RIf a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
has been detected and displayed.
RIn complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified.
RIf pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
the sensor detection range.
RIf pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
RIf the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background.
RIf a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects.
ROn bends with a tight radius.
220 Driving and parking
Setting Active Brake Assist
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Active Brake Assist
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: the settings can be made afterstarting the
vehicle.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
the settings can be made when the ignition is
switched on.
The following settings are available:
REarly
RMedium
RLate
#Select a setting.
%Your selection is retained when thevehicle is
next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist
%It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.
#Select Off.
The distance warning function and the auton‐
omous braking function are deactivated.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: when thevehicle is next started, the
medium setting is automatically selected.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assist is not available.
When the ignition is next started, the
medium setting is selected automatically and
Evasive Steering Assist is available.
%If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æsymbol appears in thestatus bar of the
multifunction display.
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an
emergency braking situation with thefollowing
actions:
RBy flashing the brake lamps
RBy activating the hazard warning lights
If thevehicle is braked sharply from speeds
above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly.
This provides traffic travelling behind you with an
even more noticeable warning.
If thevehicle is travelling at speeds of more than
70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica‐
tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once
thevehicle is stationary. When you pull away
again, the hazard warning lights will switch off
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You
can also switch off the hazard warning lights
using the hazard warning button.
Cruise control and limiter
Function of cruise control
Cruise controlregulates the speed to thevalue
selectedby the driver.
If you accelerate to overtake, forexample, the
stored speed is not deleted. If youremove your
foot from the accelerator pedal afterovertaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to thestored speed.
Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐
ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any
Driving and parking 221
speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum speed
or up to the set winter tyre limit.
If youfail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
trol can neither reduce therisk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Cruise control is only an aid. The driver is
responsible forthe distance to thevehicle in
front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time
and forstaying in lane.
Displays on the multifunction display
The status of cruise control and thestored
speed are shown in the multifunction display.
1Cruise control is selected
2Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated
3Speed is saved, cruise control is activated
%The segments extending from the current
stored speed to the end of the scale, or to
the set winter tyre limit, light up in the
speedometer.
System limits
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lowergear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐
ing effect. This relievesthe load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
ing and wearing tooquickly.
Do not use cruise control in thefollowing situa‐
tions:
RIn traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
winding roads.
ROn slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle could then skid.
RIf you are driving when visibility is poor.
Function of the limiter
The limiter restricts the speed of thevehicle. To
reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter
applies the brakes automatically.
You can limit the speed as follows:
RVariable: for speed restrictions, e.g. in built-
up areas.
RPermanent: for long-term speed restrictions,
e.g. when driving in winter tyre mode.
222 Driving and parking
The variable limiter is operated using the corre‐
sponding steering wheel buttons. You can store
any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum
speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can
also perform settings while thevehicle is station‐
ary if thevehicle has been started.
If youfail to adapt your driving style, the limiter
can neither reduce therisk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. It cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. The
limiter is only an aid. The driver is responsible
forthe distance to thevehicle in front, forvehi‐
cle speed, for braking in good time and forstay‐
ing in lane.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: the limiter is available
up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays on the multifunction display
The status of the limiter and thestored speed
are shown in the multifunction display.
1Limiter is selected
2Speed is stored, limiter is deactivated
3Speed is stored, limiter is activated
%The segments in the speedometer light up,
up to the currently stored speed.
%When the driving speed is greater than the
stored speed, display 3flashes.
Kickdown
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown), thevariable limiter
switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive
message appears in the multifunction display.
After completion of kickdown, thevariable lim‐
iter is activated again in thefollowing situations:
RIf the driven speed drops below thestored
speed.
RIf thestored speed is called up.
RIf youstore a new speed.
Operating cruise control or thevariable lim‐
iter
&WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
speed
If you call up thestored speed and this is
lowerthan your current speed, thevehicle
decelerates.
#Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up thestored speed.
Requirements:
Cruise control
RCruise control is selected.
RESP®must be activated, but not intervening.
RThe driven speed is at least 20 km/h.
Driving and parking 223
RThe transmission is in position h.
Variable limiter
RThe vehicle has been started.
RThe variable limiter is selected.
Switching between cruise control and the
variable limiter
#To select cruise control: press rocker
switch 1up.
#To select thevariable limiter: press rocker
switch 1down.
%Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: thevariable limiter is selected
by a different button (/page 227).
Activating cruise control or the variable lim‐
iter
#Press rocker switch 2up (SET+) or down
(SET-).
The current driven speed is stored and the
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control)
or does not exceed it (limiter).
or
#Press rocker switch 3up (RES).
The last stored speed is called up and the
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control)
or does not exceed it (limiter).
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the currently driven speed is stored.
%When you switch off thevehicle, the last
speed stored is cleared.
When you activate cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
stored forthevariable limiter is cleared.
Increasing/decreasing thestored speed
#Press rocker switch 2up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 km/h.
or
#Press and hold rocker switch 2up (SET+) or
down (SET-) to the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 1 km/h.
or
#Press rocker switch 2up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
10 km/h.
or
#Press and hold rocker switch 2up (SET+) or
down (SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 10 km/h.
224 Driving and parking
or
#Accelerate thevehicle to the desired speed.
#Press rocker switch 2up (SET+).
Adopting the detected speed
If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and
Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restric‐
tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and
this is displayed in the instrument cluster, you
can choose between thefollowing options:
#Press rocker switch 3up (RES).
The maximum permissible speed shown by
the traffic sign is stored and thevehicle
maintains or does not exceed this speed.
#To deactivate cruise control:
press rocker switch 3down (CNCL).
#To deactivate cruise control: press rocker
switch 1down.
Deactivating cruise control or thevariable
limiter
#Press rocker switch 3down (CNCL).
%If you brake, deactivate ESP®or if ESP®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The
variable limiter is not deactivated.
Permanent limiter
If thevehicle should neverexceed a specific
speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you
can set this speed with the permanent limiter.
You do this by limiting the speed to avalue
between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi‐
media system (/page 225).
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it
appears in the multifunction display. When you
confirm the message with %, display mes‐
sages no longer appear until you switch off the
vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again
once thevehicle has been restarted or if the set
speed is changed.
The permanent limiter does not switch to pas‐
sive mode even during kickdown and the driven
speed remains below the set speed.
Setting the speed limitation for winter tyres
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5îVehicle settings
5Winter tyres limit
#Select a speed or deactivate the function.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in
front are detected, the set distance is main‐
tained, if necessary, until thevehicle comes to a
Driving and parking 225
halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐
ing on the distance to thevehicle in front and
the set speed. The speed and distance to the
vehicle in front are set and saved on thesteering
wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance
Package, in therange between 20 km/h and
200 km/h and, on vehicles with the Driving
Assistance Package, in therange between
20 km/h and 210 km/h.
Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
RAdjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort‐
able or dynamic) (/page 184)
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
motorcycles).
RInitiates acceleration to thestored speed if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to
change to theovertaking lane.
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictions
into account on motorways or on multi-lane
roads with separate carriageways (country-
dependent).
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐
ing Assistance Package: if thevehicle has
been braked to astandstill on multi-lane, sepa‐
rate carriagewaysby Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow thevehi‐
cle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If
a critical situation is detected when driving off, a
visual and acoustic warning is given indicating
that the driver must now take control of thevehi‐
cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid.
The driver is responsible forkeeping a safe dis‐
tance to thevehicle in front, forvehicle speed
and for braking in good time.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing situations:
RIn snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
light conditions.
RThe windscreen in the area of the camera is
dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
RIf theradar sensors are dirty or covered.
RIn multi-storey car parks or on roads with
steep uphill or downhill gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐
erating can cause one or several wheels to lose
traction and thevehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
&WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐
ation or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐
erate or brake in thefollowing cases, for
example:
RIf thevehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
226 Driving and parking
RIf thestored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slowerthan the
currently driven speed.
RIf Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
#Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up thestored speed.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning.
#In these cases, adjust your speed and
keep a sufficient distance.
#Brake thevehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
Rwhen driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes
Rto pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
Rto complex traffic conditions
Rto oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations.
#Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has been started.
RThe electric parking brake is released.
RESP®is activated and is not intervening.
RThe transmission is in position h.
RAll doors and the bonnet are closed.
RCheck of theradar sensor system has been
successfully completed.
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being
used to park thevehicle or to exit from a
parking space.
RThe vehicle does not skid.
Driving and parking 227
Switching between Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC and the limiter
#Press button 1.
Activating the variable limiter or Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC
#To activate without a stored speed: press
rocker switch 3up (SET+) or down (SET-),
or press rocker switch 4up (RES). Remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal (Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC).
The current driven speed is stored and main‐
tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or
limited (variable limiter) by thevehicle.
or
#To activate with astored speed: press
rocker switch 4up (RES). Remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal (Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC).
%If rocker switch 4is pressed up (RES) again
after activation with a stored speed, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC or thevariable
limiter is activated with the speed restriction
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Accepting the displayed speed restriction
when Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the lim‐
iter is activated
#Press rocker switch 4up (RES).
The speed limit displayed in the instrument
cluster is adopted as thestored speed. The
vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle
in front, but only up to thestored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
#Remove your foot from the brake pedal and
activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
#Press rocker switch 4up (RES).
or
#Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
&WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being
activated when you leave the driver's
seat
If you leave the driver's seat while thevehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, thevehicle can roll away.
#Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure thevehi‐
228 Driving and parking
cle to prevent it from rolling away
before you leave the driver's seat.
#Press rocker switch 4down (CNCL).
%If you brake, deactivate ESP®or if ESP®
intervenes, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Increasing or reducing the speed
#Press rocker switch 3up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 km/h.
or
#Press and hold rocker switch 3up (SET+) or
down (SET-) to the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 1 km/h.
or
#Press rocker switch 3up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
10 km/h.
or
#Press and hold rocker switch 3up (SET+) or
down (SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 10 km/h.
Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐
tance from thevehicle in front
#To increase the specified distance: press
rocker switch 2down.
#To reduce the specified distance: press
rocker switch 2up.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
%The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package. If a change in the speed limit is detected and
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adapts this
new speed as thestored speed.
The driven speed is adjusted when thevehicle is
level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the
case of signs indicating entry into an urban area,
the speed is adapted according to the speed
permitted within the urban area. The speed limit
Driving and parking 229
display in the Instrument Display is always upda‐
ted when thevehicle is level with the traffic sign.
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited
stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), therecom‐
mended speed is automatically adopted as the
stored speed. The system uses the speed stored
on an unlimited stretch of road as therecom‐
mended speed. If you do not alter thestored
speed on an unlimited stretch of road, therec‐
ommended speed is 130 km/h.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been
put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐
tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher
than the set speed are adopted.
Active Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. The
driver is responsible forkeeping a safe distance
to thevehicle in front, forvehicle speed and for
braking in good time. The maximum permissible
speed also depends on factors such as theroad
surface and traffic conditions.
System limits
Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain
time or due to weather conditions) cannot be
properly detected by the system. The maximum
permissible speed applying to avehicle with a
trailer is not detected by the system. In these sit‐
uations you must adjust your speed yourself.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Speed Limit Assist adapting thevehicle's
speed
The speed adoptedby Active Speed Limit
Assist may be too high or incorrect in some
individual cases, such as:
RIn thewet or in fog
RWhen towing a trailer
#Ensure that the driven speed complies
with trafficregulations.
#Adjust the driving speed to suit current
traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation
%The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
When Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active,the
function adjuststhe speed depending on the
route events ahead. Depending on the drive pro‐
gram selected, thevehicle negotiates theroute
event ahead in a fuel-saving, comfortable or
dynamic manner. When theroute event has been
passed, thevehicle accelerates again to the
stored speed. The set distance to thevehicle in
front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric‐
tions ahead are taken into account.
Route-based speed adjustment can be config‐
ured in the multimedia system (/page 231).
Route events ahead are:
RBends
RT-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations
RTurns and exits
RTraffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic
(/page 324))
%When thetoll station is reached, Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as
thestored speed.
230 Driving and parking
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal to
change lanes is switched on and one of thefol‐
lowing situations is detected:
RTurning off at junctions
RDriving on slowing-down lanes
RDriving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible forchoosing theright
speed and observing other road users. This
applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts
and traffic lights, as route-based speed adapta‐
tion does not brake thevehicle to astandstill.
When route guidance is active, thefirst speed
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the
turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected
route is confirmed and further speed adjustment
is activated.
Speed adjustment is cancelled in thefollowing
cases:
RIf the turn signal indicator is switched off
before theroute event.
RIf the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits
Route-based speed adaptation does not take
right of wayregulations into account. The driver
is responsible for complying with road traffic
regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
In difficult conditions (e.g. unclear roads, lane
narrowing, wetroad surfaces, snow or ice) or
when driving with a trailer, the speed adjustment
made by the system may not always be suitable.
In these situations the driver must intervene
accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
route-based speed adjustment
Route-based speed adjustment might mal‐
function or be temporarily unavailable in the
following situations:
RIf map data is not up to date or available
RIf you do not follow the selected route
guidance
RIf the set route is re-planned
RIn road construction areas
RWhen towing a trailer
RIn bad weather or road conditions
RIf the accelerator pedal is depressed
#Adjust the speed to the traffic situation.
Setting route-based speed adjustment
Requirements:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Speed adjustment
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist
%The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
Driving and parking 231
Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
speed of 210 km/h. The system helps youto
stay in the centre of the lane by means of mod‐
erate steering interventions. Depending on the
speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the
vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐
ence.
%Depending on the country, in the lower
speed range Active Steering Assist can use
the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐
essary, Active Steering Assist can then also
provide assistance with a driving style out‐
side the centre of the lane.
When the system is actively steering, theà
symbol is shown in green in the multifunction
display.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist
switches to passive mode. The system provides
no support in this case. During the transition
from active to passive status, theàsymbol is
shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the sys‐
tem is passive, theàsymbol is shown as
grey in the multifunction display.
Steering and touch detection
The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐
vene at any time to correct the course of the
vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must
expect a change from active to passive mode or
vice versa at any time.
If the driver has not steered thevehicle for a
considerable period of time or has removedtheir
hands from thesteering wheel, an optical warn‐
ing is given first. Display 1appears in the mul‐
tifunction display. If the driver still does not steer
thevehicle, or gives no confirmation to the sys‐
tem, a warning tone sounds in addition to the
visual warning message.
The warning is not issued, or is stopped, when
the driver gives confirmation to the system:
RThe driver steers thevehicle.
RThe driver presses a steering wheel button or
operates Touch Control.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual and acoustic
warning is issued.
Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible forthe distance to thevehicle in
front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time
and forstaying in lane. Before changing lanes,
the driver must make sure that the neighbouring
lane is free (glance overthe shoulder).
System limits
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐
quefor lateral guidance. In some cases, the
steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the
vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
232 Driving and parking
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing instances:
RThere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi‐
tions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
RThere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
RInsufficient road illumination.
RThe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
by asticker.
RNo, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, or the markings change
quickly, e.g. in a construction area or junc‐
tions.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
RThe distance to thevehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.
RThe road is narrow and winding.
RThere are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the
following conditions:
ROn tight bends and when turning.
RWhen crossing junctions.
RAt roundabouts or toll stations.
RWhen towing a trailer.
RWhen actively changing lane without switch‐
ing on the turn signal indicator.
RWhen the tyre pressure is too low.
Depending on the selected vehicle settings,
Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Observe thestatus display of Active Steering
Assist in the multifunction display
(/page 236).
&WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limitations of Active Steering
Assist are reached there is no guarantee that
the system will remain active or will keep the
vehicle in lane.
#Alwayskeep your hands on thesteering
wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
#Alwayssteer thevehicle paying atten‐
tion to traffic conditions.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
A malfunction in the detection of lane mark‐
ings and objects can occur.
This could cause unexpected steering inter‐
vention.
#Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating Active Steering Assist
Requirements:
RESP®must be activated, but not intervening.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
Driving and parking 233
#If indicator lamp 1is off: press button 2.
Function of Active Lane Change Assist
%The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver
when changing lanes by applying steering torque
if the driver operates a turn signal indicator.
Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all
thefollowing conditions are met:
RYou are driving on a motorway or road with
multiple lanes in the direction of travel.
RThe neighbouring lane is separated by a bro‐
ken lane marking.
RNo vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane.
RThe driven speed is between 80 km/h and
180 km/h.
RActive Lane Change Assist is switched on in
the multimedia system.
RActive Steering Assist is switched on and
active.
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
a lane change is permitted, the lane change
begins afterthe driver has activated the turn sig‐
nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a
green arrow2next to thesteering wheel sym‐
bol. The Lane change to the left message also
appears, forexample. If Active Lane Change
Assist has been activated with the turn signal
indicator but a lane change is not immediately
possible, a grey arrow 1appears next to the
steering wheel symbol, which remains green.
When the lane change assistance starts, the turn
signal indicator is automatically activated along
with the display in the multifunction display.
If the assistance graphic is shown when chang‐
ing lanes, the lane change display appears with
an additional arrow pointing towardsthe adja‐
cent lane (/page 236).
If a lane change is not possible, the arrowfades
out after a few seconds and a new lane change
must be initiated. An immediate lane change is
only possible on motorway sections without
speed limits.
234 Driving and parking
If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change
Assist may be cancelled. If it is cancelled, the
Lane change cancelled message appears in the
multifunction display and a warning tone sounds.
&WARNING Risk of accident from chang‐
ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always detect
clearly if the adjacent lane is free.
The lane change might be initiated although
the adjacent lane is not free.
#Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighbouring lane is free and there
is no danger to other road users.
#Monitor the lane change.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Lane
Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change
Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐
antee that the system will remain active.
Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you
by applying steering torques.
#Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on thesteering wheel.
Observe the traffic conditions and steer
and/or brake if necessary.
System limits
The system limits of Active Steering Assist apply
to Active Lane Change Assist (/page 231).
The system may also be impaired or may not
function in thefollowing situations:
RThe sensors in therear bumper are dirty,
damaged or covered, for instance by a
sticker or ice and snow.
RThe exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change
Assist
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
#Select Lane change assist.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the driver continually ignores the visual or
acoustic warning to put their hands on thesteer‐
ing wheel, theBeginning emergency stop mes‐
sage appears in the multifunction display. If the
driver still does not respond, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehi‐
cle is decelerated in stages to astandstill.
Depending on the country, at speeds below
60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on
automatically.
When thevehicle is stationary, thefollowing
actions are carried out:
Rthevehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended
Rthevehicle is unlocked
Rif possible, an emergency call is placed to
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any
time by performing one of thefollowing actions:
Rsteering
Rbraking or accelerating
Driving and parking 235
Rpressing a steering-wheel button
Roperating Touch Control
Ractivating or deactivating Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Overview of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus‐
ter
The assistance graphic and thestatus display
show thestatus of thefollowing functions in the
instrument cluster:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RRoute-based speed adaptation
RActive Steering Assist
Assistant display
1Route-based speed adaptation (type of route
event)
2Vehicle in front
3Distance indicator
4Set specified distance
5Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis‐
play
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis‐
play and route-based speed adaptation
1Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected,
set specified distance (number of segments
below thevehicle)
2Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva‐
ted, speed stored
236 Driving and parking
3Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, no vehicle detected (bright
vehicle symbol)
4Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi‐
cle symbol)
5Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and route-
based speed adaptation active, speed stored
%On motorways or high-speed major roads,
the green çvehicle symbol is displayed
cyclically when thevehicle is ready to pull
away.
Speedometer
The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐
eter. If the speed of thevehicle in front or the
speed adjustment is less than thestored speed
due to theroute event ahead, the segments in
the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐
tions to the speed due to manual or automatic
adoption of the speed limit, are displayed in the
control feedback of the multifunction display on
a single line.
Active Steering Assist status display
1Grey steering wheel: Active Steering Assist
switched on and passive
2Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assist
switched on and active
3Flashing steering wheel: prompt to the driver
to actively confirm or transition from active
to passive status, system limits detected
During the transition from active to passive sta‐
tus, symbol 3is shown as enlarged and flash‐
ing. Once the system is passive, symbol 1is
shown in grey in the multifunction display.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds thevehicle for a short
time when pulling away on a hill under thefol‐
lowing conditions:
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission is in position hor k.
RThe electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before thevehicle begins to roll
away.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to thevehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds thevehicle and it can roll away.
#Therefore, swiftly move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal. Never attempt to leave thevehi‐
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
Driving and parking 237
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds thevehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring youto depress the brake
pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐
bility forthevehicle safely standing still remains
with the driver.
System limitations
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a sufficient
means of safeguarding thevehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
RThe incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being activated when you
leave thevehicle
If you leave thevehicle while only the HOLD
function is braking thevehicle, thevehicle
can roll away in thefollowing situations:
RIf there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply.
RIf the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by avehicle occupant.
#Always deactivate the HOLD function
and secure thevehicle against rolling
away before leaving thevehicle.
*NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of thefollowing functions is switched
on, thevehicle brakes automatically in cer‐
tain situations:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RHOLD function
RActive Parking Assist
To avoid damage to thevehicle, deactivate
these systems in thefollowing or similar sit‐
uations:
#During towing
#In a car wash
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
RThe engine is running or has been automati‐
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
238 Driving and parking
RThe electric parking brake is released.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐
vated.
RThe transmission is in position h,kor i.
Activating the HOLD function
#Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time quickly depress further until theë
display appears in the multifunction display.
#Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
#Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
#Depress the brake pedal until theëdis‐
play disappears from the multifunction dis‐
play.
The HOLD function is deactivated in thefollow‐
ing situations:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
RThe transmission is switched to position j.
RThe vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
In thefollowing situations, thevehicle is held by
the transmission position jor by the electric
parking brake:
RThe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened.
RThe vehicle is switched off.
RThere is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts
thecharacteristics of the suspension dampers to
the current operating and driving conditions.
The damping is tuned individually for each wheel
and is affected by thefollowing factors:
RThe road surface conditions
RVehicle load
RThe drive program selected
RThe driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
AIRMATIC
Function of AIRMATIC
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia‐
ble damping for improved driving comfort. The
all-round level control system ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground clear‐
ance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at
speed, thevehicle is lowered automatically to
improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con‐
sumption. You also have the option of manually
adjusting thevehicle level.
AIRMATIC includes thefollowing components
and functions:
RAir suspension with automatic level control
Rspeed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption
Rmanually selectable high-level setting for
greater ground clearance
RADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment)
Driving and parking 239
RDYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
Available suspension tunings
Drive programCharacteristics
A(Comfort) RThe suspension tuning is comfortable.
RThe vehicle is set to the normal level.
RWhen driving at speeds above 125 km/h thevehicle is lowered.
RWhen driving at speeds below 80 km/h thevehicle is raised again.
;(Economy) RThe suspension tuning is comfortable.
RThe vehicle is set to the low level.
RThe vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.
C(Sport) RThe suspension tuning is firmer.
RThe vehicle is set to the low level.
RThe vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.
B(Sport Plus) RThe suspension tuning is evenfirmer.
RThe vehicle is set to the low level.
RThe vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.
240 Driving and parking
Setting thevehicle level
&WARNING Risk of accident because
vehicle level is too high
If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐
ing characteristics may be impaired due to
the higher vehicle centre of gravity.
The vehicle can drift outwards, forexample,
when steering or cornering.
#Alwayschoose a vehicle level which is
suited to the driving style and theroad
surface conditions.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
When lowering thevehicle, other people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between thevehicle body and the tyres or
underneath thevehicle.
#Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
the wheel arches when thevehicle is
being lowered.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control:
when you unload luggage or leave thevehi‐
cle, thevehicle firstrises slightly and then
returns to the set level shortly afterwards.
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody could thus
become trapped.
The vehicle can also be lowered after being
locked.
#When leaving thevehicle, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody.
*NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering
Parts of the body could be damaged when
thevehicle is lowered.
#Make sure that there are no obstacles
such as kerbs underneath or in the
immediate vicinity of the body when the
vehicle is being lowered.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has been started.
RThe vehicle must not be moving faster than
60 km/h.
Raising thevehicle
#Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2lights up.
The vehicle is set to the high level.
Driving and parking 241
Your selection is saved.
The vehicle is lowered again in thefollowing sit‐
uations:
RWhen driving faster than 80 km/h.
RWhen driving between 60 km/h and
80 km/h for approximately three minutes.
RAfter selecting a drive program using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjustedto the height of the
active drive program.
Lowering thevehicle
#Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2goes out. The vehicle is
adjustedto the height of the active drive pro‐
gram.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking assistance system with ultrasound. It
monitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐
tiple sensors 1on the front bumper and on the
rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows
youthe distance between your vehicle and a
detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute foryour attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
vring and parking remains with you. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and
parking in/exiting parking spaces.
In thestandard setting, an intermittent warning
tone sounds from a distance of approximately
0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately
1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous tone
sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m.
Using theWarn early setting in the multimedia
system, thewarning tones for front and side
impact protection can be set to sound at a
greater distance of approximately 1.0 m in front
and 0.6 m on the sides (/page 247).
%The Warn early setting is always active in the
rear of thevehicle.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
Active Parking Assist is unavailable.
242 Driving and parking
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the
multimedia system
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a
360° Camera
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360°
Camera
If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an
obstacle is detected in the path of thevehicle, a
pop-up window forParking Assist PARKTRONIC
1appears in the multimedia system at speeds
below 10 km/h.
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐
rily take into account thefollowing obstacles:
RObstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects.
RObstacles abovethe detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of lorries.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them.
Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivatedfortherear zone
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Vehicles without 360° Camera
Driving and parking 243
Vehicles with 360° Camera
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Rear 1or all-round 2segments light
up red. The ésymbol appears in
the multifunction display.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deactivated due to signal interference.
#Start thevehicle again.
#Check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.
Rear 1or all-round 2segments light
up red. At the same time, a warning
tone sounds for approximately 2 sec‐
onds every time thevehicle is started.
The ésymbol appears in the multi‐
function display.
The sensors are dirty.
#Clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/page 392).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
#Start thevehicle again.
244 Driving and parking
Problem Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protec‐
tion
Passive side impact protection is an additional
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which
warnsthe driver about obstacles at the side of
thevehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles
are detected between the front and rear detec‐
tion range. In order for an object on the side to
be detected, the sensors in the front and rear
bumper must first detect the object while you
are driving past it.
During the parking procedure or manoeuvring,
objects are detected as thevehicle drives past.
If yousteer in the direction of a detected obsta‐
cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a
warning is issued. The segments on the sides
light up yellow or red, depending on the distance
to the obstacle.
Segment colour depending on distance
Colour Lateral distance
YellowApprox. 30 - 60 cm
RedApprox. < 30 cm
In order for lateral front or rear segments to be
displayed, thevehicle must first travel a distance
of at least half of thevehicle length. Once the
vehicle has travelled the length of thevehicle, all
of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐
played.
Vehicles without 360° Camera
1Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐
tional in the front and rear
2Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and can also warn the driver about obstacles
at the side of thevehicle
3Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)
and rear (red)
Driving and parking 245
Vehicles with 360° Camera
1Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐
tional in the front and rear
2Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and can also warn the driver about obstacles
at the side of thevehicle
3Obstacle detected at the front right (red)
Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the
following situations, forexample:
RYou park thevehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion.
RYou open the doors.
Afterthe engine is restarted, obstacles must be
detected again before a new warning can be
issued.
System limits
The system limits forParking Assist
PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro‐
tection.
The following objects are not detected, forexam‐
ple:
RPedestrians who approach thevehicle from
the side
RObjects placed next to thevehicle
Deactivating/activating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
*NOTE Risk of an accident from objects
at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range.
#When parking or manoeuvring thevehi‐
cle, pay particular attention to any
objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars.
The vehicle or other objects could oth‐
erwise be damaged.
If indicator lamp 1is not lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit
or theésymbol appears in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.
#Press button2.
246 Driving and parking
%Depending on thevehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located in the centre
console.
%Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when thevehicle is started.
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Camera & Park. Assist 5Set warning tone
Adjusting the volume of thewarning tones
#Select Warning tone volume.
#Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones
#Select Warning tone pitch.
Set a value.
Specifying thestarting point for the warning
tones
You can specify whether theParking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence
when thevehicle is further away from an obsta‐
cle.
#Select Warn early.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
You can specify whether thevolume of a media
source in the multimedia system is to be
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives
an audible warning.
#Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Reversing camera
Function of thereversing camera
If you have activated the function in the multime‐
dia system, the image from reversing camera 1
is shown in the multimedia system display when
reversegear is selected. Dynamic guide lines
show the path thevehicle will take with the
steering wheel in its current position. This helps
Driving and parking 247
youto orient yourself and to avoid obstacles
when reversing.
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute foryour attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park‐
ing.
You can select from thefollowing views:
RNormal view
RWide-angle view
RTrailer view
The area behind thevehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Normal view
1Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
2Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
3Yellow guide line at a distance of approx
imately 1.0 m from therear area
4Bumper
5Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from therear area
Wide-angle view
Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch only)
1Yellow guide line, locating aid
248 Driving and parking
2Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Normal view
1Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from therear area
4Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of
between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
5Redwarning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close
(approximately 0.3 m or less)
6Orange warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐
tance away (between approximately 0.3 m
and 0.6 m)
%If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of thewarning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC button
lights up and theésymbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at therear, therear seg‐
ments are shown in red when reversing and
are hidden when driving forwards.
When Active Parking Assist is active, the
lane markings are displayed in green.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
thewarning display fades out.
Wide-angle view
Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch only)
1Yellow guide line, locating aid
Driving and parking 249
2Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
System failure
If there is no operational readiness, thefollowing
message appears in the multimedia system:
System limits
The reversing camera will not function or will
only partially function in thefollowing situations:
RThe boot lid is open.
RThere is heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThe light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
RThe camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐
ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
reversing camera (/page 392).
RCameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are fitted, are damaged. In this
event, have the cameras, their positions and
their setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the
reversing camera may be restricted due to addi‐
tional accessories on therear of thevehicle (e.g.
licence plate bracket or bicycle rack).
%The display contrast may be impaired due to
incident sunlight or other light sources. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras. The cameras coverthe immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐
ity.
The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute foryour attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park‐
ing.
The system evaluates images from thefollowing
cameras:
RReversing camera
RFront camera
RTwo side cameras in the outside mirrors
Views of the 360° Camera
You can select from different views:
250 Driving and parking
1Wide-angle view, front
2Top view with image from the front camera
3Top view with images from the side cameras
in the outside mirrors
4Wide-angle view, rear
5Top view with image from thereversing cam‐
era
6Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch)
Top view
1Lane indicating theroute thevehicle will
take at the current steering wheel angle
2Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of
approximately 1.0 m or less
3Your vehicle from above
If the distance to the object lessens, the colour
of warning display 2changes:
RFrom approx.1.0 m: yellow
RFrom approx. 0.6 m: orange
RFrom approx. 0.3 m: red
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and no object is detected, the segments of the
warning display are shown in grey.
%If the entire system fails, the segments of
thewarning display are shown in red and the
ésymbol appears in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster.
If the system fails at therear, the display of
the segments changes as follows:
RThe rear segments are shown in red
when reversing.
RThe rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
thewarning display fades out.
Driving and parking 251
Guide lines
1Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from therear area
4Mark at a distance of approx.1.0 m
%When Active Parking Assist is active, lane
markings 1are displayed in green.
The guide lines in the media display show
the distances to your vehicle. The distances
apply to road level.
In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at
the level of the trailer hitch.
Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)
If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled
to thevehicle, thefollowing display appears:
1Yellow guide line, locating aid
2Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
When the electrical connection is established
between thevehicle and the trailer, the display
changes to the side camera view.
This view supports manoeuvring procedures with
a trailer.
Side view of the mirror cameras
The sides of thevehicle can be seen in this view.
252 Driving and parking
1Guide line of external vehicle dimensions
with outside mirrors folded out
2Marker of the wheel contact points
System failure
If there is no operational readiness, thefollowing
message appears in the multimedia system:
System limits
The 360° Camera will not function or will only
partially function in thefollowing situations:
RThe doors are open.
RThe side mirrors are folded in.
RThe boot lid is open.
RThere is heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThe light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
RThe camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐
ted up.
RIf cameras or vehicle components in which
the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this
event, have the cameras, their positions and
their setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
%Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir‐
cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth‐
ers or collide with objects when parking the
vehicle.
If thevehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the
standard height can result in inaccuracies in the
guide lines and in the display of thegenerated
images, depending on technical conditions.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
tional attachments on thevehicle (e.g. licence
plate bracket, bicycle rack).
%The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt direct sunlight or by other light
sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
(/page 392).
Driving and parking 253
Selecting a view for the 360° camera
Requirements:
RThe Auto reversing camera function is selec‐
ted in the multimedia system.
#Engage reversegear.
#In the multimedia system, select the desired
view.
Switching reversing camera automatic mode
on/off
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute foryour attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur‐
roundings and be ready to brake at all times.
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Camera & Park. Assist
5Auto reversing camera
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Opening the camera cover of the reversing
camera
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Camera & Park. Assist
#Select Open camera cover.
%The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.
Setting the camera as a favourite
You can call up the camera view directly in the
multimedia system by setting it as a favourite.
#Press theòbutton on the control ele‐
ment.
The main functions are displayed.
#Navigate downwards twice.
The Favourites menu appears.
#Select New favourite.
#Select Vehicle.
#Select Camera.
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system which uses ultrasound and is
automatically activated during forward travel.
The system is operational at speeds below
approximately 35 km/h.
If all requirements are met, theÇdisplay
appears in the multifunction display. The system
then independently locates and measures paral‐
lel and perpendicular parking spaces on both
sides of thevehicle.
When Active Parking Assist has detected parking
spaces, theÈdisplay appears in the multi‐
function display. The arrows show on which side
of theroad detected parking spaces are located.
They are then shown in the media display. The
parking space and, if necessary, the parking
direction can be selected as desired. Active
Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path,
switches on the turn signal indicator and assists
you in parking and exiting the parking space.
254 Driving and parking
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active
Parking Assist supports with changing gear,
accelerating, braking and steering thevehicle.
Vehicles with manual transmission: the active
brake application and automatic gear change are
only available on vehicles with automatic trans‐
mission. You must therefore brake thevehicle
and change gear yourself when parking or exit‐
ing a parking space.
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
substitute foryour attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range.
Active Parking Assist is cancelled if, among
other things, one of thefollowing actions is car‐
ried out:
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
RActive Parking Assist is deactivated.
RYou begin steering.
RYou apply the parking brake.
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
you engage transmission position j.
RESP®intervenes.
RYou open the doors or the boot lid while driv‐
ing.
System limits
Objects located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist are not detected
when the parking space is being measured.
These are also not taken into account when the
parking manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhang‐
ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries
or the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir‐
cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore
guide you into the parking space prematurely.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects located above or below the
detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the
detection range, thefollowing situations may
arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RVehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of
these objects.
This could cause a collision.
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Parking
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer
drawbars might not be identified as such or be
measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking
Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Driving and parking 255
Do not use Active Parking Assist in thefollowing
situations:
RIn extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes
beyond thevehicle.
RIf the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
RWhen snow chains are fitted.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g. the
following:
RParking spaces where parking is prohibited.
RParking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel in thefollowing situations:
RIf two parking spaces are located immedi‐
ately next to each other.
RIf the parking space is immediately next to a
low obstacle such as a kerb.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the
direction of travel in thefollowing situations:
RIf the parking space is on a kerb.
RIf the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
#Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Park‐
ing Assist. Area 2displays detected parking
spaces 4and vehicle path 3.
%Vehicle path 3shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path.
#If you have driven past a parking space: bring
thevehicle to astandstill.
#Select desired parking space 4.
256 Driving and parking
#Where necessary, select the parking direc‐
tion: forwards or reverse.
Vehicle path 3is shown, depending on
selected parking space 4and the parking
direction.
#Confirm selected parking space 4.
%The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐
matically when the parking procedure
begins. The turn signal indicator is switched
off automatically when you switch to h.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal
indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐
tor accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause youto collide with objects
or other road users.
#Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#Where necessary, stop thevehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#If, forexample, thePlease engage reverse
gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi‐
tion.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
#Vehicles with manual transmission: stop
as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
before. Depending on the message or as
required, engage forward or reversegear.
On completion of the parking procedure, the
Active Parking Assist finished, take control of
the vehicle. display message appears. Further
manoeuvring may still be necessary.
#After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard thevehicle against rolling away.
When required by legal requirements or local
conditions: turn the wheels towardsthekerb.
%You can stop thevehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro‐
cedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. The parking procedure can
then be continued. If no new vehicle path is
available, the transmission position will be
changed again. If thevehicle has not yet
reached the parking space, the parking pro‐
cedure will be cancelled, should a gear be
changed.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking
Assist
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has been parked with Active
Parking Assist.
Driving and parking 257
Please note that you are responsible forthevehi‐
cle and surroundings during the entire parking
procedure.
#Start thevehicle.
#Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active
Parking Assist.
#If thevehicle has been parked at right angles
to the direction of travel: in area 2, select
direction of travel3.
%The vehicle path shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path.
#Confirm direction of exit 3to drive out of
the parking space.
%The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐
matically when theexiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal
indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐
tor accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause youto collide with objects
or other road users.
#Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#Where necessary, stop thevehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#If, forexample, thePlease engage forward
gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi‐
tion.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is switched off auto‐
matically.
258 Driving and parking
The image shows an example of a vehicle with a
360° Camera.
Aftertheexiting procedure has been completed,
theActive Parking Assist finished, take control
of the vehicle. message appears in the media
display. Awarning tone and display 4in the
media display prompt youto take over control of
thevehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer
and change gear yourself again.
Function of Drive Away Assist
%Drive Away Assist is only available forvehi‐
cles with automatic transmission.
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is
detected in the direction of travel, thevehicle's
speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a
critical situation is detected, theÈsymbol
appears on the camera image of the multimedia
system.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by
limited detection performance of Drive
Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐
tify objects and traffic situations.
In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:
RWarn you without reason and limit the
vehicle speed.
RNot warn you or not limit thevehicle
speed.
#Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐
essary, provided the traffic situation
permits and that it is safe to take eva‐
sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute foryour attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range.
Arisk of a collision may arise in thefollowing sit‐
uations, forexample:
RIf the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals.
RIf the wrong gear is selected.
The Drive Away Assist function is active under
thefollowing conditions:
RIf Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
REvery time thegear is changed to kor h
when thevehicle is at a standstill.
RIf the detected obstacle is less than approx.
1.0 m away.
RIf the manoeuvring assistance function is
activated in the multimedia system.
Driving and parking 259
System limits
The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited
on inclines.
When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is
not available.
Function of Cross Traffic Alert
%Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist (/page 262).
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: the Cross
Traffic Alert function can warn drivers of any
crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking
space. The radar sensors in the bumper also
monitor the area adjacent to thevehicle. If a crit‐
ical situation is detected, symbol 1appears in
the media display. If the driver does not respond
to thewarning, thevehicle's brakes can be
applied automatically.
If theradar sensors are obstructed by vehicles
or other objects, detection is not possible.
The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under
thefollowing conditions:
RIf Blind Spot Assist is activated.
RIf thevehicle is reversing at walking pace.
RIf the manoeuvring assistance function is
activated in the multimedia system.
System limitations
The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available
on inclines and when driving with a trailer.
Deactivating/activating manoeuvring assis‐
tance
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Camera & Park. Assist
5Manoeuvring assist.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
%Manoeuvring assistance must be active for
the function of Drive Away Assist
(/page 259) and Cross Traffic Alert
(/page 260).
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk
roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators
of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a
break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-
260 Driving and parking
rested and attentive driver. On long journeys,
take regular breaks in good time that allow for
adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
RStandard: normal system sensitivity.
RSensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention
level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐
ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion are detected, theATTENTION ASSIST: Take
a break! warning appears in the instrument dis‐
play. You can acknowledge the message and
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after a minimum of
15 minutes.
You can have thefollowing status information for
ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
menu of the on-board computer:
RThe length of the journey since the last
break.
RThe attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System suspended message appears.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÛ
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected
sensitivity levelremains stored.
System limits
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/hto
200 km/h speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all in thefollowing situations:
RIf you have been driving for less than approx‐
imately 30 minutes.
RIf theroad condition is poor (unevenroad
surface or potholes).
RIf there is a strong side wind.
RIf you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
RIf theSteering Assist function of Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
RIf the time has been set incorrectly.
RIn active driving situations, if youchange
lanes and vary your speed frequently.
Driving and parking 261
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐
tinuing the journey in thefollowing situations:
RIf you switch off the engine.
RIf you unfastenyour seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking
a break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting options
#Select Standard,Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area
#Select Suggest rest area.
#Activate Oor deactivate the function ª.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or
increasing lack of attention, it suggests a
rest area in the vicinity.
#Select a suggestedrest area: you are gui‐
ded to the selected rest area.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot
Assist with exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active
Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to
monitor the area up to 40 m behind your vehicle
and 3 m directly next to your vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐
imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently
enters the monitoring range directly next to your
vehicle, thewarning lamp in the outside mirror
lights up red.
If a vehicle is detected close to the side of your
vehicle, theredwarning lamp in the outside mir‐
rorflashes. If you switch on the turn signal indi‐
cator in the corresponding direction, a warning
tone sounds once. If the turn signal indicator
remains switched on, all other detected vehicles
are indicated only by theflashing of thered
warning lamp.
If youovertake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
different speed.
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
drivers in this situation.
#Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of thevehicle.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐
cles and are no substitute for attentive driving.
Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to
the side forother road users and obstacles.
Exit warning
The exit warning is an additional function of
Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu‐
pants about approaching vehicles when leaving
thevehicle when stationary.
262 Driving and parking
&WARNING Risk of accident despite exit
warning
The exit warning reacts neither to stationary
objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a
greatly different speed.
As a result, theexit warning cannot warn
drivers in these situations.
#Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation when opening the doors
and make sure there is sufficient clear‐
ance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this
is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle
occupant opens the door on the side with the
warning, a warning tone sounds and thewarning
lamp in the outside mirrorstarts to flash.
This additional function is only available when
Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi‐
mum of three minutes afterthe ignition has
been switched off. The exit warning is no longer
available once thewarning lamp in the outside
mirrorflashes three times.
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐
tute forthe attention of vehicle occupants. The
responsibility for opening and closing the doors
and for leaving thevehicle remains with thevehi‐
cle occupants.
System limits
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
may be limited in thefollowing situations:
Rif there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rif there are narrowvehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes
Rif theroad has very wide or narrow lanes
Rif vehicles are not driving in the middle of
their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
ders. Always make sure that there is sufficient
distance to the side forother traffic or obsta‐
cles.
Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐
side long vehicles, forexample lorries, for a pro‐
longed time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when a
trailer is coupled to thevehicle and the electrical
connection has been correctly established.
The exit warning may be limited in thefollowing
situations:
Rwhen the sensors are coveredby adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces
Rwhen people approach thevehicle
Rin theevent of stationary or slowly moving
objects
Function of brake application (Active Blind
Spot Assist)
%The brake application function is only availa‐
ble forvehicles with a Driving Assistance
Package.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐
Driving and parking 263
recting brake application is carried out. This is
designed to help youavoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is availa‐
ble in the speed range between approximately
30 km/h and 200 km/h.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite
brake application of Active Blind Spot
Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
#Alwayssteer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Blind Spot
Assist warnsyou or makes a course-
correcting brake application.
#Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
following:
Rif vehicles overtake too closely on the
side, placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles approaching and overtaking you
at a greatly different speed
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐
uations.
#Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of thevehicle.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
theredwarning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐
ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐
play 1indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the multifunction display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐
priate brake application. This brake application
may be interrupted at any time if yousteer
slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
264 Driving and parking
System limits
Either a course-correcting brake application
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
all, may occur in thefollowing situations:
RVehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
RAvehicle approaches too closely on the side.
RYou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
RYou brake or accelerate significantly.
RA driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist.
RESP®is deactivated.
RA loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
detected.
RYou are driving with a trailer and the electri‐
cal connection to the trailer hitch has been
correctly established.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Blind Spot Assist
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera 1. It servesto protect you against unin‐
tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned
by vibration pulses in thesteering wheel and gui‐
ded by a course-correcting brake application
back into your lane.
You are warned by vibration pulses in thesteer‐
ing wheel in thefollowing circumstances:
RActive Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking.
RA front wheel drives overthis lane marking.
You will also be guided back into your lane by
means of a course-correcting brake application
if thefollowing conditions are met:
RActive Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both edges of the lane.
RA front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐
ing.
You can activate or deactivate theActive Lane
Keeping Assist warning.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce
therisk of an accident if youfail to adapt your
driving style nor override the laws of physics. It
cannot take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe
Driving and parking 265
distance to thevehicle in front, forvehicle
speed, for braking in good time and forstaying
in lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can bring thevehicle
back into the lane with a lane-correcting brake
application. In the case of a broken lane marking
being detected, a brake application will only be
made if a vehicle has been detected in the adja‐
cent lane. Oncoming traffic can be detected.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package or
Driving Assistance Plus Package: overtaking
vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can also
be detected.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the
speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐
play 1appears in the multifunction display.
System limits
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
thefollowing situations:
RYou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐
erate.
RYou have switched on the turn signal indica‐
tor (situation-dependent).
RA driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®,Active Brake Assist or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
RYou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
eration.
RWhen ESP®is deactivated.
RWhen driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐
nection to the trailer has been correctly
established.
RIf a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
has been detected and displayed.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of theroad, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections.
RIf the windscreen in the area of the multi‐
function camera is dirty, or if the camera is
misted up, damaged or covered.
RIf there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one
lane, e.g. around roadworks.
266 Driving and parking
RIf the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐
ered.
RIf the distance to thevehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
RIf the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
RIf the carriageway is very narrow and wind‐
ing.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package or
Driving Assistance Plus Package: Active Lane
Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor
several areas around thevehicle. If theradar
sensors in therear bumper are dirty or covered
with snow,the system may be impaired or may
not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which
you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor‐
recting brake application occurs.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping
Assist (vehicles with Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC)
&WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Lane Keeping Assist warning
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring thevehicle back into the origi‐
nal lane.
#Alwayssteer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-cor‐
recting brake application.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite inter‐
vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropri‐
ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally
driving over a solid lane marking.
The brake application can be interrupted at
any time if yousteer slightly in the opposite
direction.
#Always make sure that there is suffi‐
cient distance to the side forother traf‐
fic or obstacles.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane
Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
#Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation and keep within the
lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist alerts you.
Be sure to observe the system limitations of
Active Lane Keeping Assist.
Driving and parking 267
#Press button 2.
If indicator lamp 1lights up, Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the lane mark‐
ings are shown as light in the assistance
graphic. When Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active, the lane markings are shown in green
in the assistance graphic.
Setting the sensitivity of Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist
Multimedia system:
4Vehicle 5kAssistance
5Act. Lane Keep. Assist
#Select a setting.
Activating/deactivating the warning
#Activate Oor deactivate ªLane depart.
warning.
You do not receive any warning when leaving
a lane if the lane keeping warning system is
deactivated.
Trailer hitch
Notes on trailer operation
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognise dangers.
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
Observe thefollowing notes on thetongue
weight:
Rdo not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
falls below the permissible tongue weight
Ruse a tongue weight as close as possible to
the maximum tongue weight
Do not exceed thefollowing values:
Rpermissible towing weight
Rpermissible rear axle load of thetowing vehi‐
cle
Rpermissible gross mass of thetowing vehicle
Rpermissible gross mass of the trailer
Rmaximum permissible speed of the trailer
Ensure thefollowing before starting a journey:
Rthe tyre pressure on therear axle of thetow‐
ing vehicle is set for a maximum load
Rthe lighting of the connected trailer is opera‐
tional
Rvehicles without LED headlamps or MUL‐
TIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps
have been set correctly
268 Driving and parking
In theevent of increased rear axle load, the car/
trailer combination may not exceed a maximum
speed of 100 km/h forreasons concerning the
operating permit. This also applies in countries
in which the permissible maximum speed for
car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
Folding the ball neck out/in
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer
may come loose.
#Always engage the ball neck as descri‐
bed.
&WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck
swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when
unlocking or when it has not been properly
engaged.
There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's
range of movement!
#Unlock the ball neck only when its
range of movement is unobstructed.
#Always be sure the ball neck is engaged
when folding inwards.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is secured against rolling away.
RThe range of movement is clear.
RThe trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
removed.
Folding the ball neck out
#Pull release switch 2until the ball neck
unlocks.
The ball neck will fold out from under the
rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 1will flash.
Driving and parking 269
#Pull the ball neck in the direction of the
arrow until it engages audibly in a vertical
position.
Indicator lamp 1on the ball neck release
switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in
place, theCheck trailer hitch lock display
message will appear on the multifunction dis‐
play.
#Remove the cover from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean.
Check that it is either greased or dry (grease-
free), depending on the instructions forthe
trailer.
Folding the ball neck in
#Pull release switch 2until the ball neck
unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under therear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1flashes.
#Push the ball neck in the direction of the
arrow until it engages audibly behind the
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1will go out and the mes‐
sage on the multifunction display will disap‐
pear.
Observe the information on the displays on the
instrument cluster:
RWarning and indicator lamps (/page 519)
RDisplay messages (/page 463)
Coupling up / uncoupling a trailer
&WARNING Risk of injury from thevehicle
level being changed
Vehicles with level control system: the
vehicle level may be changed unintentionally,
e.g. by other persons. You may become trap‐
ped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer
while thevehicle level is changing. In addi‐
tion, other people could become trapped if
their limbs are between thevehicle body and
the tyres or underneath thevehicle.
When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer,
make sure that:
#The doors or tailgate are not opened or
closed.
#You do not initiate the level control sys‐
tem and do not operate theDYNAMIC
SELECT switch.
#Do not lock or unlock thevehicle.
Requirements:
Rthe ball neck must be extended and engaged
in a securely locked position
270 Driving and parking
Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connectedto
thevehicle with thefollowing adapters:
Radapter plug
Radapter cable
The trailer will be correctly detected by thevehi‐
cle only if thefollowing conditions are met:
Rthe trailer is connected correctly
Rthe trailer lighting system is in working order
The functions of thefollowing systems are affec‐
tedby a correctly connected trailer:
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RESP®trailer stabilisation
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC
RActive Parking Assist
RBlind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
RDrive Away Assist
RCross Traffic Alert
RReversing camera
R360° Camera
Coupling up a trailer
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle battery due
to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power
supply of the trailer can damage thevehicle
battery.
#Do not use thevehicle's power supply
to charge the trailer battery.
#Remove the cover from the ball head and
store it in a safe place (/page 121).
#Position the trailer on a level surface behind
thevehicle and couple it up to thevehicle.
#Open the socket cap.
#Insert the plug with lug 1in groove 3on
the socket.
#Turn the bayonet coupling 2to theright as
far as it will go.
#Let the cap engage.
#Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
(only if you are using an adapter cable).
#Make sure that the cable is always slack for
ease of movement during cornering.
A display message may appear on the multifunc‐
tion display even if the trailer has been connec‐
ted correctly:
RLEDs have been installed in the trailer light‐
ing system
Rthe current has fallen below the trailer light‐
ing system's minimum current (50 mA)
%Accessories can be connected to the perma‐
nent power supply up to 180W, and to the
power supply that is switched on via the igni‐
tion lock.
Driving and parking 271
Uncoupling a trailer
&WARNING Risk of being crushed and
becoming trapped when uncoupling a
trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged
inertia-activated brake, your hand may
become trapped between thevehicle and the
trailer drawbar.
#Do not uncouple trailers with an
engaged overrun brake.
*NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a
state of overrun
Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage
thevehicle.
#Do not uncouple trailers with an
engaged overrun brake.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when disconnecting the trailer cable
Vehicles with level control system: The
vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is
disconnected.
This could result in you or other people
becoming trapped if your or their limbs are
between thevehicle body and the tyres or
underneath thevehicle.
#Make sure that nobody is underneath
thevehicle or in the immediate vicinity
of the wheel arches when you discon‐
nect the trailer cable.
#Secure the trailer against rolling away.
#Disconnect the electrical connection
between thevehicle and the trailer.
#Uncouple the trailer.
#Place the cover on the ball head.
Bicycle rack function
&WARNING Risk of an accident when
using the bicycle rack incorrectly
The bicycle rack may become detached from
thevehicle in thefollowing cases:
Rthe permissible load capacity of the
trailer hitch is exceeded.
Rthe bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
Rthe bicycle rack is secured to the ball
neck beneath the ball head.
Observe thefollowing foryour own safety
and that of other road users:
#always adhere to the permissible load
capacity of the trailer hitch.
#only use the bicycle rack to transport
bicycles.
#always properly secure the bicycle rack
by attaching it to the ball head.
#only use bicycle racks approvedby
Mercedes-Benz.
272 Driving and parking
#always observe the bicycle rack operat‐
ing instructions.
*NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the
trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle
racks or bicycle racks being used incor‐
rectly
#use only bicycle racks approvedby
Mercedes-Benz.
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up to
three bicycles can be transported on the bicycle
rack.
When mounted by attaching to ball head 1,the
maximum load capacity is 75 kg.
The load capacity is calculated from theweight
of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.
The vehicle's driving characteristics will change
when a bicycle rack is fitted. Adapt your driving
style accordingly. Drive carefully and maintain a
safe distance.
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure
for maximum load on therear axle of thevehicle.
Further information on the tyre pressure can be
found in the tyre pressure table (/page 422).
Notes on loading
The largerthe distance between the load's
centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater
the load on the trailer hitch.
Therefore, observe thefollowing notes:
Rmount heavy bicycles as close to thevehicle
as possible
Ralways distribute the load on the bicycle rack
as evenly as possible across thevehicle's
longitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all
detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets,
child seats, rechargeable batteries) before load‐
ing them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve
the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity
of the bicycle rack.
Driving and parking 273
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from
moving around and check that they are secure at
regular intervals.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driv‐
ing characteristics and rear view may be
impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance
and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.
Load distribution on the bicycle rack
1Vertical distance between centre of gravity
and ball head
2Horizontal distance between centre of grav‐
ity and ball head
3The centre of gravity is on thevehicle's
centre axis
Observethefollowing information when you are
loading the bicycle rack with up to three bicy‐
cles:
Loading the bicycle rack
Total weight
of bicycle
rack and
load
Max. dis‐
tance 11
Max. dis‐
tance 22
Up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable forthe use of tow bar
systems that are used forflat towing or dinghy
towing, forexample. Attaching and using tow bar
systems can lead to damage on thevehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be
guaranteed forthetowing vehicle or thetowed
vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may
swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐
mitted towing methods (/page 411) and the
instructions fortowing with both axles on the
ground (/page 412).
274 Driving and parking
Instrument display overview
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognise dangers.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to an
instrument display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you may not recognise function
restrictions applying to safetyrelevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have thevehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, park thevehicle safely as soon as pos‐
sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument display (standard)
1Speedometer
2Multifunction display
3Rev counter
4Coolant temperature display
5Fuel level and fuel filler cap location indica‐
tor
Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit
1Speedometer
2Multifunction display
3Rev counter
4Coolant temperature display
5Fuel level and fuel filler cap location indica‐
tor
%Further display content can be shown on dis‐
play 3for additional values (/page 279).
The segments on the speedometer1indicate
the system status forthefollowing:
RCruise control(/page 221)
Instrument Display and on-board computer 275
RLimiter (/page 222)
RActive Distance Assist
DISTRONIC(/page 225)
*NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in theoverrevving range.
#Do not drive with the engine in theover‐
revving range.
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the
engine when thered mark on therev counter 3
(overrevving range) is reached.
During normal operating conditions, the coolant
temperature display 4may rise to 120 °C.
&WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the bonnet
If you open the engine bonnet when the
engine has overheated or during a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
contact with hot gases or other escaping
operating fluids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In theevent of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call thefire service.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐
tem (EQ Boost technology)
RPOWER 1shows the electrical drive sup‐
port as a percentage.
RCHARGE 2shows the electric motor's recu‐
peration power performance as a percent‐
age.
õshows the drive system's operational read‐
iness .
Overview of the buttons on thesteering
wheel
1¤Back/Home button (press and hold),
on-board computer
2Touch Control, on-board computer
3Control panel for cruise control/limiter or
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
4Control panel for multimedia system:
£Voice control system
ßDisplays favourites
276 Instrument Display and on-board computer
VOL: control knob, adjusts thevolume or
switches the sound off 8(press)
6Makes/accepts a call
~Rejects/ends a call
5òCalls up the home screen
6Touch Control multimedia system
7%Back button (press and hold)
Operates the on-board computer
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements forthe country
in which you are currently driving when you
operate the on-board computer.
%The on-board computer displays appear on
the multifunction display (/page 279).
The on-board computer can be operated using
the left-hand Touch Control 2and the left-hand
back/home button 1.
When the on-board computer is being operated,
different acoustic signals will sound as operating
feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached
or when you are scrolling through a list.
The following menus are available:
RService
Instrument Display and on-board computer 277
RAssistance
RTrip
RNavigation
RRadio
RMedia
RTelephone
RHUD
The menus can be called up from the menu bar
on the multifunction display.
#To call up the menu bar: press the back
button on the left 1until the menu bar is
displayed.
%Press theòbutton to call up the menu
bar of the on-board computer.
#To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or
right on the left-hand Touch Control 2.
#To call up a menu or confirm a selection:
press the left-hand Touch Control 2.
#To scroll through displays or lists on the
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control 2.
#To call up a submenu or confirm a selec‐
tion: press the left-hand Touch Control 2.
#To exit a submenu: press the back button
on the left 1.
Full-surface menu display
Vehicles with an instrument display in the
widescreen cockpit: thefollowing menus can
be shown in full on the instrument display:
RAssistance
RTrip
#In the corresponding menu, use the left-hand
Touch Control 2to scroll to the end of the
list.
#Press left-hand Touch Control 2.
The selected menu will be displayed in full.
Setting the design
On-board computer:
4Design
%This function is only available forvehicles
with a widescreen cockpit.
The following designs can be selected:
RClassic
RSport
RProgressive
278 Instrument Display and on-board computer
#To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The instrument display is shown in the selec‐
ted design.
Setting the additional value range
Example: G-meter
1Additional value range
2Index points
#To select display content: swipe to the
right on the left-hand Touch Control.
#Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control to select display content.
When display content is selected, the addi‐
tional value range 1will briefly be highligh‐
ted.
The index points 2will display the selected
list item.
The following display content can be selected in
theClassic and Sport designs:
RRev counter
RNavigation
RECO display
RConsumption
RG-meter
The following content can be selected in thePro-
gressive design:
RDate
RNavigation
RECO display
RConsumption
RG-meter
Overview of displays on the multifunction
display
1Outside temperature
2Time
3Display section
4Transmission position
5Drive program
Instrument Display and on-board computer 279
Further displays on the multifunction display:
ZGearshift recommendation (/page 190)
ëActive Parking Assist ena‐
bled(/page 256)
éParking Assist PARKTRONIC deactiva‐
ted(/page 246)
¯Cruise control (/page 221)
ÈLimiter (/page 222)
çActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/page 225)
æActive Brake Assist(/page 221)
èActive Steering Assist (/page 231)
ÃActive Lane Keeping Assist (/page 265)
±Active Lane Change Assist (/page 234)
èECO start/stop function (/page 179)
ëHOLD function (/page 238)
_Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/page 146)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(/page 148)
ðMaximum permissible speed exceeded
(for certain countries only)
Adjusting the instrument lighting
#Turn brightness control 1up or down.
The lighting of the instrument display and in
the control elements of thevehicle interior is
adjusted.
Menus and submenus
Functions on the service menu of the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4Service
#To select the function: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Functions on theService menu:
RMessage memory (/page 463)
RAdBlue:Adblue®range and fill level
RTyres:
-Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning
system (/page 429)
-Checking tyre pressure with the tyre
pressure monitor (/page 423)
-Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
(/page 424)
RASSYST PLUS: calls up the service due date
(/page 378)
280 Instrument Display and on-board computer
RVehicles with a widescreen cockpit: Cool-
ant: coolant temperature display
REngine oil level: engine oil level
Calling up the assistant display
On-board computer:
4Assistance
The following displays are available on the assis‐
tant display menu:
RAssistant display
RAttention level (/page 260)
#To switch between the displays: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
Status displays on the assistant display:
RÛATTENTION ASSIST: deactivated
RLight lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist enabled
RGreen lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist active
R¸Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind
Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena‐
bled
R¸Green radar waves next to vehicle:
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
active
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays
(/page 225)
RActive Lane Change Assist displays
(/page 234)
RECO Assist displays
Calling up displays on the trip menu
On-board computer:
4Trip
%You can view information about the journey
in the left-hand area of the instrument dis‐
play.
#To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Displays on theTrip menu:
RStandard display
RRange and current fuel consumption
If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
the fuel tank, the display will show a vehicle
being refuelled instead of therange.
RECO display (/page 181)
Instrument Display and on-board computer 281
RTrip computer From start and From reset
RDigital speedometer
Example: standard display
1Trip distance
2Total distance
Example: trip computer
1Total distance
2Driving time
3Average speed
4Average fuel consumption
Resetting values on the trip menu of the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4Trip
%The spelling on the main menu displayed
may differ. Therefore, observe the menu
overview forthe instrument display
(/page 277).
You can reset thevalues of thefollowing func‐
tions:
RTrip distance
RTrip computer From start and From reset
RECO display(/page 181)
#To select the function to be reset: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#Select Yes .
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol, thevalues of the function will be reset
immediately.
282 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Calling up navigation instructions on the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4Navigation
Example: no change of direction announced
1Distance to the next change of direction
2Distance to the next destination
3Estimated arrival time at next destination
4Current road
Example: change of direction announced
1Distance to thechange of direction
2Road to which thechange of direction leads
3Change-of-direction symbol
4Recommended lane (white)
5Possible lane
6Lane not recommended (dark grey)
Further possible displays on theNavigation
menu:
RDirection of travel: display of direction of
travel and road currently being travelled on.
RNew route... or Calculating route…: a new
route is being calculated.
RRoad not mapped:theroad is unknown, e.g.
for newly built roads.
RNo route: no route could be calculated to the
selected destination.
ROff map:the map forthe current location is
not available.
RArea of destination reached:you have
reached the destination area.
RO:you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
#To exit the menu: press the back button on
the left.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 283
Selecting radio stations using the on-board
computer
On-board computer:
4Radio
1Memory preset
2Channel name
3Name of track
4Name of artist
When you select a station from the memory pre‐
sets, the preset will appear next to thestation
name. When you select a savedstation in the
frequency range, an asterisk will appear next to
thestation name.
#To select a radio station: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting the frequency range or memory
preset
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#To select the frequency range/station
preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Media playback using the on-board computer
On-board computer:
4Media
1Media source
2Track number and current track
3Name of artist
4Name of album
The folder name will also appear on the display.
#To change tracks on an active media
source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
284 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Changing a media source
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#To select a media source: swipe upwards
or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Dialling telephone numbers using the on-
board computer
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
When telephoning, you must observethe legal
requirements forthe country in which you are
currently driving.
Requirements:
Rthe mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
On-board computer:
4Telephone
Vehicles with theAudio 20 multimedia sys‐
tem: the most recently dialled telephone num‐
bers are displayed on theTelephone menu.
#To select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If there is only one telephone number
savedto an entry: thetelephone number
will be selected.
#If there are multiple telephone numbers
savedto an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand touch controlto
select the desired telephone number.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The telephone number will be dialled.
The following displays may appear instead of the
telephone numbers dialled:
RPlease wait...:the application is starting. If a
Bluetooth®connection to the mobile phone
is not established, the menu for authorising
and connecting a mobile phone will be dis‐
played on the multimedia system
(/page 335).
RUpdating data...:the call list is being upda‐
ted.
RImporting contacts...: contacts are being
imported from the mobile phone or a storage
medium.
Accepting/rejecting a call
Vehicles with head-up display: when you
receive a call, theIncoming call message will
appear on the head-up display.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 285
#Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select 6(accept)
or ~(reject).
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
You may accept/reject the call using the6
or ~button on thesteering wheel.
Adjusting the head-up display settings on
the on-board computer
On-board computer:
4HUD
The following head-up display settings can be
adjusted:
RPosition
RBrightness
RDisplay content
#To select a setting: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control.
1Setting currently selected
2Digital speedometer
3Traffic Sign Assist
4Navigation displays
Head-up Display
Function of the head-up display
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the information in the Supplement. Otherwise,
you may fail to recognise dangers.
The head-up display projects thefollowing into
the driver's field of vision:
Rinformation from the navigation system
Rinformation from the driver assistance sys‐
tems
Rsome warning messages
Display elements
1Navigation messages
2Current speed
3Detected instructions and traffic signs
4Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)
286 Instrument Display and on-board computer
When youreceive a call, the6Incoming call
message will appear on the head-up display.
In audio mode, thestation name or track will be
shown temporarily when the audio source is
being actively operated.
System limits
The visibility is influenced by thefollowing condi‐
tions:
Rseat position
Rthe positioning of the display image
Rlight conditions
Rwetroad surfaces
Robjects on the display cover
Rpolarisation in sunglasses
%In extreme sunlight, sections of the display
may appear washed out. You can correct this
by switching the head-up display off and on
again.
Switching the head-up display on/off
#Press button 1.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 287
Overview and operation
Overview of the multimedia system
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
1Touch Control
Multimedia system button group on the
steering wheel (/page 276)
2Media display
3Main function button group (/page 292)
4Touchpad
5Control knob
Adjusts thevolume (/page 295)
Switches the sound on/off (/page 294)
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per‐
formance exhaust system:
Turn: adjusts thevolume
Press: switches the multimedia system
on/off
6Übutton
Switches multimedia system on/off
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per‐
formance exhaust system:
Sets thevolume of the AMG Performance
exhaust system
7Controller
Notes on the media display
*NOTE Scratches on the display
The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss
surface. There is a risk of it becoming
scratched.
#Avoid touching the display.
#Observe the notes on cleaning.
288 Multimedia system
Observe the notes on caring forthe interior
(/page 394).
Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
off feature: if thetemperature is too high, the
brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
display may then switch off completely for a
while.
%If you are wearing polarised sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the display.
Central control elements overview
1Touch Control
2Controller
3Touchpad
Touch Control
Operating Touch Control
#To call up main functions: press button 1.
or
#Press and hold button 3.
#To call up favourites: press button 1.
#Swipe down on Touch Control 2.
#To open a list: press Touch Control 2.
#To close a list: press button 3.
or
#Swipe right on Touch Control 2.
Multimedia system 289
#To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left
or right on Touch Control 2.
#Press Touch Control 2.
#To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control
Multimedia system:
4System 5wInput
5Touch Control sensitivity
#Select Fast,Medium or Slow.
Operating the controller
1%button
Press briefly:returns to the previous display
Press and hold: calls up main functions
2òbutton
Calls up the main functions
To call up favourites: when the main func‐
tions are displayed, slide controller 3
down.
3Controller
Controller operating options:
#Turn 3anti-clockwise or clockwise.
#Slide 1left or right.
#Slide 4up or down.
#Slide 2diagonally.
#Press 7briefly or press and hold.
Touchpad
Activating/deactivating the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4System 5wInput
#Activate Oor deactivate ªtheTouchpad.
Operating thetouchpad
Requirements:
RThe touchpad is switched on (/page 290).
290 Multimedia system
1Touchpad
2©button
Calls up main functions and favourites
3Dbutton
Calls up the control menu of the last active
audio source
4%button
Pressing briefly:returns to the previous dis‐
play
Press and hold: calls up main functions
You can navigate in menus and lists via touch-
sensitive surface 1by using a single-finger
swipe:
#To open or close lists: swipe left or right.
#To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
left or right.
#Press touchpad 1.
#To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Use thefollowing functions with a two-finger
swipe:
#To call up main functions and favourites:
swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must
start in the upper area of thetouchpad.
#To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
#To call up the control menu of the last
active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐
gers. The swipe must start in the lower area
of thetouchpad.
Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4System 5wInput
#Select Touchpad sensitivity.
#Select Fast,Medium or Slow.
#To set the pressure sensitivity: switch
Touchpad tap on Oor off ª.
If the function is switched on O, a tap on
thetouchpad is enough to select a menu
item.
Handwriting recognition: switching theread-
aloud function on/off
Multimedia system:
4System 5õAudio
5System feedback
#Switch Read out handwriting recognition on
Oor off ª.
Multimedia system 291
Activating/deactivating haptic operating
feedback on thetouchpad
Multimedia system:
4System 5wInput
The function supports you when making entries
on thetouchpad and when selecting menus.
#Switch Haptic operating feedback on Oor
off ª.
When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐
back in theform of a vibration is effected
when thetouchpad is operated.
Selecting a station and track using the
touchpad
#Press theDbutton on thetouchpad.
or
#Swipe up with two fingers. The swipe must
start in the lower area of thetouchpad.
The control menu appears forthe audio
source that was last selected.
#Use one finger to swipe up or down.
Radio: the previous or the next station is set.
Media source: the previous or the next music
track is selected.
#To hide the control menu: swipe down with
two fingers. The swipe must start in the
upper area of thetouchpad.
Main functions
Calling up the main functions
1ßbutton
Calls up navigation
2$button
Calls up theradio
3Õbutton
Calls up media
4%button
Calls up thetelephone
5Øbutton
Sets vehicle functions
#Alternatively: press the©button on the
controller, thetouchpad or theTouch Con‐
trol.
The main functions are displayed.
#Select the main function.
Favourites
Overview of favourites
Favourites offeryouquick access to frequently
used applications. It is possible to create 20
favourites in total.
The following functions are available:
Radd pre-defined favourites from thefollow‐
ing categories (/page 293):
-Navigation
-Entertainment
-Telephone
-Connect
292 Multimedia system
-Vehicle
-System settings
Radd your ownfavourites (/page 293)
Rrename favourites (/page 293).
Rmove favourites (/page 293).
Rdelete favourites (/page 294).
Rreset all favourites (/page 294)
Calling up favourites
#Press the©button.
The main functions are displayed.
#Navigate downwards once.
Navigating means:
RSwiping on theTouch Control or the
touchpad
RSliding the controller
Leaving thefavourites menu
#Press the©button.
Adding favourites
Adding predefined favourites
#Press the©button.
The main functions are displayed.
#Navigate downwards twice.
The Favourites menu appears.
#Select New favourite.
The categories are displayed.
#Select a category.
The favourites are displayed.
#Select a favourite.
#Store thefavourite at the desired position.
If a favourite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Example: adding your ownfavourites
#Select Vehicle.
#Select Full screen: Consumption.
#Press and hold the©button until the
favourites are displayed.
#Store thefavourite at the desired position.
If No function available for saving is shown, the
selected function cannot be added.
Renaming favourites
#Press the©button.
The main functions are displayed.
#Navigate downwards once.
#Select a favourite.
#Navigate downwards once.
The Favourites menu appears.
#Select Rename.
#Enterthecharacters.
#To confirm the entry: select ¡.
Moving favourites
#Press the©button.
The main functions are displayed.
#Navigate downwards once.
#Select a favourite.
#Navigate downwards once.
The Favourites menu appears.
#Select Move.
Multimedia system 293
#Move thefavourite to the desired position.
If a favourite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Deleting favourites
#Press the©button.
The main functions are displayed.
#Navigate downwards once.
#Select a favourite.
#Navigate downwards once.
The Favourites menu appears.
#To delete: select Delete.
#Select Yes.
#To restore all favourites: select Reset all.
A prompt appears.
#Select Yes.
The favourites are reset to thefactory set‐
tings.
Switching the sound on/off
On the multifunction steering wheel
On the multimedia system
#To mute: press volume control 1.
The 8symbol appears in thestatus line
of the display.
You will also hear traffic announcements and
navigation announcements even when the
sound is muted.
294 Multimedia system
#To switch on: change the media source or
turn volume control 1.
Adjusting the volume
Setting with thevolume control
On the multifunction steering wheel
On the multimedia system
#Turn volume control 1.
The volume of the current radio or media
source is set. The volume of other audio
sources can be adjusted separately.
Adjust this in thefollowing situations:
Rduring a traffic announcement
Rduring a navigation announcement
The volume of the navigation announce‐
ment changes in accordance with thevol‐
ume of the current media source.
Rduring a telephone call
Rwhen entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Setting in the menu
#Select System in the multimedia system.
#Select Audio.
#Select a volume setting.
#Set thevolume.
Entering characters
Using thecharacter input function
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
Multimedia system 295
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Use thecharacter input function in thefollowing
situations, forexample:
RRenaming a favourite
REntering a POI or address
RMaking a phone call
The following functions are available:
RSelecting a character in thecharacter bar
RWriting a character on thetouchpad
Character input can be started with a control
element and resumed with another.
#On theTouch Control and controller:
select thecharacters in thecharacter bar.
Depending on thetarget entry,thefollowing
characters are available:
RThe full set of characters is shown
ROnly those characters which are useful
forthe current input string are shown
Other characters are greyed out.
#On thetouchpad: select thecharacters in
thecharacter bar.
or
#Write thecharacters on thetouch-sensitive
surface of thetouchpad.
Handwriting recognition supportsyouby
means of character suggestions and a read-
aloud function.
Examples of character entry:
RRenaming a favourite
REntering a POI or an address using free or
step-by-step search
REntering a web address
Entering characters using the controller
Example: renaming favourites
#Call up the "Renaming favourites" function
(/page 293).
#To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4
and press the controller.
The character is entered in the input line.
Use thefollowing entry functions:
%To delete acharacter: press the control‐
ler.
To delete an entry: press and hold the
controller until the entire entry is deleted.
296 Multimedia system
ÄTo switch to special characters and sym‐
bols.
XTo switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐
ters.
BTo switch the language.
vTo switch to character entry on thetouch‐
pad.
%The available editing functions depend on
the editing task, the language set and the
character level.
#To confirm the entry: select ¡.
Example: entering a destination (navigation)
#Enter the POI or address (/page 308).
Entering characters on thetouchpad
Requirements:
RThe touchpad is switched on (/page 290).
RThe entered or selected character should be
read out: the handwriting recognition read-
aloud function is switched on (/page 291).
Example: renaming favourites
#Call up the "Renaming favourites" function
(/page 293).
#To enter a character: use your finger to
write characters on thetouchpad.
The character is entered in the input line. If
different interpretations are possible, charac‐
ter suggestions are displayed.
#To select a character suggestion: swipe up
or down on thetouchpad.
#Resume character input.
#To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐
sor is located in the input line.
#To delete a character: swipe left when the
cursor is located in the input line.
#To confirm the entry: press thetouchpad.
#To finish character entry: swipe upwards.
or
#Press the%button.
Example: entering a destination (navigation)
#Enterthe POI or address (/page 308).
System settings
Display
Configuring display settings
Multimedia system:
4System 5GDisplay and styles
Styles
%Depending on thevehicle equipment this
setting may not be available.
#Select Design.
#Select Sport,Classic or Progressive.
Multimedia system 297
Adapting the ambient lighting for the style
#Select Adjust ambient light..
Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
This function adjusts the ambient lighting for
the selected display style.
Setting the display brightness
#Select Display brightness.
#Select a brightness value.
Switching the display off/on
#Off: select Display off.
#On: press a button, %,forexample.
Display design
#Select Day/night design.
#Select Automatic,Day design or Night
design.
Additional display area
%Depending on thevehicle equipment this
setting may not be available.
Depending on thevehicle, various items of addi‐
tional information can be shown. The additional
display area comprises the left-hand or right-
hand third of the display.
#Select Additional display area.
The following display content can be selected:
RDynamic
RNavigation map
RConsumption
RTime and date
Time and date
Setting the time and date automatically
Multimedia system:
4System 5&Time and date
#Deactivate ªManual time adjustment.
The time and date are set automatically for
the selected time zone and summer time
option.
%The correct time is required forthefollowing
functions:
RRoute guidance with time-dependent
traffic guidance.
RCalculation of expected time of arrival.
Setting the time zone
Multimedia system:
4System 5&Time and date
5Time zone:
The list of countries is displayed.
#Select a country #.
Depending on the country, time zones are
displayed.
#Select a time zone.
The time zone set is displayed afterTime
zone:.
Setting summer time
The Automatic Summer Time and Summer Time
options cannot be selected in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4System 5&Time and date
Automatically
#Switch Automatic Summer Time on Oor off
ª.
298 Multimedia system
Manually
#Switch Automatic Summer Time off ª.
#Select Summer Time.
#Select On or Off.
Setting the time and date format
Multimedia system:
4System 5&Time and date
5Set format
#Set the date and time format #.
Setting the time manually
Requirements:
RThe Manual time adjustment function is
switched on.
Multimedia system:
4System 5&Time and date
5Set time
#Set the hours.
#Navigate to theright to set the minutes.
#Set the minutes.
#Confirm changes when exiting the menu.
The date is set automatically via GPS.
Connectivity
Switching transmission of thevehicle posi‐
tion on/off
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
#Select Transmit vehicle pos..
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Bluetooth®
Information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth®technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transfer up to approximately
10 m.
You can use Bluetooth®to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system and use thefol‐
lowing functions, forexample:
RHands-free system with access to thefollow‐
ing options:
-Contacts (/page 340)
-Call lists (/page 342)
RInternet connection (/page 355)
RListening to music via Bluetooth®audio
RTransferring business cards (vCards) into the
vehicle
Bluetooth®is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
%Internet connection via Bluetooth®is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
Requirements:
RDeactivate Bluetooth®: Apple CarPlay is not
active.
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
#Activate Oor deactivate ªBluetooth®.
If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask‐
ing whether Bluetooth®should be deactivated.
Multimedia system 299
#Select Yes.
Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth®is
deactivated.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with
aWi-Fi network and to access the Internet or
other network devices.
The following connection options are available:
RWi-Fi connection
The Wi-Fi connection to aWi-Fi-capable
device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or
atablet PC is established.
RMultimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
can be connected, forexample.
To establish a connection, you can use thefol‐
lowing methods:
RWPS PIN
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a PIN.
RWPS PBC
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made by pressing a button (push button).
RSecurity key
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a security key.
Setting up Wi-Fi
Requirements:
RThe device to be connected supports one of
thethree means of connection described
(/page 300).
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
#Switch Wi-Fi on Oor off ª.
If Wi-Fi is deactivated ª, communication via
Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also
means that a connection to the HERMES
communication module cannot be estab‐
lished. Then functions such as dynamic route
guidance with Live Traffic Information are not
available.
Connecting the multimedia system with a
device via Wi-Fi
This function is available if a HERMES communi‐
cation module is not installed.
The type of connection established must be
selected on the multimedia system and on the
device to be connected.
%The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
tions that are shown in the display. Further
information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
#Select Internet settings.
#Select Search for Wi-Fi networks.
Using a security key
#Select a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
#Enterthis security key on the multimedia sys‐
tem.
#Confirm the entry with ¡.
300 Multimedia system
%All devices support a security key as a
means of connection.
Using a WPS PIN
#Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#Select ¥Connect using WPS PIN input.
The multimedia system generates an eight-
digit PIN.
#Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
#Confirm the entry.
Using a button
%This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre‐
quency of 2.4 GHz.
#Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#Select ¥Connect via WPS PBC.
#Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected.
#Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected.
#Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Device has already been connected:
#To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi
network in the list.
#Activate ¥Connect automaticallyO.
#To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the
list.
#Select ¥Connect.
The connection is established again. These
functions are possible when the device has
already been connected to theWi-Fi network.
System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows youto determine the lan‐
guage forthe menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language affects
thecharacters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐
tion announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language
Multimedia system:
4System 5Language
#Set the language.
%If you are using Arabic map data, thetext
information can also be shown in Arabic on
the navigation map. To do so, select  as
the language from the language list. Naviga‐
tion announcements are then also made in
Arabic.
Setting the distance unit
Multimedia system:
4System 5%Units
#Select km or mi.
#In the multifunction display of the Instrument
Display, switch theAdditional speedometer
display on O.
Multimedia system 301
Data import and export
Data import/export function
The following functions are possible:
RTransferring data from one system or vehicle
to another system or vehicle.
RCreating a backup copy of your personal data
and loading it again.
RProtecting your personal data against unwan‐
tedexport with PIN protection.
%Please note that the NTFS file system is not
supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
mended.
Importing/exporting data
*NOTE Loss of data due to premature
removal
#Do not remove the data storage
medium when data is being exported.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe ignition is switched on or thevehicle has
been started.
RThe SD card is inserted (/page 363) or the
USB device is connected (/page 366).
Multimedia system:
4System 5System backup
#Select Import data or Export data.
Importing
#Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether youreally
wish to overwrite the current data. If data
originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐
nised during data reading.
The multimedia system is restarted once the
data has been imported.
%Current vehicle settings can be edited after
the import.
Exporting
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
ted.
#Enterthefour-digit PIN.
#Select a data storage medium.
The data is exported. The data export may
take several minutes.
Activating/deactivating PIN protection
Multimedia system:
4System 5PIN protection
Setting the PIN
#Select Set PIN.
#Enter a four-digit PIN.
#Enterthefour-digit PIN again.
If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.
Changing the PIN
Requirements:
RA current PIN must be set.
#Select Change settings.
#Enterthe current PIN.
#Select Change PIN.
#Set a new PIN.
302 Multimedia system
Activating PIN protection for data export
#Select Change settings.
Confirm with the PIN.
#Select Protect data export.
Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Unblocking the PIN
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection.
RA Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
RThe Personalisation service is active
(/page 303).
If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three
times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a
single-use password sent to you via the
Mercedes me connect online portalto reset the
PIN protection.
#Select Unblock PIN.
#Enterthe single-use password.
PIN protection is reset, and you can set a
new PIN.
%Alternatively, you can have PIN protection
reset at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
User profile
Setting a user profile
Multimedia system:
4System 5gPersonalisation
Displaying a user profile when starting
If this function is active, a prompt appears when
starting the system asking which user profile to
use.
#Select Display profile list after start.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Selecting a user profile
#Select Guest or individual profile #.
%Some settings from the user profile are only
loaded when thevehicle is stationary or
when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic synchronisation
Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the
individual user profiles are synchronised on the
multimedia system and on the server. This
ensures that the latest user profiles are always
available.
#Select Automatic synchronisation.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
%For more information about importing/
exporting user profiles (/page 304).
Creating a user profile
Multimedia system:
4System 5gPersonalisation
5Create profile
#Enter a name.
#Select a.
The following information is saved in the user
profile, forexample:
RSystem settings
RSettings in theTV tuner's channel list
RNavigation and traffic information
The settings differ depending on thevehicle
equipment.
Multimedia system 303
Importing/exporting user profiles
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection
(/page 356).
RA Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
RThe Personalisation service is active.
Multimedia system:
4System 5gPersonalisation
5Manual export/import
This function is not available in all countries.
Only individual profiles can be imported or
exported.
The individual profiles are always collectively
imported or exported.
#Import: select Import profiles from the
server.
The The profile import overwrites the exist-
ing profiles. Do you want to continue? mes‐
sage appears.
#Select Yes.
User profiles are imported.
#Export: select Export profiles to the server.
User profiles are exported.
%Certain settings, such as address book
entries or previous destinations from the
navigation system, are not exported.
Setting user profile options
Multimedia system:
4System 5gPersonalisation
#Highlight a profile.
#Select ¥options.
The following options are available:
RRename
RDelete
RReset
%The guest profile cannot be deleted or
renamed.
Software update
Information on software updates
The multimedia system provides a message
when an update is available.
Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
ous updates:
Software update
Source of the
update
Update type
Updates via mobile
phone Navigation map, sys‐
tem updates, Digital
Owner's Manual
Updates via an exter‐
nal storage medium,
e.g. a USB flash drive
Navigation maps
%Updates via mobile phone require an active
Internet connection forthevehicle. This is
not available in all countries. For further
information on connecting to the Internet,
see (/page 355).
Advantages of updating software
Thanks to the software update, your vehicle sta‐
tus is up-to-date.
In order to constantly improve thequality of our
services you will receive future updates foryour
304 Multimedia system
multimedia system, the Mercedes me connect
services and your vehicle's communication mod‐
ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via
the mobile phone connection in your vehicle
and, as an option, installed automatically. You
can monitorthestatus of your updates on the
Mercedes me portal and find information about
potential innovations.
Your advantages at a glance:
Rconveniently receive software updates via
the mobile phone network
Rimprovesthequality and availability of
Mercedes me connect services
Rkeeps your multimedia system and communi‐
cation module up-to-date
Further information about software updates can
be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com
Performing a software update
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection
(/page 355).
RFor automatic updates: your vehicle has a
permanently installed communication mod‐
ule.
Multimedia system:
4System 5Software update
Automatic update
#Activate OAutomatic online updates.
Updates are performed.
The current status of the updates is dis‐
played.
Manual update
#Deactivate ªAutomatic online updates.
#Select an update from the list and start the
update.
Activating the software update
#Restart the system.
Function of important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for
the security of your multimedia system's data.
Please install these updates, or else the security
of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.
%If automatic software updates are activated,
the system updates will be downloaded auto‐
matically (/page 305).
As soon as an update is available for download,
a corresponding message appears on the media
display.
You have thefollowing selection options:
RDownload
The update will be downloaded in the back‐
ground.
RDetails
Information about the pending system
update is displayed.
RLater
The update can be downloaded manually at a
later time (/page 305).
If the download is completed and the update is
ready for installation, you will be informed of this
afterthe next ignition cycle, forexample.
%Park thevehicle safely in a suitable location
before starting the installation.
Multimedia system 305
Requirements forthe installation:
RThe ignition is switched on.
RThe engine is not running.
RNotes and warnings have been read and
accepted.
RThe parking brake is applied.
If all requirements are met, the update will be
installed. The multimedia system cannot be
operated while the update is being installed and
vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the
multimedia system automatically attemptsto
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is not possible, a symbol
appears on the centre console display. Please
consult a qualified specialist workshop to
resolve the problem.
Reset function
Multimedia system:
4System 5Reset
Personal data is deleted, forexample:
RStation presets
RConnected mobile phones
#Select Yes.
If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears
asking if you also wish to restore this to thefac‐
tory settings during a reset.
#Select Yes.
#Enter the current PIN.
The PIN is reset.
or
#Select No.
The current PIN staysthe same afterreset‐
ting.
%If you have forgottenyour PIN, a Mercedes-
Benz service centre can deactivate the PIN
protection foryou.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
#Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to thefactory
settings.
Navigation
Inserting/removing an SD card with digital
map data
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐
lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐
ing.
#Keep SD cards out of thereach of chil‐
dren.
#Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed.
*NOTE Damage from manual changes
Manual changes can damage the SD card.
306 Multimedia system
#Do not change or manipulate the con‐
tents of the SD card manually.
This excludes map updates.
*NOTE Damage due to high temperatures
High temperatures may damage the SD card.
#Remove the SD card after use and take
it out of thevehicle.
Inserting
The multimedia connection unit is located in the
stowage compartment under the armrest.
#Insert the SD card with the digital map data
in the SD card slot until it engages. The side
with the contacts must face downwards.
When inserting an SD card into the SD card
slot forthefirst time, you will see a message
on the media display.
Subsequently, the SD card will be made
available exclusively to your vehicle. It is then
no longer possible to use it in another vehi‐
cle.
#Confirm the message.
The navigation system is activated.
%If a fault message is displayed during the
installation saying that the SD card is locked,
the SD card may be damaged. Consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Removing
#Press the SD card.
#Remove the SD card.
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#Alternatively: press theßbutton.
The map appears and shows current vehicle
position 1.
%If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐
mate bar appears briefly.
Multimedia system 307
Showing/hiding the navigation menu
Requirements:
RThe map displays the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#To show: swipe left on thetouchpad or the
Touch Control.
or
#Slide the controller to the left.
#To hide: swipe right on thetouchpad or the
Touch Control.
or
#Slide the controller to theright.
%To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or
slide to the left or right as many times as
necessary.
Destination entry
Entering a POI or address
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Requirements:
RFor the online search: Mercedes me con‐
nect is available.
RYou have a user account forthe Mercedes
me portal.
RThe service has been activated at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
308 Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#Show the navigation menu.
#Select ªEnter destination .
The country in which thevehicle is located is set
1.
There are two available methods of destination
entry:
RFree search 2
RSearchstep-by-step 3
Method 1: free search
#Enter the POI or address in 2. The entries
can be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
Enterthese address elements, forexample:
RCity, street, house number
RStreet,town
RPostcode
RPOI name
RPOI category, e.g. Petrol station
RCity, POI name
Examples of destination entry:
RIf you are searching fornigsstraße in
Stuttgart,forexample, you can enter
STUT and N.
RIf you are searching for a POI in theUni‐
ted Kingdom, forexample, you can enter
THE SHARD.
To try both examples, the country setting
must also be changed (method 2).
#To switch to handwriting recognition:
select v5.
#Write thecharacter on thetouchpad.
#To switch to character selection: press the
%button.
or
#Press thetouchpad.
#To delete an entry: select %4(if avail‐
able).
Use thefollowing options:
RPress briefly: deletes the last character
entered or the last suggestion adopted.
RPress and hold: deletesthe entire entry.
#To set the language: select B8.
#Select the language.
%This function is useful for countries in which
severalcharacter sets are supported. An
example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and
Latin characters.
Multimedia system 309
#To call up the online search function:
select Online search 6.
Once an Internet connection is established, a
list appears. It shows online destinations
related to the previous entry.
Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐
net service provider.
#Select the online destination.
or
#Enterthe online destination or a 3 word
address in the input line.
%Entera3word address (/page 314).
Online search is not available in all coun‐
tries.
#To call up the list: press the%button.
or
#If thetop line of thecharacter bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
#Select the destination in the list.
#To adopt a destination: select 7Select
destination .
If there are several listings for a destination,
a list appears.
#Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
Method 2: search step-by-step
#Press %button.
or
#If thetop line of thecharacter bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
The character bar is hidden. City or postcode
is highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
POI, are available.
#Select City or postcode.
The character bar appears.
#Enterthe city or the postcode.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
The address entries can be made in any
order, forexample:
RCity or postcode,Street,House no.
Enter an intersecting street, if available.
RStreet,City or postcode
RPOI, e.g. Petrol station,City or postcode
%During destination entry, use thefollowing
functions:
RSwitching to handwriting recognition
RSwitching to character selection
RDeleting an entry
An entry, e.g. POI, can be deleted with
£in a step-by-step search.Navigate
to the left to do so.
RCalling up the online search function (if
available)
RCalling up a list
The functions are described in the free
search.
#To change the country:select the country.
#Enter the country.You only need to enter the
firstcharacter.
#Select the country on the list.
310 Multimedia system
#To adopt a destination: select Select desti-
nation.
If there are several listings for a destination,
a distance-orientated list appears.
#Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5¬Previous and other destinations
#Select Previous destinations.
#Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
or
#If favourites have been saved already
(/page 323), select From global favourites.
#Select thefavourite.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting a POI
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5¬Previous and other destinations
5POIs
#Select the category.
or
#Select All categories and the category.
If route guidance is not active: the search
begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle
position. The list is sortedby distance in
ascending order.
The POIs show thefollowing information:
Rname of POI
Rlinear distance to the POI
Rthe direction of the linear distance to the
POI (arrow) is displayed when searching
forthevehicle's current position
#Select the POI.
#Route guidance is active: select the search
position prior to choosing a POI (see exam‐
ple).
#If intermediate destinations are set, these
can also be selected as the search position
after selecting Near destination.
Filtering displays for POIs
#Enter the search term in ªSearch:.
The results list shows relevant POIs.
Entering Italy shows thefollowing results, for
example:
RPOIs which contain Italy in the name.
RPOIs which belong to the category Italian
cuisine.
#Select ¡.
The first POI in the list is highlighted.
#Select the POI.
Example: setting the search position for the
parking category during active route guid‐
ance
#Select In the vicinity,Near destination or
Along the route.
The list shows the located POIs or opens an
overview of theroute destination after
selecting Near destination.
Multimedia system 311
#Select the POI.
#Select Near destination: select the intermedi‐
ate destination or the destination.
Starting an automatic filling station search
Requirements:
RThe automatic filling station search is activa‐
tedO(/page 318).
Driving situation
Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the
fuel tank reaches thereserve fuel level.
The Fuel tank reserve level Do you want to start
the search for filling stations? message is
shown.
#Select Yes.
The automatic filling station search begins.
The available filling stations along theroute
or in the vicinity of thevehicle's current posi‐
tion are displayed.
#Select thefilling station.
The address of thefilling station is displayed.
#If route guidance is not active, select Start
route guidance.
The selected filling station is set as the desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
or
#If route guidance is active, select Start new
route guidance or Set as next intermediate
destination.
Start new route guidance:the selected filling
station is set as a new destination. The previ‐
ous destinations and intermediate destina‐
tions are deleted. Route guidance to thefill‐
ing station begins.
Set as next intermediate destination:the
selected filling station is set as the next inter‐
mediate destination. Route guidance begins.
#If there are already four intermediate des‐
tinations: select Yes in the prompt.
The selected filling station is entered into
position 1 of the intermediate destinations
menu. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted.
Route guidance begins.
Entering an intermediate destination
Requirements:
RA destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5Intermediate destinations and info
#Select Search for an intermediate destina-
tion.
#Enterthe intermediate destination as a POI
or address (/page 308).
#Select the intermediate destination.
#Select Set as destination.
or
#Select an intermediate destination using
ªEnter destination during route guid‐
ance.
#Select Set as next intermediate destination
after entering the destination.
312 Multimedia system
Editing intermediate destinations
Requirements:
RThe destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5Intermediate destinations and info
#To call up the map: highlight the destination
or the intermediate destination.
#Select ¥Map .
#To change the order of destinations: high‐
light the destination or the intermediate des‐
tination.
#Select ¥Move .
#Move the intermediate destination to the
desired position.
#Press theTouch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
#To delete a destination: highlight the desti‐
nation or the intermediate destination.
#Select ¥Delete.
Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
nations
Requirements:
RThe destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5Intermediate destinations and info
#Select Start new route guidance.
The route is calculated with the set inter‐
mediate destinations.
Selecting a contact for destination entry
Requirements:
RA mobile phone is connectedto the multime‐
dia system (/page 335).
RContacts have been downloaded
(/page 340).
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5¬Previous and other destinations
5Contacts
#Select the contact.
The contact details are displayed.
#Select the address.
The Please wait... message appears.
The search is carried out first online and then
in the multimedia system database.
#Select the destination.
Filtering displays for contacts
#Enter a name or telephone number, forexam‐
ple, into the search field.
#Select ¡.
The first contact in the list is highlighted.
#Select the contact.
#Select the address.
%Route guidance to a contact address is relia‐
ble in thefollowing cases:
Rthe contact address is complete.
Multimedia system 313
Rthe contact data matches the map data
in the digital map.
Entering geo-coordinates
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5¬Previous and other destinations
5Geo-coordinates
#Entergeo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and
seconds.
The map shows the position.
#Confirm the entry.
#To calculate a route: select Start route
guidance.
#If a route has already been created, select
Start new route guidance or Set as inter-
mediate destination.
Entering the destination as a 3 word address
Requirements:
RSearching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is possible in the online search
(/page 308).
RThere is an Internet connection.
%Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is not possible in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ªEnter destination
#Select Online search.
#Enterthe destination address as a 3 word
address. Separate each of thewords with a
full stop.
The search results are displayed.
#Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
%3word addresses from what3words are an
alternative addressing system for multilin‐
gual georeferencing of global locations with
aresolution of three metres. Using this grid,
locations on the Earth's surface are included
which do not have a building address such
as street and house number, forexample.
The Brandenburg Gate has this language
dependent 3 word address:
RGerman: tapfer.gebäude.verliehen
REnglish: that.lands.winning
RFrench: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant
3word addresses are unique, easy to
remember and suffice for most routine appli‐
cations.
You can convert addresses to 3word
addresses and back again:
Rat thewebsite http://what3words.com
Rin the what3words apps
Selecting a destination on the map
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
#Select Map menu.
or
#If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
#Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/page 327).
#Swipe in any direction on theTouch Control
or touchpad.
314 Multimedia system
or
#Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The more you move
your finger away from thestarting position
on thetouchpad, thefaster the map moves.
#Press theTouch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
If several destinations are located around the
crosshair, a list shows theavailable POIs and
roads.
If a destination is located exactly on the
crosshair, the destination address is dis‐
played.
#Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown.
Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D
#Highlight Map orientation: 2D/3D.
#Press theTouch Control, thetouchpad or the
controller.
The map will be displayed in the selected
map orientation.
Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of
the map
#Select Traffic messages for the vicinity.
The map appears.
#Swipe left or right on thetouchpad.
or
#Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next traffic incident is high‐
lighted on the map. Information on the traffic
incident is displayed.
%Trafficreports are not available in all coun‐
tries.
Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map
#Select Surrounding POIs.
#Swipe left or right on thetouchpad.
or
#Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the
map. The name or the address is shown.
#To filter the display by POI category:
swipe down on theTouch Control or the
touchpad.
or
#Slide the controller down.
#Select the POI category.
%User defined allows personal POI symbols to
be selected (/page 329).
Route
Calculating a route
Requirements:
RThe destination has been entered.
RThe destination address is shown.
#If route guidance is not active, select Start
route guidance.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows theroute. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#If route guidance is active, select Start new
route guidance or Set as next intermediate
destination.
Start new route guidance:the selected desti‐
nation address is set as a new destination.
Multimedia system 315
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
Set as next intermediate destination:the
selected destination address is set as the
next intermediate destination. Route guid‐
ance begins.
Taking alternative routes into consideration
#Select an alternative route (/page 318).
Other menu functions
#To save the destination: select ¥Store
in "Previous destinations".
#To display on the map: select ¥Map.
#To call a telephone number: select
¥Call (if available).
#To call up an Internet address: select
¥www (if available).
Selecting a route type
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
#Select Route settings.
#Select theroute type.
If route guidance is active, the new route is
calculated with the new route type.
If route guidance is not active, the next route
is calculated with the new route type.
You can choose from thefollowing route types:
REco route
An economical route is calculated. The jour‐
ney time may be somewhat longer than for
quickerroutes.
The symbol forthe current vehicle position is
displayed in green.
RFast route
Aroute with a quick journey time is calcula‐
ted.
RShort route
Aroute with a short driving distance is calcu‐
lated.
Avoid traffic jam automatically can be switched
on Oor off ªforthese route types. If Avoid
traffic jam automatically is switched on, Ask
before changing route to avoid traffic jam can be
selected.
The Avoid traffic jam automatically and Ask
before changing route to avoid traffic jam set‐
tings are not available in every country.
The settings enable thefollowing:
RAvoid traffic jam automatically
The route is calculated with the currently set
route type.
Traffic messages via Live Traffic Information
or FM RDS-TMC are taken into account.
Live Traffic Information and FM RDS-TMC are
not available in all countries.
RAsk before changing route to avoid traffic
jam
A prompt appears when a new route is detec‐
ted with a shorter journey time based on traf‐
ficreports. You can continue to use the cur‐
rent route or use the dynamic route instead.
316 Multimedia system
Selecting route options
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
5Avoid options
Avoiding areas
#Select Areas (/page 330).
Avoiding motorways, ferries, motorail trains,
tunnels, unpavedroads
#Select Oor deselect ªavoid option.
Using routes requiring a special toll sticker
#Select Use vignette roads.
#Select Oor deselect ªAll or countries.
The route takes into account roads in the
selected countries which require youto pay a
time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows
forthe use of a route network for a limited
time period.
Using toll roads
#Select Use toll roads.
#Select Payment in cash or Electronic billing
or Off.
The route takes into account roads that
require the payment of a usage fee (toll).
If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into
account.
These route options are not available in every
country.
The selected route options cannot always be
implemented. Therefore, a route may include a
ferry, for instance, eventhough theavoid Ferries
option is enabled. A message appears and you
will hear a corresponding message.
Selecting notifications
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Announcements
#Switch an announcement on Oor off ª.
You can choose from thefollowing announce‐
ments:
RAnnounce traffic warnings
This function is not available in all countries.
RDriving safety voice announcements
If the function is switched on, an announce‐
ment is given before sections of road which
have a maximum permissible speed.
RAnnounce street names
The multimedia system announces the
names of theroads that will follow the
upcoming change of direction.
This function is not available in all countries
and languages.
Displaying destination information
Requirements:
RA destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#Select Intermediate destinations and info.
The following information is displayed:
RIntermediate destinations and destination
The route can also include up to four
intermediate destinations.
RName, address
Multimedia system 317
RRemaining driving distance
RTime of arrival
Selecting an alternative route
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
#Select Alternative route.
The routes are displayed in accordance with
the setting made in theroute settings.
The currently selected route is shown with a
dark blue line.
#Select the alternative route.
Activating a commuter route
Requirements:
RYour home and work addresses are saved as
destinations in thefavourites (/page 323).
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
#Select Activate commuter route O.
Navigation automatically recognises that the
vehicle is located on theroute between
"home" and "work" or vice versa. It automati‐
cally starts a route guidance without voice
output.
If the destinations for home and work have
not yet been created, a prompt appears.
Forthe daily commuter route, traffic inci‐
dents on theroute are also reported when
driving without route guidance.
Switching the automatic filling station
search on/off
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
#Switch Reserve fuel level on Oor off ª.
Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level
is reached, a prompt appears asking whether
youwant to start searching forfilling sta‐
tions.
Starting the automatic service station
search
Requirements:
RATTENTION ASSIST and theSuggest rest
area function are activated (/page 262).
Driving situation
The ATTENTION ASSIST Do you want to start
the rest area search? message is shown.
#Select Yes.
The service station search starts. The availa‐
ble service stations along theroute or in the
vicinity of thevehicle's current position are
displayed.
#Select the service station.
The service station address is displayed.
#If route guidance is not active, select Start
route guidance.
The selected service station is set as a desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
or
#If route guidance is active, select Start new
route guidance or Set as next intermediate
destination.
Start new route guidance:the selected
service station is set as a new destination.
The previous destination and all intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the service station begins.
318 Multimedia system
Set as next intermediate destination:the
selected service station is set as the next
intermediate destination. Route guidance
begins.
Route guidance
Notes on route guidance
&WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while thevehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in thevehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause youto lose control of
thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated.
The road and trafficrules and regulations always
have priority over multimedia system driving
instructions.
Driving instructions are:
RNavigation announcements
RRoute guidance displays
RLane recommendations
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if
you leave the calculated route, a new route is
calculated automatically.
Driving instructions may differ from the actual
road and traffic conditions if:
RThe route is diverted
RThe direction of a one-way street has been
changed
Forthis reason, you must always observe road
and trafficrules and regulations during your
journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi‐
tions.
The route may differ from the ideal route due to
thefollowing:
RRoadworks
RIncomplete digital map data
Notes on GPS reception
The correct function of the navigation system
depends amongst other things on GPS recep‐
tion. In certain situations GPS reception can be
impaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. in
tunnels or in multi-storey car parks.
Multimedia system 319
Changing direction overview
There are three phases when changing direction:
RPreparation phase
If there is enough time between thechanges
of direction, the multimedia system prepares
youforthe upcoming change of direction. A
navigation announcement is issued, e.g.
"Prepare to turn right".
The map appears in full-screen mode.
RAnnouncement phase
The multimedia system announces the
upcoming change of direction, e.g. by
announcing "Turn right in 100 m".
The display is split into two parts. The map is
displayed on the left; on theright, there is a
detailed image of the junction or a 3D image
of the upcoming change of direction.
RChange-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing
"Now turn right".
The display is split into two parts.
The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐
tion when the light-coloured bar on theright
drops down to 0 m and the current vehicle
position symbol has reached the highlighted
change-of-direction point.
When thechange of direction is complete,
the map appears in full-screen mode.
%Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.
Lane recommendations overview
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
If the digital map contains therelevant data,the
multimedia system can display lane recommen‐
dations forthe next two changes of direction.
1Recommended lane
2Possible lane
3Lanes not recommended
320 Multimedia system
The following lanes are displayed:
RRecommended lane 1
In this lane, you will be able to complete both
the next change of direction and the one
afterthat.
RPossible lane 2
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction.
RLane not recommended 3
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without chang‐
ing lane.
During thechange of direction, new lanes may
be added.
%Lane recommendations can also be dis‐
played in the Instrument Display and in the
Head-up Display.
Overview of destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
Íchequered flag. Route guidance is finished.
When an intermediate destination has been
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐
tion flag with the number of your Îinter‐
mediate destination. Afterthis, route guidance is
continued.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
Requirements:
Rroute guidance is active.
#To switch off: press thevolume control on
the multifunction steering wheel during a
navigation announcement (/page 294).
or
#Press thevolume control on the centre con‐
sole during a navigation announcement
(/page 294).
The Spoken driving recommendations have
been deactivated. message appears.
or
#Show the navigation menu (/page 308).
#Select !Driving recommendation.
The symbol changes to #.
#To activate: select #Driving recommen-
dation .
The current navigation announcement is
played.
%In thefollowing situations, navigation
announcements are switched on automati‐
cally:
RA new route guidance is started.
RThe route is recalculated.
%You can add and call up this function as a
favourite under Spoken driving recommenda-
tions on/off.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
during a phone call
#Select System.
#Select õAudio.
#Select Navigation and traffic announce-
ments.
#Switch Driving recommendations during
phone call on Oor off ª.
Multimedia system 321
Adjusting the volume of navigation
announcements
Requirements:
RRoute guidance is active.
#On the multifunction steering wheel or
on the multimedia system: turn thevolume
control on the multifunction steering wheel
during a navigation announcement.
or
#Turn thevolume control on the centre con‐
sole during a navigation announcement
(/page 295).
%In thefollowing situations, thevolume is
raised to the maximum volume or loweredto
the minimum volume:
RA new route guidance is started.
RThe route is recalculated.
%The minimum volume can be individually set
at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
#Via system settings: select System.
#Select õAudio.
#Select Navigation and traffic announce-
ments.
#Select Driving recommendation volume.
#Set thevolume.
#To switch audio fadeout on/off during
navigation announcements: select System.
#Select õAudio.
#Select Navigation and traffic announce-
ments.
#Switch Audio fadeout during driving recom-
mendation on Oor off ª.
Repeating navigation announcements
Requirements:
Raroute has already been created.
Rroute guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#Select !Driving recommendation.
#Select #Driving recommendation.
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.
%You can add and call up this function as a
favourite under Repeat spoken driving rec-
ommendation.
Cancelling route guidance
Requirements:
RAroute has already been created.
RRoute guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#Select %Cancel route guidance.
Overview of route guidance to an off-road
destination
Off-road destination: the destination is within
the digital map. However, the map contains no
roads that lead to the destination.
You can enter off-road destinations on the map.
Route guidance guides youfor as long as possi‐
ble with navigation announcements and displays
on roads that are knownto the multimedia sys‐
tem.
322 Multimedia system
Shortly before youreach the last known position
on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement, forexample.
The display shows a direction arrow and the lin‐
ear distance to the destination.
Overview of route guidance from an off-road
location to a destination
Off-road position: the current vehicle position is
located within the digital map on roads that are
not available.
When route guidance begins thefollowing dis‐
plays appear:
RThe Road not mapped message is shown.
RA direction arrow showing the linear direc‐
tion to the POI.
When thevehicle is back on a road knownto the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Overview of off-road status during route
guidance
Due to roadworks,forexample, there may be dif‐
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of theroad. In such cases,
the multimedia system will temporarily be
unable to locate thevehicle's current position on
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.
When thevehicle is off-road, thefollowing dis‐
plays are shown:
RtheRoad not mapped message
Ra direction arrow showing the linear direction
to the POI
When thevehicle is back on a road knownto the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Destination
Saving the current vehicle position
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
#Select 1on the map menu (/page 327).
The current vehicle position is savedto the
"Previous destinations" memory.
Storing a map position
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
The map is in full-screen mode.
#Press theTouch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
#Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/page 327).
#Select a position on the map.
If multiple entries are available for a map
position, a list appears.
#Highlight an entry.
#Select ¥Store in "Previous destina-
tions" .
The map position is savedto the "Previous
destinations" memory.
Editing the previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
5¬Previous and other destinations
5Previous destinations
#Highlight one of the previous destinations.
Multimedia system 323
#To save as a favourite: select ¥Save
as global favourite .
The favourites are displayed.
#Move thefavourite to the desired position.
If a favourite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
#To save as "Home" address: select ¥
Save as "Home" address .
#To save as "Work" address: select ¥
Save as "Work" address .
#To delete a single or all destinations:
select ¥Delete or Delete all.
A prompt appears.
#Select Yes.
#To display destination information: select
¥Details.
Using external destinations
External destinations can be received from the
following sources:
RMercedes-Benz Apps
Rdoor-to-door navigation
%Received destinations are saved in the previ‐
ous destinations.
A prompt appears on the media display.
#A destination has been received without
picture information: select Yes.
#If route guidance is not active, select Start
route guidance.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows theroute. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#If route guidance is active, select Start new
route guidance or Set as next intermediate
destination.
Start new route guidance:thereceived desti‐
nation address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
Set as next intermediate destination:the
received destination address is set as the
next new intermediate destination. Route
guidance begins.
#A destination has been received with pic‐
ture information: select Start route guid-
ance.
Route guidance starts.
Route guidance with current trafficreports
Traffic information overview
The services are not available in every country.
Trafficreports can be received with thefollowing
services:
RLive Traffic Information
RFM RDS-TMC
It is not possible to use both services simultane‐
ously.
Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC is dis‐
played with a symbol.
%Hazard warnings can be received using the
Car-to-X service.
There may be differences between the traffic
reports received and the actual road and traffic
conditions.
324 Multimedia system
Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐
tion:
RCurrent traffic reports are received via the
Internet connection or via data roaming (for
selected countries).
RThe traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
lar intervals.
RIn selected countries, the subscription
service is available free of charge for a period
of threeyears from the manufacturing date.
The subscription information shows thesta‐
tus (/page 325).
Information on thevehicle's position is regularly
sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
ficreports relevant to thevehicle's position are
sent to thevehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
fortheflow of traffic and helps to improve the
quality of the trafficreports.
If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi‐
tion, you can have this service deactivated at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Useful information on FM RDS-TMC:
RA FM RDS-TMC radio station broadcasts traf‐
ficreports alongside theradio programme.
RFM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.
Displaying subscription information
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic
Information.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
The subscription expiry date is automatically dis‐
played:
Rone month before theexpiry date.
Rone week before theexpiry date.
Ron theexpiry date.
#To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub-
scription Info.
Depending on thestatus, one of thefollowing
messages appears:
Rthe period of validity forthe subscription
is displayed.
Rthe subscription has expired.
Displaying the traffic map
Requirements:
RFor Live Traffic Information: thevehicle is
equipped with a communication module fea‐
turing an activated, integrated SIM card.
RWhen thevehicle is started, the communica‐
tion module automatically establishes an
Internet connection. Traffic information is
made available shortly afterwards.
Multimedia system 325
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Map menu
#Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press theTouch Control, the
controller or thetouchpad.
The map menu appears.
#Activate ºO.
The traffic map shows thefollowing information,
forexample:
Rtraffic incidents, forexample:
-roadworks
-road blocks
-warning messages
The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐
played in colour (on theroute) or grey (off
theroute).
Rtrafficflow information:
-traffic jam (red line)
-slow-moving traffic (orange line)
-heavy traffic (yellow line)
-free-flowing traffic (green line)
Rdisplay for traffic delays on theroute lasting
at least one minute
Rwarning message symbols:
-dsymbol
-additional road safety notes when
approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the
end of a traffic jam
If thevehicle approaches a danger area
on theroute, a warning message is dis‐
played on the map. A warning message
may also be issued (/page 327).
Displaying traffic incidents
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Map content
#Activate OTraffic incidents.
Roadworks,road blocks, local area reports
(e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐
played.
Activating free flow and traffic display
#Activate OFree-flowing traffic and Traffic
delays.
%The traffic delay is displayedforthe current
route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying details
#Displaying the traffic map (/page 325).
#Moving the map (/page 328).
#When a traffic report symbol is under the
crosshair, press on the central control ele‐
ment.
The trafficreport details are displayed.
or
#Press on the central control element.
#Select Information on traffic reports.
The map shows the trafficreport symbols in
the vicinity.
Trafficreport information is displayed in the
status line:
RTrafficreport symbol
326 Multimedia system
RReason forthe traffic report, e.g. traffic
congestion
RWarning message (highlighted in red)
#To select a trafficreport symbol: select
Next or Previous.
#Press on the central control element.
The trafficreport details are displayed.
Issuing hazard warnings
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Announcements
#Activate OAnnounce traffic warnings.
Warning messages are issued and tailbacks
which pose a risk are announced.
Map and compass
Map and compass overview
1Savesthe current vehicle position
2Movesthe map
3Selects the map orientation and map view
4Selects the function depending on the equip‐
ment:
Sends a hazard warning via Car-to-X.
Filters the display of POIs in the vicinity
according to POI category
5Switches the display of personal POI sym‐
bols on the map on or off
6Switches one of thefollowing displays on or
off depending on the equipment:
Weather information
Traffic incidents
7Switches the traffic map display on or off
The map and satellite images are shown in globe
projection. This allows for a realistic map display
in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐
ling.
Depending on the map data, important buildings
in many cities are depicted realistically on the
map in small map scales (e.g. 20 m, 50 m).
Other buildings are shown as models.
%You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/page 301).
If online information is available, fuel prices and
theavailability of parking spaces in multi-storey
car parks are displayed, forexample.
Multimedia system 327
%Requirements:
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a user account forthe
Mercedes me portal.
RThe service has been activated at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
%The online information is not available in all
countries.
Depending on the map data, speed limits can be
displayed on the map. The function for displaying
speed limits is not available in all countries.
%Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of therespective companies and
used solely forthe purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of
such logos on the map does not indicate
approval of, support of or advertising by
these companies forthe navigation system
itself.
Setting the map scale
Requirements:
RThe map is shown.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation
#To zoom in: swipe down on theTouch Con‐
trol.
or
#Turn the controller anti-clockwise.
or
#Move two fingers apart on thetouchpad.
#To zoom out: swipe up on theTouch Control.
or
#Turn the controller clockwise.
or
#Move two fingers together on thetouchpad.
%You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/page 301).
Moving the map
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Map menu
#Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the central control ele‐
ment.
The map menu appears.
#Select "Move map" in map menu 2
(/page 327).
#Swipe in any direction on theTouch Control
or touchpad.
or
#Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The further you
move your finger away from thestarting posi‐
tion on thetouchpad, thefaster the map
moves.
328 Multimedia system
Selecting the map orientation
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Map menu
#Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the central control ele‐
ment.
The map menu appears.
#In map menu 3, select N,2D or
3D(/page 327).
RN:the 2D map view is displayed so that
north is always at thetop.
R2D:the 2D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
R3D:the 3D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
Selecting POI symbols
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Map content
POIs include filling stations and hotels which can
be displayed as symbols on the map, forexam‐
ple. Not all POIs are available everywhere.
#Select POI symbols.
The #dot indicates the current setting.
Standard displays symbols of predefined cat‐
egories on the map.
User defined allows youto personally select
the symbols fortheavailable categories.
None switches the display off.
#Select a setting.
#User defined: select categories.
The POI symbols of the selected categories
are displayedOor not displayedª.
Selecting the display of text information in
the map
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Text information
#Select text information.
Current street shows thestreet you are cur‐
rently driving on at the bottom of the display.
When the map is moved, thefollowing infor‐
mation appears under the crosshair:
Rstreet name
RPOI name
Rarea name
Geo-coordinates displaysthefollowing infor‐
mation:
Rlongitude and latitude
Relevation
The elevation shown may deviate from
the actual elevation.
Rnumber of satellites from which a signal
can be received
When the map is moved, this information
does not appear.
Climate control displays the current climate
control settings.
None switches the display off.
Displaying the next intersecting street
Requirements:
RRoute guidance is not active.
Multimedia system 329
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
#Activate ONext intersecting street.
The name of the next intersecting street will
be displayed at the upper edge of the display.
Displaying the map version
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
#Select Map version.
#Select Details.
%Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
Overview of avoiding an area
You can define areas that youwould like to
avoid.
Avoiding a new area
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
5Avoid options 5Areas
#Select Avoid new area.
#To search for an area via the map: select
Using map.
#Move the map
or
#To search for an area using an address:
select Address entry.
#Enter the address.
#Select Select destination.
The map appears.
#To display an area: press theTouch Control,
thetouchpad or the controller.
Aredrectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided.
#To change the size of the area: swipe up or
down on theTouch Control or thetouchpad.
or
#Slide the controller up or down.
The map scale is enlarged or reduced and
changes the size of the area.
#To set the area: press theTouch Control,
thetouchpad or the controller.
The area is entered into the list.
Changing an area
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
5Avoid options 5Areas
#Highlight an area in the list.
#Select ¥Edit.
Moving the area on the map
#Swipe in any direction on theTouch Control
or touchpad.
or
#Slide the controller in any direction.
Changing the size of the area
#To start: press theTouch Control, thetouch‐
pad or the controller.
#To change: swipe up or down on theTouch
Control or thetouchpad.
or
#Slide the controller up or down.
#To stop: press theTouch Control, thetouch‐
pad or the controller.
330 Multimedia system
Taking the area for the route into account
#Avoid Oan area in the list.
If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐
culated.
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried
overto the next route guidance.
Deleting one or all areas
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
5Avoid options 5Areas
#Highlight an area in the list.
#Select ¥Delete or ¥Delete all.
#Confirm the prompt with Yes.
One or all areas are deleted.
Map data update overview
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven‐
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map data.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
You can also obtain map and software updates
there.
%The SD card can only be installed on a navi‐
gation system. It is not possible to installthe
SD card on other navigation systems.
Free map update afterfirst installing the SD
card
In some countries map updates are available as
a download via the "SD card navigation" down‐
load manager.
If there is a more recent map update,you can
obtain this, under certain conditions, free of
charge within 60 days of the SD card being first
installed.
You can download the map update via the Down‐
load Manager on your PC.
Overview of map data and map software
Variant 1: an SD card for navigation is provided
with thevehicle. The SD card contains map data
and software for navigation.
Once you insert the SD card into the SD card
slot, the SD card is only made available to your
vehicle. It is then no longer possible to use it in
another vehicle. You will see a note on the media
display.
Variant 2: if no SD card for navigation is provi‐
ded with thevehicle, navigation cannot be used.
You can obtain an SD card from a Mercedes-
Benz service centre at a later date.
Displaying the compass
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
#Select Compass.
The compass display shows thefollowing
information:
Rthe current direction of travel with bear‐
ing (360° format) and compass direction
Rlongitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
Rheight (rounded)
Rnumber of GPS satellites from which a
signal can be received
Multimedia system 331
Displaying Qibla
Requirements:
RThe Qibla display is available in your country.
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ÀRoute and position
#Select Qibla.
The arrow on the compass shows the direc‐
tion of prayer to Mecca in relation to the cur‐
rent direction of travel.
The number of satellites received is shown.
Setting the map scale automatically
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
The map scale is set automatically depending on
your driving speed.
#Switch Auto zoom on Oor off ª.
%The automatically selected map scale can be
changed manually for a short time. The set‐
ting is reset automatically after a few sec‐
onds.
Displaying weather information
Requirements:
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a user account forthe Mercedes
me portal.
RThe service is available.
RThe service has been activated at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Multimedia system:
4Navigation 5ZOptions
5Map content
#Activate Weather information O.
or
#If weather information display 6is available
in the map menu, activate O(/page 327)
it.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or
cloud cover.
%Weather information is not available in all
countries.
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
&WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while thevehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in thevehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause youto lose control of
thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
332 Multimedia system
&WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while thevehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when thevehicle is
stationary.
#As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended forthis purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
thevehicle.
Further information can be obtained from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Multimedia system 333
Telephone menu overview
1Bluetooth®device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
2Signal strength of the mobile phone network
forthe currently connected and selected
mobile phone
3Battery status of the currently connected
and selected mobile phone
4¢(telephone ready) or w(call active)
5Contacts (/page 340)
6Call list (/page 342)
7Text message
8One mobile phone connected: Active call.
Two mobile phones connected: changes view
between telephone 1 and 2 or Active call
9Devices (/page 335)
AOptions
334 Multimedia system
Symbols 1to 4are not shown until after a
mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐
media system. The symbols depend on your
mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider.
Bluetooth®profile overview
Bluetooth®profile
of the mobile phone
Function
PBAP (Phone Book
Access Profile)
Contacts are auto‐
matically displayed in
the multimedia sys‐
tem
MAP (Message
Access Profile)
Message functions
can be used
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, thefollowing tel‐
ephony operating modes are available:
RA mobile phone is connectedto the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth®(/page 335).
RTwo mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth®(two
phone mode) (/page 336).
Information on telephony
The following situations can lead to the call
being disconnected while thevehicle is in
motion:
Rthere is insufficient network coverage in the
area
Ryou move from one GSM or UMTS transmit‐
ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no
communication channels are free
Rthe SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
Ra mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
the network with the second SIM card at the
same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice®for improved speech quality. Arequire‐
ment forthis is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person
you are calling support HD Voice®.
Depending on thequality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth®tel‐
ephony)
Requirements:
RBluetooth®is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
RBluetooth®is activated on the multimedia
system (/page 299).
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªDevices
Searching for a mobile phone
#Select Connect new device.
#Select Start search on the system.
The available mobile phones are displayed. If
a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated
by the#symbol.
Multimedia system 335
Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation
using Secure Simple Pairing)
#Select the mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
#If the codes match: confirm the code on
the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation by
entering a passkey)
#Select the mobile phone.
#Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐
nation as a passkey.
#On the multimedia system: enter the pass‐
key and select a.
#On the mobile phone: enter the passkey
again and confirm.
%Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised
on the multimedia system.
Authorised mobile phones are reconnected
automatically.
Connecting a second mobile phone (two
phone mode)
Requirements:
RAt least one mobile phone is already connec‐
tedto the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªDevices
#Select Connect new device.
#Select Start search on the system.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
#Select the mobile phone.
#Answer theHow would you like to connect
the new device? prompt.
#To replace the currently connected
mobile phone: select Phone 1.
The currently connected mobile phone is
replaced by the new mobile phone.
or
#To connect the second mobile phone:
select Phone 2.
The new mobile phone is connected as
Phone 2. If two mobile phones have already
been connected, the second telephone is
replaced by the new mobile phone.
or
#To use the mobile phone as an audio
source: select Audio source (/page 369).
%A mobile phone can be operated both as an
audio source as well as telephone in parallel.
%It is possible to change the type of connec‐
tion forthe mobile phone already connected
at any time and to set this as Phone 1,
Phone 2 or Audio source (/page 337).
Functions of the mobile phone in two phone
mode
Functions overview
Mobile phone in the
foreground
Mobile phone in the
background
Full range of func‐
tions Incoming calls
336 Multimedia system
Interchanging mobile phones (two phone
mode)
Requirements:
RThe mobile phones are authorised
(/page 335).
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªDevices
#In the device overview, select a mobile phone
which has already been authorised and set
as Phone 1 or Phone 2.
After interchanging the mobile phones, the
mobile phone in theforeground is replaced by
the mobile phone in the background.
1Bluetooth®device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
2Connects a mobile phone as Phone 1
3Connects a mobile phone as Phone 2
4Connects a mobile phone as Audio source
5Disconnecting a mobile phone(/page 337)
6De-authorising a mobile phone(/page 337)
%If a new mobile phone is connected and
defined as Phone 1,forexample, this over‐
writes the previously connected mobile
phone in theforeground of the system.
Disconnecting a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªDevices
#Select theisymbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
The disconnection of the mobile phone takes
place without a confirmation prompt. The
mobile phone remains authorised in the sys‐
tem.
De-authorising a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªDevices
#Select the%symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
#Answer the confirmation prompt with Yes.
The mobile phone is de-authorised and
deleted from the system.
Multimedia system 337
Information on Near Field Communication
(NFC)
NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer
or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the
multimedia system.
The following functions are available without
having authorised a mobile phone:
RTransferring a URL to be viewed in the multi‐
media system (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐
munication (NFC)
Requirements:
RNFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions)
RThe mobile phone's screen is switched on
and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions)
#To connect a mobile phone: open stowage
compartment cover1.
#Place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see
manufacturer's operating instructions) on
NFC logo 2on the inside of the cover.
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
#To change mobile phones: place the NFC
area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐
er's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2.
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ised on the multimedia system, it is now con‐
nected.
If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul‐
timedia system forthefirst time, it is connec‐
ted after confirming the mobile phone
instructions (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Setting thereception and transmission vol‐
ume
Requirements:
RA mobile phone is authorised (/page 335).
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ZOptions
5Telephone
This function ensures optimal language quality.
338 Multimedia system
#Select Reception volume or Transmission
volume.
#Set thevolume.
Further information on therecommended recep‐
tion and transmission volume: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Adjusting the call and ringtone volume
Multimedia system:
4System 5õAudio 5Telephone
#Select Speech volume or Ringtone volume.
#Set thevolume.
Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐
nition
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone is connectedto the multi‐
media system (/page 335).
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
#Press and hold theóbutton on the multi‐
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition
#Press the8or ~button on the multi‐
function steering wheel.
Calls
Telephone operation
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
Making a call
#Select Numerical keypad.
#Enterthe number.
#Select w.
The call is made.
Accepting a call
#Select Accept.
Rejecting a call
#Select Reject.
Ending a call
#Select =.
Activating functions during a call
#To show all functions, navigate down.
The following functions are available during a
call:
REnd call
RMake additional call
RKeyboard (show to send DTMF tones)
RSwitch Mute mic on Oor off ª.
RPrivate mode (an active call in hands-free
mode is transferredoverto thetelephone)
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements:
RThere is an active call (/page 339).
RAnother call is being made.
Switching between calls
#Select call #.
The selected call is active. The other call is
on hold.
Activating or ending a call on hold
#Select Continue call or End call.
Multimedia system 339
Conducting a conference call
#Select Create conference call in thetele‐
phone menu.
The new participant is included in the confer‐
ence call.
Ending an active call
#Select =.
%On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Accepting/rejecting a waiting call
Requirements:
RThere is an active call (/page 339).
If youreceive a call while already in a call, a
message is displayed. An acoustic signal also
sounds.
#Select Accept.
The incoming call is active.
If only one mobile phone is connected with
the multimedia system, the previous call will
be put on hold.
If during a call you accept a call with the
other mobile phone when in two phone mode
then theexisting call is ended.
#Select Reject.
%This function and behaviour depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu
The contacts menu contains all contacts from
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or
memory card. You can store up to 6,000 con‐
tacts.
Depending on the data source, you have thefol‐
lowing number of contacts:
RPermanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
RContacts loaded from the mobile phone:
3,000 entries
From the contacts menu, you can perform the
following actions:
RTelephone operation:
-Calling a contact (/page 342)
-Calling a new number (/page 339)
RNavigation (/page 313)
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system (/page 335) and automatic calling up
(/page 340) is activated, the mobile phone's
contacts are displayed in the address book.
Downloading mobile phone contacts
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ZOptions 5Contacts
Automatically
#Activate Synchronise contacts automatically
O.
Manually
#Deactivate ªSynchronise contacts auto-
matically.
#Select Synchronise contacts.
340 Multimedia system
Calling up contacts
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
Depending on thecharacter set, thefollowing
options can be used to search for contacts:
Rsearching by initials
Rsearching by name
Rsearching by phone number
#Entercharacters into the search field.
A selection of possible contacts appears.
Entering more characters into the search
field narrows down the number of possible
selections.
#Select the contact.
A contact can contain thefollowing details:
Rphone numbers
Rnavigation addresses
Rgeo-coordinates
RInternet address
Editing theformat of a contact's name
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ZOptions 5Contacts
5Name format
The following options are available:
RSurname, first name
RSurname First name
RFirst name Surname
#Select an option.
Overview of importing contacts
Contacts from various sources
Source Requirements:
òMemory cardThe SD memory card
is inserted.
òUSB device The USB device is
inserted in the USB
port.
Source Requirements:
ñBluetooth®con‐
nection
If the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth®
is supported, vCards
can be received on
mobile phones or net‐
books, forexample.
Bluetooth®is activa‐
ted in the multimedia
system and on the
respective device
(see the manufactur‐
er's operating instruc‐
tions).
óMobile phone The mobile phone is
connected to the mul‐
timedia system.
Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ZOptions 5Contacts
#Select Import.
#Select an option.
Multimedia system 341
Saving a mobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
#Select the mobile phone contact ó.
#Select p.
#Select Save in vehicle.
The contact saved in the multimedia system
is identified by thefsymbol.
Calling a contact
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
#Entercharacters into the search field.
#Select the contact.
#Select thetelephone number.
The number is dialled.
Selecting further options in the contacts
menu
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
#Select a contact.
#Select p.
Depending on thestored data, thefollowing
options are available:
RCall
RShow website (if an Internet address has
been stored)
RNavigate (if an address has been stored)
RSave as global favourite
RSend DTMF tones (for a number with DTMF
tones)
#Select an option.
Deleting a contact
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
You can delete contacts stored in thevehicle.
#Search forthe contact.
#Select the contact.
#Select p.
#Select Delete contact.
#Select Yes.
Call list
Call list overview
Depending on whether your mobile phone sup‐
ports the PBAP Bluetooth®profile or not, this
can have different effects on the presentation
and functions of the call list.
If the PBAP Bluetooth®profile is supported, the
effects are as follows:
RThe call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐
played in the multimedia system.
RWhen connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection forthe PBAP
Bluetooth®profile.
If the PBAP Bluetooth®profile is not supported,
the effects are as follows:
RThe multimedia system generates its own call
lists.
RThe call list is not synchronised with the call
lists in the mobile phone.
342 Multimedia system
Making a call from the call list
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5øCall list
#Select a number.
The call is made.
Text messages
Overview of text message functions
If the connected mobile phone supports the
MAP Bluetooth®profile, thetext message func‐
tions can be used on the multimedia system.
You can obtain further information about set‐
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®-
capable mobile phones from a Mercedes-Benz
service centre or at: http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect
Some mobile phones require further settings
after being connected to the multimedia system
(see manufacturer's operating instructions).
New messages are identified by theisym‐
bol in the media display and an audible signal.
Depending on the mobile phone, the multimedia
system only displays new incoming text mes‐
sages or the100 newest text messages.
The úsymbol is displayed when the mobile
phone's message memory is full.
Configuring the displayedtext messages
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ZOptions
5Text message 5Message display
#Select p.
A menu with thefollowing options is shown:
RAll messages
RNew and unread messages
RNew messages
ROff (The text messages are not displayed
automatically.)
#Select an option.
%The setting may not be active until the
mobile phone is reconnected.
Reading text messages
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5iText message
Reading a text message
#Select a text message.
The message text is displayed.
Using theread-aloud function
#Select a text message.
#Select Read aloud.
The text message is read aloud.
Calling a text message sender
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5iText message
#Open thetext message.
#Select p.
#Select Call sender.
Deleting text messages
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5iText message
#Select p.
Multimedia system 343
#To delete a text message: select Delete.
Mercedes-Benz link
Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link
Using Mercedes-Benz Link, various functions
and selected mobile phone apps can be transfer‐
redto the media display.
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen‐
tary equipment is required forthis. You can
obtain this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
%The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses
the Android operating system.
%The service provider is responsible forthese
apps and the services and content connec‐
tedto it.
Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the
multimedia system
#Connect the Mercedes-Benz Link control box
with theçUSB port of the multimedia
connection unit using a suitable connecting
cable.
%A suitable connecting cable is available sep‐
arately at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Using Mercedes-Benz Link
Requirements:
RThe Mercedes-Benz Link control box is con‐
nected with the multimedia system using the
çUSB port.
Multimedia system:
4Connect
#Select Mercedes-Benz Link.
#Select MB Link.
The mobile phone functions and apps are
available and shown on the media display.
You can find more information in the Mercedes-
Benz Link control box operating instructions.
Ending Mercedes-Benz Link
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Mercedes-Benz Link
#Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#Disconnect the connecting cable between
the Mercedes-Benz Link control box and the
multimedia system.
%Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when thevehicle
is stationary.
Apple CarPlay™
Overview of Apple CarPlay™
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
344 Multimedia system
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
iPhone®functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay™. They are oper‐
ated using the central control element or the
Siri®voice-operated control system. You can
activate thevoice-operated control system by
pressing and holding theóbutton on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Apple CarPlay™ to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
The availability of Apple CarPlay™ may vary
according to the country.
The service provider is responsible forthis appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Information on Apple CarPlay™
While using Apple CarPlay™ various functions of
the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the
media sources Bluetooth®audio and iPod®, are
unavailable.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting an iPhone®via Apple CarPlay™
Requirements:
RApple®operating system version iOS 8.3 or
above is installed on the iPhone®.
RAn Internet connection is required forthe full
range of functions for Apple CarPlay™.
RThe iPhone®is connected to the multimedia
system via the USB port çusing a suita‐
ble cable (/page 366).
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Apple CarPlay
Setting automatic or manual start
A message appears when connectedforthefirst
time.
#Automatic start: select Automatically.
Start automatically is activated O.
Apple CarPlay™ will now start immediately
afterthe iPhone®is connected to the multi‐
media system using a USB cable.
#Manual start: select Manually.
#Select the iPhone®in the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
#Select Accept & Start.
or
#Select Decline & End.
Exiting Apple CarPlay™
#Press theòbutton on the multifunction
steering wheel, forexample.
%If Apple CarPlay™ was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the appli‐
cation starts in the background when recon‐
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay™ in
the main menu.
Multimedia system 345
Calling up Apple CarPlay™ sound settings
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Apple CarPlay 5Sound
#Select thetone menu (/page 376).
Ending Apple CarPlay™
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Apple CarPlay
#Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when thevehicle is
stationary.
Android Auto
Android Auto overview
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Mobile phone functions can be used with
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated
using the central control element or thevoice
control. You can activate thevoice-operated con‐
trol system by pressing and holding theó
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system.
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto
Apps may vary according to the country.
The service provider is responsible forthis appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Information on Android Auto
While using Android Auto,various functions of
the multimedia system, forexample the media
source Bluetooth®audio, are not available.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
346 Multimedia system
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
Requirements:
RThe first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when
thevehicle is stationary for safetyreasons.
RThe mobile phone supports Android Auto
from Android 5.0.
RThe Android Auto app is installed on the
mobile phone.
RIn order to use thetelephone functions, the
mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐
timedia system via Bluetooth®
(/page 335).
If there was no prior Internet connection, this
is established with the use of the mobile
phone with Android Auto.
RThe mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system via the USB port çusing a
suitable cable (/page 366).
RAn Internet connection is required forthe full
range of functions for Android Auto.
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Android Auto
#Select the mobile phone from the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
#Select Accept & Start.
or
#Select Decline & End.
Activating automatic start
#Select Start automatically O.
Starting manually
#Select the mobile phone from the device list.
Exiting Android Auto
#Press theòbutton on the multifunction
steering wheel, forexample.
%If Android Auto was not displayed in thefore‐
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background when reconnected.
You can call up Android Auto in the main
menu.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Android Auto 5Sound
#Select thetone menu (/page 376).
Ending Android Auto
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5Android Auto
#Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when thevehicle is
stationary.
Multimedia system 347
Transferredvehicle data with Android Auto
and Apple CarPlay™
Overview of transferredvehicle data
When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay™,
certain vehicle data is transferredto the mobile
phone. This enables youto getthe best out of
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is
not directly accessible.
The following system information is transmitted:
RSoftware release of the multimedia system
RSystem ID (anonymised)
The transfer of this data is used to optimise
communication between thevehicle and the
mobile phone.
To do this, and to assign severalvehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly
generated.
This has no connection to thevehicle identifica‐
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
media system is reset (/page 306).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
RTransmission position engaged
RDistinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
RDay/night mode of the instrument cluster
The transfer of this data is used to alter how
content is displayed to correspond to the driving
situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
RCoordinates
RSpeed
RCompass direction
RAcceleration direction
This data is only transferred while the navigation
system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it
can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
Mercedes me connect
Notes on Mercedes me connect
Mercedes me connect provides thefollowing
services:
RAccident and breakdown management (me
button)
RConcierge Service (when the service is acti‐
vated), appointment requests or similar (me
button)
RMercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐
matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are availa‐
ble foryou around the clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found
on thevehicle's overhead control panel .
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre using the multimedia system .
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always
call the national emergency services first using
thestandard national emergency service phone
numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/page 352).
Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me
connect and other services. These can be
obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
348 Multimedia system
Further information on Mercedes me connect,
the provided service scope and operation:
http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/
connectme/en_GB/index.html
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
using the multimedia system
Requirements:
RYou have access to a GSM network.
RThe contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in therespective region.
RThe ignition is switched on so that vehicle
data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5ªContacts
#Call Mercedes me connect.
The call is made.
After confirmation, the multimedia system
sends therequired vehicle data. The data
transfer is shown in the media display.
Then, you can select a service and be con‐
nected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre.
Further information on Mercedes me connect,
the provided service scope and operation is
available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/
cars/connectme/de_DE/index.html
Making a call via the overhead control panel
Requirements:
RYou have access to a GSM network.
RThe contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in therespective region.
RThe ignition is switched on so that vehicle
data can be transferred automatically.
1me button for service, concierge or informa‐
tion calls
2SOS button cover
3SOS button
#To make a Mercedes me call: press button
1.
#To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover2briefly to open.
Multimedia system 349
#Press and hold SOS button 3for at least
one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency
call can still be triggered. This has priority over
all other active calls.
More information on Mercedes me connect and
further services can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Information about the Mercedes me call
using the me button
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
has been initiated via the me button in theover‐
head control panel or the multimedia system.
Using thevoice dialogue system you access the
desired service:
RConcierge service (if the service is activated)
RAccident and breakdown management
(/page 350)
RMercedes-Benz Customer Centre forgeneral
information about thevehicle
You can find information on thefollowing topics:
RActivation of Mercedes me connect
ROperating thevehicle
RNearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
ROther products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/page 351).
Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐
dent and breakdown management
The accident and breakdown management can
include thefollowing functions:
RSupplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system (/page 352)
If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for‐
wardsthe call to Mercedes me connect
breakdown and accident management. For‐
warding the call is however not possible in all
countries.
RBreakdown assistance by a mechanic on
location and/or thetowing away of thevehi‐
cle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service
centre
You may be chargedforthese services.
More information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Arranging a service appointment via
Mercedes me connect
If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre. You will then receive individual recom‐
mendations regarding the maintenance of your
vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to
the maintenance management service, the multi‐
media system reminds you after a certain
amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
appears asking if youwould like to make an
appointment.
#To arrange a service appointment: select
Call.
Afteryour agreement thevehicle data is sent
and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
employee deals with your appointment. The
350 Multimedia system
information is then sent to your desired
service outlet.
This will contact youto confirm the appoint‐
ment and if necessary consult about the
details.
%If you select Call later afterthe service mes‐
sage appears, the message is hidden and
reappears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer for Mercedes
me connect
Requirements:
RA service call is active using the multimedia
system or theoverhead control panel .
If the breakdown and Mercedes me connect
Concierge services are not activated on
Mercedes me, theDo you want to transmit vehi-
cle data and the vehicle's position to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to
improve the processing of your request? mes‐
sage appears.
#Select Yes.
The relevant vehicle data is sent automati‐
cally.
More information on Mercedes me: http://
www.mercedes.me
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call
The data transferred when calling depends on
the services activated and the type of call made:
RGeneral information about thevehicle
RConcierge Service
RAccident and breakdown assistance
RService appointment arrangement
Which data is transferredforthe services, can
be taken from the currently valid terms of use.
These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
The following data is transmitted if no service is
activated and the data protection prompt has
been confirmed:
RVehicle identification number
RMercedes me customer identification num‐
ber
RReason forthe initiation of the call
RLanguage set in the multimedia system
RConfirmation of the data protection prompt
During the service appointment arrangement via
the service reminder, the current mileage and
maintenance data can also be transferred,
assuming therequired data transfer technology
is supportedby the mobile service operator and
thequality of the mobile connection is sufficient.
In addition, the current location of thevehicle
can be demanded by the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐
tomer Centre from thevehicle, if accident and
breakdown management is called via thevoice
control system and no service has been activa‐
ted, but the data protection query has been con‐
firmed.
%At the time of going to press, this function is
technically not yetavailable but can be sup‐
ported in the future.
The following data is transmitted if the data pro‐
tection prompt has been rejected:
RReason forthe initiation of the call
RRejection of the data protection prompt
Multimedia system 351
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only
functions in areas where mobile phone coverage
is available from the wireless service providers.
Insufficient network coverage from the wireless
service providers may result in an emergency
call not being transmitted.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
available for at least tenyears starting from the
manufacturing date.
The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐
matic emergency call can be made.
%The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
is activated at thefactory.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can
help to decisively reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services
at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
accident site in places that are difficult to
access.
The emergency call can be made automatically
(/page 352) or manually (/page 353). Only
make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call
in theevent of a breakdown or a similar situa‐
tion.
Displays in the media display:
SOS READY: emergency call available
SOS NOT READY:the ignition is not on or there
is a malfunction with the emergency call system.
During an active emergency call, Gappears
in the display.
You can find more information on theregional
availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect_ecall.
%If there is a malfunction in the emergency
call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker,
microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corre‐
sponding message appears in the multifunc‐
tion display of the instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements:
RThe ignition is switched on.
RThe starter battery is sufficiently charged.
If restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt
tensioners have been activated after an acci‐
dent, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
may automatically initiate an emergency call.
The emergency call has been made:
RAvoice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call centre.
RA message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
can transmit thevehicle position data to one
of the public emergency services call cen‐
tres.
RIn certain situations data is also transmitted
in thevoice channel to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre.
352 Multimedia system
This allows measuresforrescue, recovery or
towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to
be initiated quickly.
The SOS button in theoverhead control panel
flashes until the emergency call is finished.
It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐
matic emergency call.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call centre, the emergency call is automat‐
ically sent to the public emergency services call
centre.
If no connection can be made to the public
emergency services, a corresponding message
appears in the display.
#Dial the emergency call number 112 on your
mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
RRemain in thevehicle if theroad and traffic
conditions permit youto do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call centre operator.
RBased on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
and/or the police to the accident site.
RIf no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
lance is sent to thevehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
#Press and hold the SOS button in theover‐
head control panel for at least one second.
The emergency call has been made:
RAvoice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call centre.
RA message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
can transmit thevehicle position data to one
of the public emergency services call cen‐
tres.
RRemain in thevehicle if theroad and traffic
conditions permit youto do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call centre service provider.
ROn the basis of the call, the service provider
decides whether it is necessary to call res‐
cue teams and/or the police to the accident
site.
RIn certain situations data is also transmitted
in thevoice channel to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre.
This allows measuresforrescue, recovery or
towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to
be initiated quickly.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call centre, the emergency call is automat‐
ically sent to the public emergency services call
centre.
If no connection can be made to the public
emergency services, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#Dial the emergency call number 112 on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentional emergency call
#Select ~on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Multimedia system 353
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
In theevent of an automatic or manual emer‐
gency call thefollowing data is transmitted, for
example:
RVehicle's GPS position data
RGPS position data on theroute (a few hun‐
dred metres before the incident)
RDirection of travel
RVehicle identification number
RVehicle drive type
RNumber of people determined to be in the
vehicle
RWhether Mercedes me connect is available
or not
RWhether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically
RTime of the accident
RLanguage setting on the multimedia system
For accident clarification purposes, thefollowing
measures can be taken up to an hour afterthe
emergency call has been initiated:
RThe current vehicle position can be called up.
RAvoice connection to thevehicle occupants
can be established.
%ForRussia: various functions, e.g. receiving
traffic information, cannot be used for up to
two hours after sending an emergency call.
Function of the emergency call system self-
diagnosis (Russia)
Your car verifies the operability of the emer‐
gency call system each time the ignition is ON.
In case of system failure, you will be informed
with text message on the instrument cluster and
with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the media
display.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after
switching ignition ON thered indicator SOS
NOT READY in the upper right corner of the
media display is switched OFF, this means the
emergency call system passed diagnostics suc‐
cessfully. If necessary, switch ON the media dis‐
play, if it was switched OFF before.
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
(Russia)
Requirements:
RThe starter battery is sufficiently charged.
RThe ignition is switched on.
RThe vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
#To start thetest mode: press and hold the
~button on the multifunction steering
wheel for at least five seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically
ends afterthe language test has been per‐
formed.
#To end thetest mode manually: switch off
the ignition.
The test mode is ended.
354 Multimedia system
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection
Information on connecting to the Internet
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while thevehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when thevehicle is
stationary.
#As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended forthis purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
thevehicle.
Depending on thevehicle's equipment, you can
establish an Internet connection in thefollowing
ways:
RVehicles with a communication module:
Internet use including Mercedes me connect
services and data roaming (/page 355).
RVehicles without a communication mod‐
ule:
-via Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile
phone (/page 356)
-via Bluetooth®with a data-enabled
mobile phone (/page 356)
The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐
ted degree whilst driving.
Function of the communication module
On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐
ule, the Internet connection is established via an
integrated SIM card.
To use Internet access via the communication
module thefollowing conditions must be met:
RThe vehicle is equipped with a permanently
installed communication module.
Multimedia system 355
RMercedes me connect is active and ready for
operation.
RMercedes me connect is activated for Inter‐
net access.
RCountry dependent: data volume via
Mercedes me connect is available.
If the data volume limit is reached, theavailabil‐
ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited.
The data volume must be purchased via
Mercedes me connect.
%Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to
find out whether it is possible to purchase
data volume in your country.
Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
Requirements:
RtheWi-Fi function is activated on the multi‐
media system (/page 300).
RtheWi-Fi function is activated on theexternal
device (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
RInternet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or
does not function if:
Rthe mobile phone is switched off
Rmobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
phone
RtheWi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi‐
media system
RtheWi-Fi function is deactivated on theexter‐
nal device
RInternet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on
theexternal device
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
5Internet settings
5Search for Wi-Fi networks
#Select the network.
#Log in to theWi-Fi network (/page 300).
Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐
tooth®
Requirements:
RA mobile phone is connectedto the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth®(/page 335).
To connect via Bluetooth®,the mobile phone
supports one of thefollowing Bluetooth®pro‐
files:
RDUN (Dial-UpNetworking)
RPAN (Personal AreaNetwork)
The Internet connection via Bluetooth®is restric‐
ted or does not function if:
Rthe mobile phone is switched off
Rthe mobile phone network coverage is insuf‐
ficient
Rmobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
phone
Rthe Bluetooth®function on the multimedia
system is switched off and the mobile phone
is to be connected via Bluetooth®
356 Multimedia system
Rthe Bluetooth®function is switched off on
the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to
be connected via Bluetooth®
Rneither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
telephone and an Internet connection
Rthe mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access via Bluetooth®
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system forthefirst time via Bluetooth®,you will
be assistedthrough the process of setting up an
Internet connection.
The Internet connection can also be configured
manually.
Further information can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
5Internet settings
Bluetooth®connection via PAN
#Select the mobile phone.
The Internet connection is established.
Switching the Bluetooth®profile
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone supports the DUN and
PAN Bluetooth®profiles.
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
5Internet settings
#To switch from DUN to PAN: select the
mobile phone.
#Select ¥.
#Select Change configuration.
#Activate OAutomatic configuration.
The Internet connection is automatically con‐
figured using thePAN Bluetooth®profile.
#To switch from PANto DUN: select the
mobile phone.
#Select ¥.
#Select Change configuration.
#Deactivate ªAutomatic configuration.
#Select Configure settings using COMAND.
#Configuring the Internet connection using
preset or manual access data (/page 356).
Editing access data
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone supports the Bluetooth®
DUN profile.
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
5Internet settings
#Highlight the mobile phone.
#Select ¥.
#Select Change configuration.
#For mobile phones with PAN and DUN:
select Configure settings using COMAND.
Multimedia system 357
#Configure the Internet connection using pre‐
set or manual access data (/page 356).
Cancelling Internet access permission for a
mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
5Internet settings
#Highlight the mobile phone.
#Select ¥.
#Select Delete configuration.
#Select Yes.
Displaying mobile phone details
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
5Internet settings
#Highlight the mobile phone.
#Select ¥.
#Select Details.
Establishing an Internet connection
Multimedia system:
4Connect
#Forexample, select zBrowser.
%The multimedia system usually establishes
the Internet connection automatically. If the
multimedia system is not connected to the
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.
%The availability of web browsers is country-
dependent.
Connection status
Connection status overview
1Display of existing connection and reception
field strength of the connected Bluetooth®
device or of the communication module
Displaying the connection status
Multimedia system:
4System 5öConnectivity
#Select Internet status.
358 Multimedia system
%When connected via Wi-Fi or a Bluetooth®
device, the approximate data volume trans‐
mitted is displayed. The exact values can be
requested from your mobile phone network
provider.
%In the case of a connection via the communi‐
cation module thefollowing status informa‐
tion is shown:
RType of network
RStatus online/offline
Web browser
Calling up a web page
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in thevehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with thevehicle stationary.
You must observethe legal requirements forthe
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5zBrowser
5zEnter URL
#Enter a web address.
%The function is country-dependent.
#To finish the entry and call up theweb‐
site: select ¬.
Showing/hiding theweb browser menu
If you call up a website by selecting a link, for
example, theweb browser menu is hidden.
#To show/hide: press the%button.
%Websites are not shown while thevehicle is
in motion.
Web browser overview
1URL entry
2Bookmarks
3Web page, back
4Web page, forwards
Multimedia system 359
5Options
6Closes the browser
Calling up web browser options
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5zBrowser
5ZOptions
The following functions are available:
RRefresh page/Cancel
RZoom
RBrowser settings
RDelete browser data
#Select an option.
#Make the desired changes to the settings.
Calling up theweb browser settings
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5zBrowser
5ZOptions 5Browser settings
The following functions are available:
RBlock popups
REnable Javascript
REnable cookies
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Deleting browser data
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5zBrowser
5ZOptions 5Delete browser data
The following options are available:
RAll
RCache
RCookies
REntered URLs
RForm data
#Select an option.
#Select Yes.
Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5zBrowser
5ßBookmarks
Selecting a bookmark
#Select an entry.
Creating a bookmark
#Select Add new bookmark.
#Enter a URL and a name.
#Select ¡.
Editing a bookmark
#Highlight a bookmark.
#Select p.
#Select Edit.
#Enter a URL and a name.
#Select ¡.
Deleting a bookmark
#Highlight a bookmark.
#Select p.
360 Multimedia system
#Select Delete.
#Select Yes.
Closing the browser
Multimedia system:
4Connect 5zBrowser
#Select åClose browser.
Internet radio
Calling up Internet radio
Requirements:
RThere is an account on http://
www.mercedes.me.
RThe Internet radio service is activated.
RThe data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
RAfast Internet connection for data transmis‐
sion free of interference.
The services are country-dependent.
For more information, consult a Mercedes-
Benz service centre.
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ÞRadio source
#Select TuneIn radio.
The Internet radio display appears. The last
station set starts playing.
%The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.
Internet radio overview
1Internet radio provider
2Selected category
3Display (if connectedto private user
account)
4Data transfer rate
5Current station is stored as a favourite
6Additional information on the current station
Multimedia system 361
Selecting and connecting Internet radio sta‐
tions
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ÞRadio source
5TuneIn radio 5èSearch
#Select a category.
#Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
or
#Select Enter address or POI.
#Enter a station name using the entry field.
%Arelatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using Internet radio.
Saving/deleting an Internet radio station as
afavourite
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ÞRadio source
5TuneIn radio
#Select a station.
#Press and hold the central control element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ßsymbol appears by thestation
name.
#Select ßFavourites.
The list of savedfavourite stations appears.
or
#Create an account forthe online provider
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
media system.
Your favourites are importedto the multime‐
dia system.
Deleting favourites
#Select ßFavourites.
#Select a station.
#Press and hold the central control element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ßsymbol by thestation name disap‐
pears.
Setting Internet radio options
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ÞRadio source
5TuneIn radio 5ZOptions
The following options are available:
RSelect stream: select thestream quality.
RLogin to TuneIn account: log in to your
TuneIn user account.
RLog out of account: log out of your TuneIn
user account.
#Select an option.
Media
Audio mode
Information on the audio mode
&WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐
dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the
362 Multimedia system
traffic conditions. This could also cause you
to lose control of thevehicle.
#Only handle a data storage medium
when thevehicle is stationary.
Permissible file systems:
RFAT32
RexFAT
RNTFS
Permissible data storage medium:
RSD card
RUSB storage device
RiPod®/iPhone®
RMTP devices
RBluetooth®audio equipment
%Observethefollowing notes:
RThe multimedia system supports a total
of up to 50,000 files.
RData storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐
ported (32‑bit address space).
Supportedformats:
RMP3
RWMA
RAAC
RWAV
RFLAC
RALAC
%Observe thefollowing notes:
RDue to the large variety of available
music files regarding encoders, sampling
rates and data rates, playback cannot
always be guaranteed.
RDue to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all USB devices.
RCopy-protected music files or DRM
encryptedfiles cannot be played back.
RMP3 players must support Media Trans‐
fer Protocol (MTP).
Notes on copyright
Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself
for playback are generally subject to copyright
protection. In many countries, reproductions,
evenfor private use, are not permitted without
the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make
sure that you know about the applicable copy‐
right regulations and that you comply with these.
Switching on media mode
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àMedia sources
#Select a media source.
Playable music files are played back.
Inserting/removing an SD card
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐
lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐
ing.
#Keep SD cards out of thereach of chil‐
dren.
Multimedia system 363
#Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed.
*NOTE Damage due to high temperatures
High temperatures may damage the SD card.
#Remove the SD card after use and take
it out of thevehicle.
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àMedia sources
5Mem. card
Inserting
The multimedia connection unit is located in the
stowage compartment under the armrest.
#Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con‐
tacts must face downwards.
Playable music files are played back.
Removing
#Press the SD card.
#Remove the SD card.
364 Multimedia system
Overview of the audio mode
1Active data storage medium
2Album cover
3Track, artist, album
4Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5Search
6Playback control
7Media sources
8Sound
9Options
Multimedia system 365
Connecting USB devices
*NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
#Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of thevehicle.
The multimedia connection unit is found in the
stowage compartment under the armrest and
has two USB ports.
Depending on thevehicle's equipment, addi‐
tional USB ports can be found in thestowage
compartment of the centre console and in the
rear passenger compartment.
#Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable music files are played back only if
the corresponding media display is activated.
%Depending on thevehicle equipment there is
an additional USB port in therear passenger
compartment. Portsthat are labelled with a
battery symbol can only be used to charge
USB devices.
Selecting a track in the media playback
Multimedia system:
4Media
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
#To skip backwards or forwards to a
track: navigate up or down.
Selecting a track using the current track list
#Select è.
#Select Current track list.
#Select a track.
Selecting playback options
Multimedia system:
4Media 5ZOptions
Playback mode
#Select Random playback of the current track
list.
The current track list is played in random
order.
#Select Random playback of the current
medium.
All tracks on the active data storage medium
are played in random order.
#Select Normal track sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it
appears on the data storage medium.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
4Media 5YPlayback control
A bar with playback controls is shown.
#To pause playback: select and confirm
Ywith the central control element.
The Ësymbol is displayed.
#To resume playback: select and confirm
Yagain with the central control element.
The Ìsymbol is displayed.
To fast forward/rewind
#Move Ëon the timeline.
To hide the playback controls
#Press the%button.
366 Multimedia system
Media search
Starting the media search
Multimedia system:
4Media 5ªSearch
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, thefollowing categories are listed:
RCurrent track list
RKeyword search
RPlaylists
RArtists
RAlbums
RTracks
RFolders
RMusic genres
RYear
RComposers
RPodcasts (Apple®devices)
RAudiobooks (Apple®devices)
#Select a category.
%The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read in and
analysed.
Media Interface
Information about the Media Interface
Media Interface is a universal interface forthe
connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐
timedia system has two USB ports. The USB
ports are located in thestowage compartment
under the armrest.
Supported devices
The Media Interface allows youto connect the
following data storage media:
RiPod®
RiPhone®
RMP3 player
RUSB devices
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
our website at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in
the "Media Interface" section.
Switching to Media Interface
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àMedia sources
#Connect a data storage medium to the USB
port (/page 366).
#Select a media device.
Playable music files are played back.
Multimedia system 367
Overview of Media Interface
1Active data storage medium
2Album cover
3Artist, track and album
4Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5Search
6Playback control
7Media sources
8Sound
9Options
368 Multimedia system
Bluetooth®audio
Information about Bluetooth®audio
Before using your Bluetooth®audio equipment
with the multimedia system forthefirst time,
you will need to authorise it (/page 371).
Multimedia system 369
Bluetooth®audio overview
1Active data storage medium
2Album cover
3Track, artist, album
4Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5Search
6Playback control
7Media sources
8Sound
9Options
370 Multimedia system
Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth®
audio device
Requirements:
RBluetooth®is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment (/page 299).
RThe audio equipment supports the Blue‐
tooth®audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
RThe audio equipment is "visible" forother
devices.
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àMedia sources
5áBluetooth audio
Authorising a new Bluetooth®audio device
#Select ¥.
#Select Add new Bluetooth audio device.
#Select Start search on the system.
Detected audio equipment is displayed in the
device list.
#Select a Bluetooth®audio device.
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
phone.
#If the codes are identical, confirm on the
audio equipment.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.
Selecting previously authorised Bluetooth®
audio equipment
#Select ¥.
#Select a Bluetooth®audio device.
Establishing a connection from the Blue‐
tooth®audio equipment
The Bluetooth®device name of the multimedia
system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX.
#Select Search from device.
#Start the authorisation on the audio equip‐
ment (see manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐
tem and on the audio device.
#Confirm on both devices if the codes are
identical.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.
With some audio equipment, playback must be
initially started on the device itself so that the
multimedia system can play the audio files.
%Device-specific information on authorising
and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Activating Bluetooth®audio
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àMedia sources
#Select áBluetooth audio.
The multimedia system activates the connec‐
ted Bluetooth®audio equipment.
Multimedia system 371
Selecting the media player on the Bluetooth®
audio device
Multimedia system:
4Media 5ª
#Select theBluetooth audio players category.
If multiple media players are present on the
Bluetooth®audio equipment a list appears.
#Select a media player.
Playback starts.
%The function is not supported by every
mobile phone.
Searching for a music track on the Blue‐
tooth®audio device
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àMedia sources
5áBluetooth audio
#Select ª.
#Select a category.
A track list appears.
#Select a track.
%The function is only available when the
mobile phone and the media player selected
on the mobile phone support this function.
Switching Bluetooth®audio equipment via
NFC
Requirements:
RObserve the notes on using NFC
(/page 338).
RThe Bluetooth®audio overview is displayed
(/page 370).
#Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ised on the multimedia system as Bluetooth®
audio equipment, it is now connected.
If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul‐
timedia system as Bluetooth®audio equip‐
ment forthefirst time, it is connected after
confirming the instructions forthe mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Disconnecting Bluetooth®audio equipment
Multimedia system:
4Telephone 5áMedia sources
#Select theisymbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
The disconnection of the mobile phone takes
place without a confirmation prompt. The
mobile phone remains authorised in the sys‐
tem.
Radio
Switching on the radio
Multimedia system:
4Radio
#Alternatively: press the$button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last frequency
band selected.
372 Multimedia system
Radio overview
1Active frequency band
2Station name or set frequency
3Artist, title, album and radio text
4Station list
5Presets
6Radio source
7Sound
8Tag this song
9Options
Multimedia system 373
Setting the frequency band
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ÞRadio source
#Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system:
4Radio
#Navigate up or down.
Calling up theradio station list
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5è
#Select a station.
Searching forradio stations using station
names or direct frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5è5è
#Enter a station name or frequency.
#Select a.
The searchresults are displayed.
#Select a station.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ßPresets
#Select Store current station in the presets.
Editing radio station presets
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ßPresets
Moving stations:
#Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
#Select Move highlighted station.
#Select a memory preset.
Deleting stations:
#Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
#Select Delete highlighted station.
#Select Yes.
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ÞRadio source
5FM/DAB radio stations
374 Multimedia system
Slide show 1displays additional information
provided by thestation as an image. This can
include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro‐
grammes, news or service information, forexam‐
ple. The additional information is shown in full-
screen mode by selecting 2.
#To activate full-screen mode: select #
Full screen.
#To deactivate full-screen mode: select
%.
Activating or deactivating the frequency fix
function
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ZOptions 5Frequency fix
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
If the function is activated, the set frequency
is kept even if thereception is poor.
Tagging music tracks
Multimedia system:
4Radio
If radio stations provide therelevant information,
this function allows youto transfer information
on the music track currently playing to an
Apple®device. You can then purchase the audio
file from theiTunes Store®.
#Select ♫→ Tag this song.
The track information is saved.
Switching traffic announcements on/off
Multimedia system:
4System 5õAudio
5Navigation and traffic announcements
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
or
#Press and hold the8button on the multi‐
function steering wheel.
Setting the traffic information service vol‐
ume increase
Multimedia system:
4System 5õAudio
5Navigation and traffic announcements
#Select Traffic announcements volume
increase.
#Select No increase or a value.
Activating/deactivating radio text
Multimedia system:
4Radio 5ZOptions
5Display radio text information
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Sound
Tone settings
Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 100 W
and is equipped with seven speakers. It is availa‐
Multimedia system 375
ble for all functions in theradio and media
modes.
Calling up the sound menu
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
The following functions are available:
REqualiser
RBalance and Fader
RAutomatic volume adjustment
ROther sound settings
#Select a sound menu.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound 5Equaliser
#Select Treble,Mid or Bass.
#Change the settings.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume
adjustment
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
5Automatic volume adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
5Balance and Fader
#Adjust the balance and fader.
#To exit the menu: press the%button.
Burmester®surround sound system
Information about the Burmester®surround
sound system
The Burmester®surround sound system has a
total output of 590 W and is equipped with 13
speakers. It is available for all functions in the
radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the
Burmester®surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
The following functions are available:
REqualiser
RBalance and Fader
RAutomatic volume adjustment
RSurround sound
RSound focus
ROther sound settings
#Select a function.
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings
on the Burmester®surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound 5Equaliser
#Select Treble,Mid or Bass.
#Set the desired values.
376 Multimedia system
Activating/deactivating volume adjustment
in the Burmester®surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
5Automatic volume adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Adjusting the balance/fader in the
Burmester®surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
5Balance and Fader
#Adjust the balance and fader.
#To exit the menu: press the%button.
Switching surround sound on/off in the
Burmester®surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound
5Surround sound
#Activate Oor deactivate ªthe function.
Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4Media 5àSound 5Sound focus
#Adjust the sound focus.
Multimedia system 377
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
instrument display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back
button on the left-hand side of thesteering
wheel.
Depending on how thevehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may
shortenthe service interval, e.g. in thefollowing
cases:
Rmainly short-distance driving
Rwhen the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Rin theevent of frequent cold start phases
Rvehicles with a diesel particulate filter: in
theevent of frequently interrupted regenera‐
tion of the diesel particulate filter
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such
operating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the serv‐
icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer:
4Service 5ASSYST PLUS
The next service due date is displayed.
#To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of thesteering wheel.
Make sure to observe thefollowing further rela‐
ted subject:
ROperating the on-board computer
(/page 277).
Information on regular maintenance work
*NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to thevehicle.
#Always observe the prescribed service
intervals.
#Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of thevehicle. Maintenance work
will need to be performed more often if thevehi‐
cle is operated under arduous conditions or
increased loads.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
an aid. The driver of thevehicle bears responsi‐
bility as regardsto whether maintenance work
needs to be performed more oftenthan speci‐
378 Maintenance and care
fied based on the actual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
ate stops
Rmainly short-distance driving
Rfrequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
Rwhen the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Roperation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The
tyres must be checked more frequently if the
vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐
ther information can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when
the battery is connected.
#Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting
the battery (/page 378).
Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian
protection)
In certain accident situations, therisk of injury
to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation
of the active bonnet. The rear area of the bonnet
is raised by approximately 85 mm.
Forthe drive to theworkshop, reset the trig‐
gered active bonnet yourself. Afterthe active
bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection
may be limited.
Aqualified specialist workshop must re-instate
the full functionality of the active bonnet.
The active bonnet is not available in all coun‐
tries.
Resetting the active bonnet
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
thefollowing.
Maintenance and care 379
#With your hand flat, push down active bonnet
1in the area around the hinges on both
sides (arrows).
In doing so, the actuator is depressurised
and you may hear a hissing sound.
The engine bonnet must engage in position.
#If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at
therear in the area of the hinges, repeat the
step until it engages correctly.
Opening/closing the bonnet
&WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐
ing with the engine bonnet unlocked
An unlocked engine bonnet may open up
when thevehicle is in motion and block your
view.
#Never unlock the engine bonnet when
driving.
#Before every trip, ensure that the
engine bonnet is locked.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the engine
bonnet
When opening or closing the engine bonnet,
it may suddenly drop into the end position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine bonnet's range of movement.
#Only open or close the engine bonnet
when there are no persons in the
engine bonnet's range of movement.
&WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the bonnet
If you open the engine bonnet when the
engine has overheated or during a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
contact with hot gases or other escaping
operating fluids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In theevent of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call thefire service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment may continue to move or suddenly
move again even afterthe ignition has been
switched off, e.g. the cooler fan.
Make sure of thefollowing before performing
tasks in the engine compartment:
#Switch the ignition off.
#Nevertouch the danger zone surround‐
ing moving component parts, e.g. the
rotation area of thefan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
380 Maintenance and care
&WARNING Risk of injury from touching
component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If youtouch
component parts which are under voltage,
you could receive an electric shock.
#Nevertouch components of the ignition
system or the fuel injection system
when the ignition is switched on.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
thefollowing.
&WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windscreen wipers while the engine bon‐
net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the
windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can
be trapped by the wiper linkage.
#Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before opening the
engine bonnet.
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dan‐
gers.
#To open: pull the lever1to release the
bonnet.
Maintenance and care 381
#Push the handle 1of the bonnet catch
upwards and lift the bonnet by approximately
40 cm.
#To close: lowerthe bonnet and let it fall from
a height of approximately 20 cm.
#If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open
the bonnet again and close it with a little
more force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the oil
dipstick
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
thefollowing.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Requirements:
Rthe engine must have an oil dipstick. If not,
the engine oil level can be checked only with
the on-board computer (/page 383).
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
installed in the engine compartment in different
locations.
The waiting time before checking the oil level
when the engine is at normal operating tempera‐
ture is five minutes.
#Park thevehicle on a level surface.
#Pull oil dipstick 1out and wipe off.
382 Maintenance and care
#Slowly slide oil dipstick 1into the guide
tube to thestop, and take it out again after
approximately three seconds.
ROil level is correct: oil level is between 2
and 3.
ROil leveltoo low: oil level is at 3or
below.
ROil leveltoo high: oil level is above 2.
#If the oil level is too low, top up with 1 litre of
engine oil.
#If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the engine oil level using the on-
board computer
Requirements:
The engine must have an oil level sensor. If not,
the engine oil level can be checked only with the
oil dipstick (/page 382).
The engine oil level is determined during driving.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to
30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
longer with an active driving style.
In order to receive aresult as quickly as possi‐
ble:
Rwarm up the engine
Rpark thevehicle on a level surface
Rleave the engine running at idling speed
On-board computer:
4Service 5Engine oil level
You will see one of thefollowing messages on
the multifunction display:
REngine oil level Measuring now: measure‐
ment of the oil level is not yet possible.
#Repeat therequest after a maximum of
30 minutes driving.
REngine oil level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the multifunction
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the oil level is correct.
REngine oil level Add 1.0 l and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐
tion display is orange and is below "min":
#Top up with 1 l engine oil.
RReduce engine oil level and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐
tion display is orange and is above "max":
#Drain off excess engine oil that has been
added. Consult a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
RFor engine oil level turn on ignition:
#switch on the ignition to check the engine oil
level.
REngine oil level System inoperative: sensor
faulty or not inserted.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
REngine oil level System currently unavail.:
#close the bonnet.
Topping up engine oil
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
Maintenance and care 383
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
thefollowing.
&WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to thefiller opening.
#Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting thevehicle.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
cations explicitly prescribed forthe
service intervals.
#Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#Do not use additives.
#Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil
change.
*NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter.
#Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
#Turn cap 1anti-clockwise and remove it.
#Top up the engine oil.
#Replace cap 1and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
#Check the oil level again (/page 382).
384 Maintenance and care
Checking the coolant level
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
thefollowing.
&WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the bonnet
If you open the engine bonnet when the
engine has overheated or during a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
contact with hot gases or other escaping
operating fluids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In theevent of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call thefire service.
&WARNING Risk of scalding from hot
coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurised,
particularly when the engine is warm. If you
open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
#Let the engine cool down before open‐
ing the cap.
#When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safetyglasses.
#Open the cap slowly to release pres‐
sure.
#Park thevehicle on a level surface.
#Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
70 °C.
#Slowly turn cap 1anti-clockwise to relieve
overpressure.
Maintenance and care 385
#Continue turning cap 1anti-clockwise and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct:
Rif the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2
Rif the engine is warm, up to 1.5 cm over
marker bar 2
#If necessary, top up with coolant that has
been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.
RFurther information on coolant
(/page 456).
Topping up the windscreen washer system
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
thefollowing.
&WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the bonnet
If you open the engine bonnet when the
engine has overheated or during a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
contact with hot gases or other escaping
operating fluids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In theevent of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call thefire service.
&WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
theexhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to thefiller
opening.
#Remove the cap 1by thetab.
#Top up thewasher fluid.
Keeping the air-water duct free
#Keep the area between the bonnet and the
windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow
and leaves.
386 Maintenance and care
Cleaning and care
Information on washing thevehicle in a car
wash
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
reduced braking power afterwashing the
vehicle
Braking efficiency is reduced afterwashing
thevehicle.
#Afterthevehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until braking
power has been fully restored.
*NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car
wash
#Before driving into a car wash make
sure that the car wash is suitable for
thevehicle dimensions.
#Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a
car wash, ensure thefollowing beforehand:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function are deactivated.
Rthe 360° Camera or thereversing camera is
switched off.
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
Rthe blowerfortheventilation/heating is
switched off.
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is in position
g.
Rin car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐
tral iis engaged.
Rthekey is at a minimum distance of 3 m
away from thevehicle, otherwise the boot lid
could open unintentionally.
%If youwould like to leave thevehicle while it
is being washed, make sure thekey is loca‐
ted in thevehicle. The jgear is otherwise
automatically engaged.
%If, afterthe car wash, youremove thewax
from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise.
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
&WARNING Risk of an accident when
using high-pressure cleaners with circu‐
lar jet nozzles
The water jet of a circular jet nozzle (dirt
grinder) can cause externally invisible dam‐
age to the tyres or chassis parts.
Components damaged in this way may unex‐
pectedly fail.
#Do not use high-pressure cleaners with
circular jet nozzles to clean thevehicle.
#Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
Maintenance and care 387
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe thefol‐
lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:
Rkeep thekey at least 3 m away from thevehi‐
cle. Otherwise the boot lid could open unin‐
tentionally.
Rmaintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the
vehicle.
Rvehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm
between thefoil-covered parts of thevehicle
and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner.
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
around whilst cleaning. The watertempera‐
ture of the high-pressure cleaner must not
exceed 60 °C.
Robserve the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions.
Rdo not point the nozzle of the high-pressure
cleaner directly at sensitive parts such as
tyres, slits, electrical components, batteries,
light bulbs and ventilation slots.
Washing thevehicle by hand
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted
in specially designated wash bays.
#Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
#Wash thevehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose thevehicle to direct sunlight.
#Carefully hose thevehicle off with water and
dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
thewater jet directly towardsthe air inlet
grille below the bonnet.
388 Maintenance and care
Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care
Observe thefollowing information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Paintwork RInsect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the
treated areas afterwards.
RBird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
RTree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐
tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
RCoolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and
clean water.
RTarstains: use tarremover.
RWax: use silicone remover.
RDo not attach stickers,films or similar.
RRemove dirt immediately, where possible.
Maintenance and care 389
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Matt finish ROnly use care products approvedfor Mercedes-Benz. RDo not polish thevehicle and light-alloy wheels.
ROnly use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐
neering standards.
RDo not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax
treatment.
RDo not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products,
gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
RAlways have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matt finish care in the
chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paint‐
work care" (/page 389). They also apply to
matt decorative foils.
390 Maintenance and care
Observe thefollowing information:
Cleaning Avoiding damage to the decorative foil
RFor cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without
additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approvedfor
Mercedes-Benz.
RRemove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing
too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil
irreparably.
RIf there is dirt on thefinish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the
Paint Cleaner recommended and approvedfor Mercedes-Benz.
RInsect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated
areas afterwards.
RBird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
RTo prevent waterstains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft,
absorbent cloth afterevery car wash.
RThe service life and colouring of decorative foils are impaired by:
-sunlight
-temperature, e.g. hot air blower
-weather conditions
-stone chippings and dirt
-chemical cleaning agents
-oily products
RDo not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of
shining thefoil-wrapped surface.
RDo not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
cannot always be completely repaired. In such
cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and
cleaning products from the manufacturer.
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐
ferences may occur between the surfaces that
were not protected by a decorative foil after
removing a decorative foil.
%Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Maintenance and care 391
Notes on care of car parts
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windscreen wipers are switched on while
the windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the
wiper arm.
#Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and the ignition before cleaning the
windscreen or wiper blades.
&WARNING Risk of burning from thetail‐
pipe or tailpipe trim
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
very hot. If you come into contact with these
car parts, you could burn yourself.
#Always be particularly careful when in
the vicinity of thetailpipe and tailpipe
trims and supervise children very
closely when in this area.
#Before any contact, allow the car parts
to cool down.
Observe thefollowing information:
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. RDo not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
RTo avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive
thevehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking
it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with
a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning
agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth.Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
392 Maintenance and care
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Exterior lighting Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent,
e.g. car shampoo. Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable
for plastic lenses.
AIRPANEL If thevehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the
AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in
theradiator trim may be restricted.
RSwitch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati‐
cally after approximately 120 seconds.
RClean the bearing points of the shutters with a high-pres‐
sure cleaner.
When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum dis‐
tance of 30 cm.
Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the
radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum dis‐
tance of 30 cm.
Reversing camera
and 360° Camera
ROpen the camera cover with the multimedia system .
RUse clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
Maintenance and care 393
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Tailpipes Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-
Benz, especially in the winter and afterwashing thevehicle. Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Trailer hitch RRemove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush.
RRemove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
RAfter cleaning, oil or grease the ball head lightly.
RObserve the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufactur‐
er's operating instructions.
Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or sol‐
vent.
Notes on care of the interior
&WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
parts breaking off afterthe use of sol‐
vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous.
When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts
may break away.
#Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
ucts containing solvents to clean the
cockpit.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, forexample, cause seat belts to
tear or fail in an accident.
#Never bleach or dye seat belts.
394 Maintenance and care
Observe thefollowing information:
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Seat belts Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. RDo not use chemical cleaning agents.
RDo not dry seat belts by heating them to over 80 °C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suit‐
able display care product (TFT/LCD).
RSwitch off the display and let it cool down.
RDo not use any other cleaning products.
Plastic trim RClean with a damp microfibre cloth.
RFor heavy soiling: use care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not attach stickers,films or similar materials.
RDo not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
come in contact with the plastic trim.
Real wood/trim
inserts
RClean with a microfibre cloth.
RBlack piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soapy water.
RFor heavy soiling: use care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Roof lining Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Maintenance and care 395
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Genuine leather
seat covers
RClean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.
RLeather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not allow the leather to become too damp.
RDo not use a microfibre cloth.
DINAMICA seat cov‐
ers
Clean with a damp cloth.Do not use a microfibre cloth.
Imitation leather
seat covers
Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfibre cloth.
Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp microfibre cloth and 1% soapy water and
allow to dry.
EASY-PACK boot box Clean with a damp cloth.Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, petrol or abrasive
cleaning agents.
396 Maintenance and care
Emergency
Removing the safetyvest
The safetyvests are located in the safetyvest
compartments in the driver's and front
passenger door stowage compartments.
#To remove:pull out safety vest bag 1by
loop 2.
#Open safetyvest bag 1and pull out the
safetyvest.
%There are also safetyvest compartments in
therear door stowage compartments in
which safetyvests can be stored.
1Maximum number of washes
2Maximum wash temperature
3Do not bleach
4Do not iron
5Do not tumble dry
6Do not dry clean
7Class 2 safetyvest
The requirements defined by the legal standard
are only fulfilled if the safetyvest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
The safetyvest must be replaced in thefollowing
situations:
Rthereflective strips are damaged or dirty
Rthe maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
Rthefluorescence has faded
Breakdown assistance 397
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
#Push both sides of warning triangle holder
1in the direction of the arrow and open it.
#Remove warning triangle 2.
Setting up thewarning triangle
#Fold side reflectors 1upwards to form a tri‐
angle and attach at thetop using upper
press-stud 2.
#Fold legs 3down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview
First-aid kit (soft sided) 1is in the boot in the
left-hand stowage net.
398 Breakdown assistance
Removing the fire extinguisher
&WARNING Risk of accident due to an
incorrectly securedfire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
Afire extinguisher in the driver's footwell
may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of thevehicle.
Moreover, thefire extinguisher can be flung
around in the driver's footwell and injure the
driver or other vehicle occupants.
#Alwaysstore and secure thefire extin‐
guisher in the bracket during the jour‐
ney.
#Do not remove thefire extinguisher
while driving.
#Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab1
upwards.
#Remove fire extinguisher 2.
Flat tyre
Notes on flat tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident due to aflat
tyre
Aflat tyre severely affects the driving charac‐
teristics as well as thesteering and braking
of thevehicle.
Tyres without run-flat characteristics:
#Do not drive on with a flat tyre.
#Change theflat tyre immediately with
an emergency spare wheel or spare
wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tyres with run-flat characteristics:
#Observethe information and warning
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat
tyres).
In theevent of a flat tyre, thefollowing options
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐
ment:
RVehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos‐
sible to continue the journey for a short
period of time. Make sure you observethe
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)
(/page 400).
RVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tyre so that it is possible to continue the
journey for a short period of time. To do this,
use the TIREFIT kit (/page 401).
Breakdown assistance 399
RVehicles with Mercedes me connect: you
can make a call for breakdown assistance via
theoverhead control panel in the case of a
breakdown .
RAll vehicles: change the wheel
(/page 434).
%The emergency spare wheel is only available
in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)
&WARNING Risk of accident when driving
in emergency mode
When driving in emergency mode, the han‐
dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when
cornering, when accelerating strongly and
when braking.
#Do not exceed the permissible maxi‐
mum speed.
#Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over
obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
#Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:
Rbanging noise
Rvehicle vibration
Rsmoke which smells like rubber
Rcontinuous ESP®intervention
Rcracks in tire side walls
#After driving in emergency mode have
therims checkedby aqualified special‐
ist workshop with regard to their further
use.
#The defective tire must be replaced in
every case.
With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How‐
ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys‐
tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in
conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss
warning system.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in
conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon‐
itoring system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in
the multifunction display, proceed as follows:
RCheck the tyre for damage.
RIf driving on, observe thefollowing notes.
400 Breakdown assistance
Driving distance possible in emergency
mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance pos‐
sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden 80 km
Fully laden 30 km
The driving distance possible in emergency
mode may vary depending on the driving style.
Observe the maximum permissible speed of
80 km/h.
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a stand‐
ard tyre as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot floor.
1Tyre sealant bottle
2Tyre inflation compressor
%Depending on the power category (LK), the
tyre inflation compressor weighs as follows:
RLK1 12 V/10 A, 120W, 0.8 kg
RLK2 12 V/15 A, 180W, 0.9 kg
You can find information on the power cate‐
gory (LK) and/or electrical details on the
back of the tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre inflation compressor is mainte‐
nance-free. If there is a malfunction, please
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements:
RTyre sealant bottle
RTIREFIT sticker
RTyre inflation compressor
RGloves (depending on thevehicle equipment)
TIREFIT kit storage location: (/page 401)
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora‐
tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in
the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in
outside temperatures down to -20 °C.
Breakdown assistance 401
&WARNING Risk of accident when using
tyre sealant
In thefollowing situations, the tyre sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis‐
tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre prop‐
erly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
largerthan those previously mentioned.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tyre pres‐
sures or on a flat tyre.
#Do not drive on.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tyre sealant
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau‐
ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into
contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and
do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours.
Keep the tyre sealant away from children.
Observe thefollowing if you come into con‐
tact with the tyre sealant:
#Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
using water immediately.
#If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐
oughly rinse them using clean water
immediately.
#If tyre sealant has been swallowed,
thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme‐
diately and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
#Change out of clothing which has come
into contact with tyre sealant immedi‐
ately.
#If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med‐
ical attention immediately.
*NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#Do not runthe tyre inflation compres‐
sor for longer than ten minutes without
interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
thesticker on the tyre inflation compressor.
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐
fied specialist workshop every five years.
#Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tyre.
#Affix part 1of the TIREFIT stickerto the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
#Affix part 2of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
402 Breakdown assistance
#Pull plug 4with the cable and hose 5out
of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
#Push the plug of hose 5into flange 6of
tyre sealant bottle 1until the plug engages.
#Place tyre sealant bottle 1head downwards
into recess 2of the tyre inflation compres‐
sor.
#Remove the cap from valve7on thefaulty
tyre.
#Screwfilling hose 8onto valve 7.
#Insert plug 4into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
#Switch on the ignition.
#Press on and off switch 3on the tyre infla‐
tion compressor.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum‐
ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly
rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres‐
sor during this phase!
#Let the tyre inflation compressor runfor a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tyre should then have attained a tyre
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐
ble to use clear water.
If youget tyre sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐
lene.
If, afterten minutes, a tyre pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach‐
ieved:
#Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
#Unscrew thefilling hose from thevalve of the
defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when
unscrewing thefilling hose.
Breakdown assistance 403
#Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx‐
imately 10 m.
#Pump up the tyre again.
After a maximum of ten minutesthe tyre
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tyre pressure not being ach‐
ieved
If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved
afterthe specified time, the tyre is too badly
damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the
tyre in this instance.
Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is
too low can significantly impair braking and
handling characteristics.
#Do not drive on.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, afterten minutes, a tyre pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:
&WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds.
#Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tyre that has been repaired
using tyre sealant.
#Observe the maximum permissible speed for
a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
#Affixthe upper section of the TIREFIT sticker
to the instrument cluster in a location where
it will be easily seen by the driver.
*NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
from thefilling hose.
#Therefore, place thefilling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
+ENVIRONMENTALNOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants.
#Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
#Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
#Unscrew thefilling hose from thevalve of the
defective tyre.
#Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation
compressor and thewarning triangle.
#Pull away immediately.
#Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tyre pressure using the tyre
inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
404 Breakdown assistance
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tyre pressure not being ach‐
ieved
If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved
after a brief drive, the tyre is too badly dam‐
aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre
in this instance.
Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is
too low can significantly impair braking and
handling characteristics.
#Do not drive on.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz
Service24h: you will find a sticker with thetele‐
phone number, e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's
side.
#Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres‐
sure table on the fuel filler flap forvalues.
#To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the tyre inflation compressor.
#To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres‐
sure release button 1next to manometer
2.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
thefilling hose from thevalve of the sealed
tyre.
#Screw thevalve cap onto thevalve of the
sealed tyre.
#Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre
inflation compressor. Press the locking tabs
on theyellow cap together to do this.
The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot‐
tle.
#Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle
and filling hose replaced there.
Breakdown assistance 405
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the12 V battery
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, forexample, lead to a short circuit. This
can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐
evant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS
(anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Elec‐
tronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of thevehicle in the
following situations:
Rwhen braking
Rin theevent of abrupt steering manoeu‐
vres and/or when thevehicle's speed is
not adaptedto theroad conditions
#In theevent of a short circuit or a simi‐
lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop immediately.
#Do not continue driving.
#Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
RFurther information on ABS (/page 210)
RFurther information on ESP®(/page 211)
For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
ted and approvedforyour vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz. These batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐
aged in theevent of an accident.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which
may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture
in the battery.
#To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance.
&WARNING Danger of chemical burns
from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
#Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#Do not lean overthe battery.
#Do not inhale battery gases.
#Keep children away from the battery.
#Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.
406 Breakdown assistance
All vehicles
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to aqualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the12 V battery, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro
sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
or clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an
apron and a face mask. Immediately
rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
with clean water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear safetyglasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Observe thefollowing if you do not intend to use
thevehicle over an extended period of time:
RActivate standby mode.
RAlternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐
tery charger approvedby Mercedes-Benz or
consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery.
Notes on starting assistance and on charg‐
ing the12 V battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
Breakdown assistance 407
*NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐
voltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the on-board electronics may be damaged.
#Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.4 V.
All other vehicles
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
*NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When using a battery charger without a maxi‐
mum charging voltage, the battery or the
vehicle electronics may be damaged.
#Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
&WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
gengas igniting
A battery generates hydrogen gas during the
charging process. If there is a short circuit or
sparks start to form,there is a danger of the
hydrogen gas igniting.
#Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
into contact with vehicle parts.
#Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
#When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, you must observethe descri‐
bed order forthe battery clamps.
#When giving starting assistance, always
make sure that you only connect bat‐
tery terminals with identical polarity.
#During starting assistance, you must
observethe described order for con‐
necting and disconnecting the jump
lead.
#Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.
&WARNING Risk of explosion during
charging process and starting assistance
During thecharging process and starting
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
sive gas mixture.
#Avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking.
#Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
lation during thecharging process and
during starting assistance.
#Do not lean over a battery.
&WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charg‐
ing, battery gas may be released.
#Alwaysthaw a frozen battery out first
before charging it or performing start‐
ing assistance.
408 Breakdown assistance
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐
zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be dramatically shortened. The
starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐
cially at low temperatures.
It is recommended that you have athawed bat‐
tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
All vehicles
*NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attemptsto start the engine
Numerous or extended attemptsto start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
#Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe thefollowing points during starting
assistance and when charging the battery:
ROnly use undamaged jump lead/charging
cables with a sufficient cross-section and
insulatedterminal clamps.
RNon-insulated parts of theterminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jump lead/charging cable is
connected to the battery/jump-start connec‐
tion point.
RThe jump lead/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may
move when the engine is running.
RAlways make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged.
RKeep away from fire and naked flames.
RDo not lean overthe battery.
Observe the additional following points when
charging the battery:
ROnly use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
RRead the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
RStarting assistance may only be provided
using batteries with a nominal voltage of
12 V.
RThe vehicles must not touch.
RPetrol engine: only accept starting assis‐
tance if the engine and exhaust system are
cold.
Starting assistance and charging the12 V
battery
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
RAutomatic transmission: the transmission
is in position j.
RManual transmission: the transmission is in
neutral.
RThe ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off.
RThe bonnet is open.
Breakdown assistance 409
#Fold cover1up in the direction of the
arrow.
#Slide cover2of positive clamp 3on the
jump-starting connection point in the direc‐
tion of the arrow.
#Connect positive clamp 3on your vehicle to
the positive pole of the donor battery using
the jump lead/charging cable. Always begin
with positive clamp 3on your ownvehicle
first.
#During starting assistance: start the
engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle
speed.
#Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐
tery and earth point 4of your ownvehicle
by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin
with the donor battery first.
#During starting assistance: start the
engine of your ownvehicle.
#During thecharging process: start the
charging process.
#During starting assistance: let the engines
runfor several minutes.
#During starting assistance: before discon‐
necting the jump lead, switch on an electrical
consumer in your ownvehicle, e.g. therear
window heater or lighting.
When thestarting assistance/charging process
is complete:
#First,remove the jump lead/charging cable
from earth point 4and negative pole of the
donor battery, then from positive clamp 3
and positive pole of the donor battery. Begin
410 Breakdown assistance
each time with the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
#Afterremoving the jump lead/charging
cable, close cover2of positive clamp 3.
#Close cover1.
Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
#Observe the notes on the12 V battery
(/page 406).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Observe thefollowing notes if youwant to
replace the battery yourself:
RAlwaysreplace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require‐
ments.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGMtechnol‐
ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐
ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is
only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐
ium-ion battery. For safetyreasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approvedforyour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
RCarry over detachable parts, such as vent
hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from
the battery being replaced.
RMake sure that thevent hose is always con‐
nected to the original opening on the side of
the battery.
Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
escape.
RMake sure that detachable parts are recon‐
nected in the same way.
Tow-starting or towing away
Permitted towing methods
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
Fortowing, use a towrope or tow bar with both
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐
tems.
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle due to tow‐
ing away incorrectly
#Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Breakdown assistance 411
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing
method
Both axles on theground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No Yes, if thesteering wheel is fixed in
the centre position with a steering
wheel lock.
4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No No
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be
performed by atowing company.
Towing thevehicle with both axles on the
ground
#Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods (/page 411).
#Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe thefollowing points when the battery is
discharged:
Rthe engine cannot be started
Rthe electric parking brake cannot be released
or applied
Rvehicles with automatic transmission: the
automatic transmission cannot be shiftedto
position ior j.
412 Breakdown assistance
%Vehicles with automatic transmission: if
the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
tedto position i, or the multifunction dis‐
play in the instrument cluster does not show
anything, have thevehicle transportedaway
(/page 414). Atowing vehicle with lifting
equipment is required forvehicle transporta‐
tion.
*NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐
ing at excessively high speeds or over long
distances.
#Atowing speed of 50 km/h must not
be exceeded.
#Atowing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded.
&WARNING Risk of accident when towing
avehicle which is too heavy
If thevehicle being tow-started or towed
away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass, thefollowing situations can occur:
Rthetowing eye may become detached.
Rthe car/trailer combination may swerve
or evenoverturn.
#If another vehicle is tow-started or
towedaway, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own
vehicle.
If a vehicle must be towstarted or towedaway,
its permissible gross mass must not exceed the
permissible gross mass of thetowing vehicle.
#Information on the permissible gross mass of
thevehicle can be found on thevehicle iden‐
tification plate (/page 446).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: do
not open the driver's door or front passenger
door, otherwise the automatic transmission
automatically shifts to position j.
#Fit thetowing eye (/page 416).
#Fasten thetow bar.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
tion
#Only connect thetowrope or tow bar to
thetowing eyes.
#Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/page 85).
#Do not activate the HOLD function.
#Deactivate tow-away protection
(/page 104).
#Deactivate Active Brake Assist
(/page 221).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
#Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
to neutral i.
#Release the electric parking brake.
Breakdown assistance 413
#Vehicles with manual transmission:
switch on the ignition, otherwise thesteering
wheel lock may engage.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
geravailable in thefollowing situations:
Rthe ignition is switched off.
Rthe brake system or powersteering sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
Rthe energy supply or the on-board electri‐
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towedaway, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
#Use a tow bar.
#Make sure that thesteering wheel can
move freely, before towing thevehicle
away.
*NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and thevehicles could be
damaged.
#Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
#Observe the notes on towing away
(/page 412).
#Connect thetow bar to thetowing eye in
order to load thevehicle.
%You can also attach thetow bar to the trailer
hitch.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
%Vehicles with automatic transmission:
the automatic transmission may be locked in
position jin theevent of damage to the
electrical system. To shift to i, provide the
on-board electrical system with power
(/page 409).
#Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
to neutral.
#Load thevehicle onto the transporter.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
#Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reversegear.
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
#Only secure thevehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
System PLUS)
&WARNING Risk of an accident when
transporting vehicles with Adaptive
Damping System PLUS
The reduced damping forces on thevehicle
being transported can cause thevehicle/
trailer combination to start to swing.
414 Breakdown assistance
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
theAdaptive Damping System PLUS, the
vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid.
Consequently, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#When transporting, ensure that:
Rthevehicle has been loaded onto
the transporter correctly
Rthevehicle is secured at all four
wheels with suitable tensioning
straps
Rthe maximum permissible speed of
60 km/h is not exceeded when
transporting
*NOTE Damage to thevehicle from secur‐
ing it incorrectly
#After loading, thevehicle must be
secured on all four wheels. Otherwise,
thevehicle could be damaged.
#A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards
and 10 cm downwards must be kept to
the transport platform.
#Secure thevehicle on all four wheels after
loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic
transmission
#Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
incorrect positioning
#Do not position thevehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi‐
cle.
Towing eyestorage location
The towing eye1is located in thestowage
space under the boot floor.
Breakdown assistance 415
Installing thetowing eye
#Press the mark on cover1inwards and
remove.
#Screw in thetowing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a
trailer hitch do not have arear bracketforthe
towing eye. Fasten thetow bar to the trailer
hitch.
%Make sure that cover1engages in the
bumper when youremove thetowing eye.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of
thetowing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, thevehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
#Only use thetowing eyeto towaway or
towstart thevehicle.
Towstarting thevehicle (emergency engine
start)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
*NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
mission due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow-starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
Vehicles with manual transmission
#Observe the notes on towing away
(/page 412).
#If necessary, allow the engine and exhaust
system to cool down.
#Switch the ignition on.
#Engage second gear.
#Release the electric parking brake.
#Tow-start thevehicle while the clutch pedal
is fully depressed.
#Slowly release the clutch pedal.
#Immediately shift to neutral if the engine
starts.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle, paying atten‐
tion to road and traffic conditions.
#Remove thetow bar.
416 Breakdown assistance
#Remove thetowing eye.
#Have thevehicle checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
youreplace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐
ded.
This could result in a fire.
#Alwaysreplace faulty fuses with speci‐
fied new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be
damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐
tionality may be significantly impaired.
#Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the
correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognise by the col‐
our and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and further
information to be observed are listed in the fuse
assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in
the boot (/page 419).
*NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse
box.
#When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
Ensure thefollowing before replacing a fuse:
RThe vehicle is secured against rolling away.
RAll electrical consumers are switched off.
RThe ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side (/page 418)
RFuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(/page 419)
RFuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/page 419)
RFuse box in the boot on theright-hand side
of thevehicle when viewed in the direction of
travel (/page 419)
Breakdown assistance 417
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
engine compartment
Requirements:
RA dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observethe notes on electrical fuses
(/page 417).
Opening
&WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windscreen wipers while the engine bon‐
net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the
windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can
be trapped by the wiper linkage.
#Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before opening the
engine bonnet.
#Turn clip 2on cover1aquarter-turn to
the left.
#Fold cover1up in the direction of the
arrow.
#Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
box using a dry cloth.
#Loosen screws3and remove fuse box lid
4from thetop.
Closing
#Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
rectly in lid 4.
418 Breakdown assistance
#Insert lid 4into the bracket at therear of
the fuse box.
#Fold down lid 4of the fuse box and tighten
screws3.
#Fold down cover1.
#Turn clip 2on cover1one quarter-turn to
theright.
#Close the bonnet.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
cockpit
The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard
under a cover.
#Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
further information.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/page 417).
#Open cover1in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/page 417).
#Fold cover1up in the direction of the
arrow.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on
the side of the fuse box.
Breakdown assistance 419
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐
teristics
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or
tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop
thevehicle as soon as possible to check the
wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics. If youfind no signs of damage,
have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐
aged tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
As a result, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres
immediately.
Carry out thefollowing checks on all wheels reg‐
ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
RCheck the tyre pressure (/page 421).
RVisually inspect tyres and wheels for dam‐
age.
RCheck thevalve caps.
The valves must be protected against mois‐
ture and dirt by thevalve caps approved
especially foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
RVisual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres
is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Notes on snow chains
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect snow chain fitting
If you have fitted snow chains to the front
wheels, the snow chains may drag against
thevehicle body or chassis components.
This could cause damage to thevehicle or
the tyres.
#Neverfit snow chains on the front
wheels.
#Only fit snow chains on therear wheels
in pairs.
*NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit‐
ted snow chains
If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the
wheel trims can be damaged.
#Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before fitting snow chains.
420 Wheels and tyres
Observe thefollowing notes when using snow
chains:
RSnow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
RFor safetyreasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approvedforyour
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
with the same quality standard.
RIf snow chains are fitted, the maximum per‐
missible speed is 50 km/h.
RVehicles with Active Parking Assist: do
not use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are fitted.
RVehicles with level control: if snow chains
are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level.
%You can permanently limit the maximum
vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres
(/page 225).
%You can deactivate ESP®to pull away
(/page 214). This allows the wheels to
spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tyre pressure
Notes on tyre pressure
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient or excessive tyre pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the
following risks:
RThe tyres may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
RThe tyres may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
traction.
RThe driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
#Comply with therecommended tyre
pressure and check the tyre pressure of
all tyres including the spare wheel regu‐
larly:
Rat least once a month
Rwhen the load changes
Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
Rif operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving
#Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary.
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:
RShortenthe service life of the tyres.
RCause increased tyre damage.
RAdversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
&WARNING Risk of accident from repea‐
ted tyre pressure drop
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged.
Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyres
to burst.
#Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign
objects.
#Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak.
Wheels and tyres 421
#If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on therecommended tyre pressure
forthevehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found
on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap (/page 422).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre
pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre
pressure.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: you can also check the tyre pressure using
the on-board computer.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
RThe vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
RThe vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
Arise in the tyre temperature of 10 °C increases
the tyre pressure by approx.10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking
the tyre pressure of warm tyres.
Trailer operation notes
Always inflate therear axle tyres to therecom‐
mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure
table for increased load.
Tyre pressure table
The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
The tyre pressure table shows therecommended
tyre pressure for all tyres approvedforthis vehi‐
cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for
cold tyres under various operating conditions,
i.e. loading and/or speed of thevehicle.
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres‐
sure, the tyre pressure information following is
only valid forthose tyre sizes.
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by
the+symbol, the tyre pressure information
following shows alternative tyre pressures.
These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's
ride comfort. Fuel consumption may then
increase slightly.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in thetable for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ from this.
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
422 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
The system checks the tyre pressure and the
tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to thevehicle
by means of a tyre pressure sensor.
New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres,
are automatically taught-in during thefirst jour‐
ney they are used.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature
appear in the multifunction display
(/page 423).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
tyre temperature is excessive, you will be
warned in thefollowing ways:
Rvia display messages
(/page
502)
Rvia thehwarning lamp in the instrument
cluster (/page 531)
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
pressure to therecommended cold tyre pressure
suitable forthe operating situation. Set the tyre
pressure for cold tyres using a tyre pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tyre pressure for
the current operating situation must first be
taught-in to the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem.
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem will automatically update the new reference
values afteryou have changed the tyre pressure.
You can, however, also update thereference val‐
ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
system manually (/page 424).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in thefollowing situations:
RThe tyre pressure has been set incorrectly.
RThere is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by aforeign object penetrating the
tyre.
RThere is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source.
Make sure to observe thefollowing further rela‐
ted subject:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre
pressure monitoring system
Requirements:
RThe ignition is switched on.
On-board computer:
4Service 5Tyres
One of thefollowing displays appears:
RCurrent tyre pressure and tyre temperature
of the individual wheels:
Wheels and tyres 423
RTyre pressures will be displayed after a few
minutes of driving
RTyre pressure monitor active:theteach-in
process of the system is not yet complete.
The tyre pressures are already being moni‐
tored.
#Compare the tyre pressure with therecom‐
mended tyre pressure forthe current operat‐
ing condition (/page 422). Observethe
notes on tyre temperature (/page 421).
%The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
play may deviate from those of the tyre pres‐
sure gauge as they referto sea level. At high
altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated
by a pressure gauge are higher than those
shown by the on-board computer. In this
case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.
Make sure to observe thefollowing further rela‐
ted subject:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
Requirements:
RThe recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set fortherespective operating status on
each of thefour wheels (/page 421).
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in
thefollowing situations:
RThe tyre pressure has changed.
RThe wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly fitted.
On-board computer:
4Service 5Tyres
#Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of thesteering wheel.
The Use current tyre pressures as new refer-
ence values? message is shown in the multi‐
function display.
#To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
left-hand side of thesteering wheel.
The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Current warning messages are deleted and
theyellow hwarning lamp goes out.
Afteryou have been driving for a few
minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐
rent tyre pressures are within the specified
range. The current tyre pressures are then
accepted as reference values and monitored.
Make sure to observe thefollowing further rela‐
ted subject:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
424 Wheels and tyres
Radio-equipment approval of the tyre pres‐
sure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
Argentina Schrader GG4T
Numero de Registro CNC
H-20495
Schrader DG6W2D4
Numero de Registro CNC:
H-20959
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
Brazil
MODELO: GG4T
ANATEL: 07827-17-08001
MODELO:DG6W2D4
ANATEL: 01455-18-08001
Este equipamento opera em
caráter secundário, isto é, não
tem direito à proteção contrain‐
terferência prejudicial, mesmo de
estações do mesmo tipo e não
pode causar interfencia a siste‐
mas operando em caráter pri‐
mário.
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
European
Union
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd
declares that theradio equip‐
ment type "GG4T", "DG6W2D4"
is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration
of conformity is available at the
following internet address:
http://www.tpmseuro‐
shop.com/documents/declara‐
tion_conformities
GG4T: 433.92MHz; Maximum
effective radiated power < 10mw
(e.r.p)
DG6W2D4: 433.92MHz; Maxi‐
mum effective radiated power <
10mw (e.r.p)
Wheels and tyres 425
Country Radio equipment approval
number
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11
Technology Park,
Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS,
Northern Ireland United Kingdom
Ghana NCA Approved: 1R3-1M-7E1-10D
NCA Approved: BR3-1M-GE2-X73
Indonesia GG4T:
54083/SDPPI/2017
PLG3612
DG6W2D4
57058/SDPPI/2018
PLG3612
MC34MA4:
25626/ISDPPI/2015
PLG3612
Country Radio equipment approval
number
Jordan Kingdom of Jordon Type approval
forTyre Pressure sensor.
Manufacturer: Schrader Electron‐
ics Ltd.
Model: GG4T
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LDP/2017/456
Model: DG6W2D4
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2018/139
Model: MC34MA4
Type Approval Number:
TRC/LPD/2011/158
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numero d'agreement: MR 14777
ANRT 2017
Date d'agrement: 20/09/17
Numero d'agrement: MR 16355
ANRT 2018
Date d'agrement: 19/04/2018
Numero d'agrement: MR 6706
ANRT 2011
Date d'agrement: 17/11/2011
Mexico IFT: RLVSCGG17-1665
IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04
IFT: RCPSCMR14-062
426 Wheels and tyres
Country Radio equipment approval
number
Moldova
024
1024
Country Radio equipment approval
number
Pakistan
Philip‐
pines
NTC Type Approved
No: ESD-1306871C
No: ESD-1715977C
No: ESD-1817081C
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
SerbiaGG4T
И005 17
DG6W2D4
И005 18
MC34MA4
И01111
Wheels and tyres 427
Country Radio equipment approval
number
Singapore Complies with
IMDA Standards
NO524-13
DA105282
South
Africa
TA-2017/3884 Approved
TA-2017/2933 Approved
TA-2011 /1370 Approved
Country Radio equipment approval
number
Ukraine GG4T
UK.TF
DG6W2D4
UA. TR.028
Corax 3
109
Country Radio equipment approval
number
United
Arab Emi‐
rates
TRA
REGISTERED NO: ER57985/17
REGISTERED NO: ER960528
DEALER NO: DA0047074
REGISTERED NO: ER37066/15
DEALER NO: DA0047074/10
Vietnam
Schrader Electronics Ltd.
Model: GG4T
No: C0170191017AF04A2
Model: DG6S2D4
No: C0078070518AF04A2
428 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function of the tyre pressure loss warning
system
The tyre pressure loss warning system warnsthe
driver by means of display messages when there
is a severe tyre pressure loss.
After a change in tyre pressure, a wheel rotation
or a tyre change, or if you have refitted wheels
or tyres, the tyre pressure loss warning system
has to be restarted (/page 429).
The tyre pressure loss warning system does not
replace the need to regularly check the tyre
pressures.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in thefollowing situations:
Rincorrectly set tyre pressure
Rsudden pressure loss caused, forexample,
by aforeign object penetrating the tyre
Rsteady pressure loss in several tyres
The system has a restricted or delayed function
particularly in thefollowing situations:
Rpoor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
Rdriving with snow chains
Rwhen adopting a very sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐
eration
Rdriving with a very heavy or large trailer
Rdriving with a high load
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
RDisplay messages about the tyres
(/page
502)
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning
system
Requirements:
RThe recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set fortherespective operating status on
each of thefour wheels (/page 421).
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in
thefollowing situations:
RThe tyre pressure has changed.
RThe wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly fitted.
On-board computer:
4Service 5Tyres
#Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of thesteering wheel.
The Run Flat Indicator activeRestart: press
Touch Control message is shown in the mul‐
tifunction display.
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in
thefollowing situations:
RThe tyre pressure has changed.
RThe wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly fitted.
#To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
left-hand side of thesteering wheel.
The Tyre pressure now OK? message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Wheels and tyres 429
#Select Yes .
#To confirm restart, press Touch Control on
the left-hand side of thesteering wheel.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Afteryou have driven for a few minutes, the
tyre pressure loss warning system monitors
the set tyre pressures of all the tyres.
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
Wheel change
Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing
tyres
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect dimensions of wheels and tyres
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are
used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension
components may become damaged.
#Alwaysreplace wheels and tyres with
those that fulfil the specifications of the
original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fitthe
correct:
RDesignation
RType
When replacing tyres, make sure to fitthe
correct:
RDesignation
RManufacturer
RType
&WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa‐
city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing
capacity or the permissible speed rating may
lead to tyre damage and to the tyres burst‐
ing.
#Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approvedforyour vehicle model.
#Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
*NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through
tyre types and sizes that have not been
approved
For safetyreasons, only use tyres, wheels
and accessories which have been specially
approvedby Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle.
430 Wheels and tyres
These tyres are specially adaptedto the con‐
trol systems, such as ABS, ESP®and
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
tain AMG tyres)
Certain characteristics, such as handling,
vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption,
etc. may otherwise be adversely affected.
Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in
the tyres rubbing against the body and axle
components when loaded. This could result
in damage to the tyre or thevehicle.
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that
have been checked and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐
ded tyres
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec‐
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ‐
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tyres.
Forthis reason driving safety cannot be guar‐
anteed.
#Do not use used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage.
*NOTE Possible damage to wheels or
tyres when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tyre section width.
The lowerthe tyre section width, the greater
is therisk of damage to wheels or tyres when
driving over obstacles.
#Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
*NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring
system: electronic component parts are
located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should
not be applied in the area of thevalve.
The tools could damage the electronic com‐
ponent parts.
#Have the tyres changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
*NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low
ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could
form when driving with summer tyres, caus‐
ing permanent damage to the tyre.
#At temperatures below 7 °C, use M+S
tyres.
Accessory partsthat are not approvedforyour
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used
correctly can impair the operating safety.
Wheels and tyres 431
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and enquire about:
RSuitability
RLegal stipulations
RFactory recommendations
&WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tyres
The special tyre tread in combination with
the optimised tyre compound, means that
therisk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet
roads is increased.
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tyre running
temperature.
#Switch on the ESP®and adapt your
driving style accordingly.
#Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures
of less than 50 °F.
Observethefollowing when selecting, fitting and
replacing tyres:
RCountry-specific requirements for tyre
approvalthat define a specific tyre type for
your vehicle.
Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in
certain regions and areas of operation can
be highly beneficial.
ROnly use tyres and wheels of the same type
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended
tyres) and the same make.
ROnly fit wheels of the same size on one axle
(left and right).
It is only permissible to fit a different wheel
size in theevent of a flat tyre in order to
drive to the specialist workshop.
ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
wheels.
RDo not make any modifications to the brake
system, the wheels or the tyres.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not
permitted and may invalidate thevehicle's
general operating permit.
RVehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring
system: all fitted wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors forthe tyre pres‐
sure monitoring system.
RAt temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres
or all-season tyres marked M+S for all
wheels.
Winter tyres bearing theisnowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro‐
vide the best possible grip in wintry road
conditions.
RFor M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same
tread.
RObserve the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tyres fitted.
If this is below thevehicle's maximum speed,
this must be indicated by an appropriate
label in the driver's field of vision.
RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds forthe
first100 km.
RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
432 Wheels and tyres
RWhen replacing with tyres that do not
feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles
with MOExtended tyres are not equipped
with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. Equip the
vehicle with a TIREFIT kit afterreplacing with
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐
tics, e.g. winter tyres.
%You can permanently limit the maximum
vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres
(/page 225).
For more information on wheels and tyres, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
RTyre pressure table (/page 422)
RNotes on the emergency spare wheel
(/page 440)
Notes on interchanging wheels
&WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tyres have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo‐
nents may also be damaged.
#Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tyres are of the same
dimensions.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tyres have different dimensions can
render thegeneral operating permit invalid.
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
differ:
RFront wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tyre
RRear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel
size, you can interchange the wheels every
5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on thewear.
Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for
the wheels.
It is imperative to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing
so Preparing thevehicle for a wheel
change(/page 434).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe thefollowing
notes:
RAfterremoving wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
RProtect the tyres from contact with oil,
grease or fuel.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Wheels and tyres 433
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
For more information on which tyre-changing
tool kits are required and approved for perform‐
ing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Yourequire thefollowing tools, for instance, to
change a wheel:
RJack
RChock
RWheel wrench
%The jack weighs approximately 2.1 kg.
The maximum load capacity of the jack can
be found on thesticker affixedto the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a
malfunction, please contact a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located under the
boot floor.
1Wheel wrench
2Folding chock
3Jack
Setting up thefolding chock
Preparing thevehicle for a wheel change
Requirements:
RThe required tyre-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist
workshop to find out about suitable tools.
434 Wheels and tyres
RThe vehicle is not on a slope.
RThe vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
#Apply the electric parking brake manually.
#Move the front wheels to thestraight-ahead
position.
#Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first or reversegear.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift into position j.
#Vehicles with level control system: set the
normal vehicle level (/page 241).
#Switch off the engine.
#Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
#Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
#Remove the hub caps if necessary
(/page 435).
#Raise thevehicle (/page 436).
Removing and fitting hub caps
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/page 434).
Vehicles with steel wheels
The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts. Before
you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must
remove the wheel trim.
#To remove:using both hands, carefully reach
into two wheel trim openings and remove the
wheel trim.
Plastic hub cap
#To remove:turn the centre cover of the hub
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
#To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the
hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
#Position the hub cap and turn the centre
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages
physically and audibly.
Aluminium hub cap
#To remove:position socket2on hub cap
1.
Wheels and tyres 435
%The socket can be found in the tyre-change
tool kit.
#Position wheel spanner 3on socket2.
#Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1
anti-clockwise and remove it.
#To fit: position hub cap 1and turn until it is
completely flush with the wheel.
#Position socket2on hub cap 1.
#Attach wheel spanner 3to socket2and
tighten the hub cap clockwise.
Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.
Raising thevehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
RThere are no persons in thevehicle.
RThe vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/page 434).
RThe hub caps have been removed
(/page 435).
Important notes on using the jack:
ROnly use thevehicle-specific jack that has
been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz
to raise thevehicle.
RThe jack is only designed forraising and
holding thevehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐
nance work under thevehicle.
RThe jack must be placed on a firm,flat and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
RThe foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when thevehicle is raised:
RNever place your hands or feet under the
vehicle.
RNever lie under thevehicle.
RDo not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake.
RDo not open or close any doors or the boot
lid.
#Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
436 Wheels and tyres
Position of jack support points
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
&WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of thevehicle,
the jack could tip with thevehicle raised.
#Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of thevehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned
vertically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
*NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with thevehi‐
cle raised.
#The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up thevehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.
#Position jack 2at jack support point 1.
#Turn crank 3clockwise until jack 2sits
completely on jack support point 1and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
#Turn crank 3until the tyre is raised a maxi‐
mum of 3 cm from the ground.
#Loosen and remove the wheel (/page 438).
Wheels and tyres 437
Removing a wheel
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is raised (/page 436).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.
*NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
a dirty surface.
#Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐
pletely.
#Unscrew theremaining wheel bolts fully.
#Remove the wheel.
#Fit the new wheel (/page 438).
Fitting a new wheel
Requirements:
RThe wheel is removed (/page 438).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
&WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/
wheel nuts to come loose.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐
ing.
#Never oil or grease thethreads.
#In theevent of damage to thethreads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
#Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐
aged hub threads replaced.
#Do not continue driving.
#Observe the information on thechoice of
tyres (/page 430).
For tyres with a specified direction of rotation,
an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates
the correct direction of rotation. Observethe
direction of rotation when fitting.
&WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when thevehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
#Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when thevehicle is on the ground.
#Be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
(/page 430).
#For safetyreasons, only use wheel bolts
which have been approvedby Mercedes-
Benz and forthe wheel in question.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated until they are
finger-tight.
438 Wheels and tyres
#If the collapsible emergency spare wheel has
been fitted, inflate the collapsible emergency
spare wheel (/page 442).
#Lowerthevehicle (/page 439).
Lowering thevehicle after a wheel change
Requirements:
RThe new wheel has been fitted
(/page 438).
*NOTE Damage to the emergency spare
wheel when lowering thevehicle
Lowering thevehicle without previously
inflating the emergency collapsible spare
wheel can damage its rim.
#Inflate the emergency collapsible spare
wheel using the tyre inflation compres‐
sor before lowering thevehicle.
#To lower the vehicle: turn the crank of the
jack anti-clockwise until thevehicle is once
again standing firmly on the ground.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1to 5with
a maximum of 80 Nm.
#Then tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diag‐
onal pattern in the order indicated 1to 5
to the specified tightening torque of 130 Nm.
&WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
#Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
#If you are not sure, do not move the
vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop and have the tightening tor‐
quechecked immediately.
#Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun‐
ted wheel and adjust accordingly.
#Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning
system: restart the tyre pressure loss warn‐
ing system (/page 429).
#Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring
system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring
system (/page 424).
Exception: the new wheel is an emergency
spare wheel.
Make sure to observe thefollowing further rela‐
ted subject:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
Wheels and tyres 439
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of
the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel may severely impair the driving char‐
acteristics.
To prevent hazardous situations:
#Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#Neverfit more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs
in size.
#Only use an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size briefly.
#Do not switch off ESP®.
#Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced
at the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop. The new wheel must have the
correct dimensions.
Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare
wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐
gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
Do not fitthe emergency spare wheel with snow
chains.
Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
%Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring
system: if an emergency spare wheel is fit‐
tedthe tyre pressure monitoring system can‐
not function reliably. For a few minutes after
an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the sys‐
tem may still display the tyre pressure of the
removed wheel. Only restart the system
again when the emergency spare wheel has
been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
RTyre pressure table (/page 422)
Removing the emergency spare wheel
The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.
#Observe the information on mounting tyres
(/page 430).
#Open the boot.
#Detach thefastening straps.
#Unhook theretaining spring hooks of thefas‐
tening straps from the brackets.
#Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the emergency spare wheel.
#Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the emergency spare wheel.
440 Wheels and tyres
Collapsible spare wheel
Notes on the collapsible spare wheel
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of
the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel may severely impair the driving char‐
acteristics.
To prevent hazardous situations:
#Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#Neverfit more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs
in size.
#Only use an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size briefly.
#Do not switch off ESP®.
#Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced
at the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop. The new wheel must have the
correct dimensions.
The collapsible spare wheel is an emergency
wheel which is only suitable for use for a limited
period of time and in a restricted manner in the
event of a flat tyre (e.g. until the nearest work‐
shop).
The tyre sidewalls are folded when in transport
mode. Before use, the collapsible spare wheel
has to be inflated with the accompanying com‐
pressor.
Check the tyre pressure of the collapsible spare
wheel once fitted. Correct the pressure as nec‐
essary.
The maximum permissible speed with a collapsi‐
ble spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
Do not fit snow chains with the collapsible spare
wheel.
Replace the collapsible spare wheel after six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
%Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring
system: if a collapsible spare wheel is fitted
the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot
function reliably. For a few minutes after an
emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system
may still display the tyre pressure of the
removed wheel. Only restart the system
again when the collapsible spare wheel has
been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observethefollowing further
related subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/page 421)
RTyre pressure table (/page 422)
Removing the collapsible spare wheel
The collapsible spare wheel is secured in the col‐
lapsible spare wheel bag in the boot.
#Observe the information on mounting tyres
(/page 430).
#Open the boot.
#Detach the securing straps.
#Unhook theretaining spring hooks of the
securing straps from the brackets.
#Remove the collapsible spare wheel bag
together with the collapsible spare wheel.
Wheels and tyres 441
#Open the collapsible spare wheel bag and
remove the collapsible spare wheel.
Inflating the collapsible emergency spare
wheel
*NOTE Damage to the collapsible spare
wheel when lowering thevehicle
Lowering thevehicle without previously
inflating the collapsible spare wheel can
damage its rim.
#Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using
the tyre inflation compressor before
lowering thevehicle.
*NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#Do not runthe tyre inflation compres‐
sor for longer than eight minutes with‐
out interruption.
Requirements:
RObserve the manufacturer's safety notes on
the tyre inflation compressor label and on
the tyre sealant bottle.
RMount the collapsible emergency spare
wheel as described (/page 438).
The collapsible emergency spare wheel must
be mounted before it is inflated.
RRemove the tyre inflation compressor from
thestowage space under the boot floor
(/page 401).
#Pull plug 5and thefiller hose out of the
tyre inflation compressor housing.
#Unscrew the cap from thevalve on the col‐
lapsible emergency spare wheel.
#Screw union nut 1of thefiller hose onto
thevalve.
If necessary, unscrew the plug-type connec‐
tion from the union nut beforehand.
442 Wheels and tyres
#Make sure on and off switch 2of the tyre
inflation compressor is set to 0.
#Insert plug 5in a socket in your vehicle.
RCigarette lighter socket: (/page 135)
R12 V socket:
RObserve the notes on the cigarette lighter:
(/page 135)
RObservethe notes on sockets:
#Turn thekeyto position 1in the ignition
lock.
#Press on and off switch 2on the tyre infla‐
tion compressor to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is
shown on manometer3.
#Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.
The specified tyre pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
#When the specified tyre pressure has been
reached, press on and off switch 2on the
tyre inflation compressor to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.
#Turn thekeyto position gin the ignition
lock.
#If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci‐
fied pressure, press pressure release valve
button 4until the correct tyre pressure has
been reached.
#Unscrew union nut 1of thefiller hose from
thevalve.
If necessary, screw the plug-type connection
back onto the union nut.
#Screw thevalve cap onto the collapsible
emergency spare wheel valve again.
#Stow plug 5and thefiller hose in the lower
section of the compressor housing.
#Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the
vehicle.
Wheels and tyres 443
Notes on technical data
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognise dangers.
Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognise dangers.
The technical data was determined in accord‐
ance with EU Directives. The data stated only
applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You
can obtain further information from a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre.
Only for certain countries: you can find vehi‐
cle-specific vehicle data in the EC-Certificate of
Conformity (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).
These documents are delivered with your vehi‐
cle.
On-board electronics
Notes on tampering with the engine elec‐
tronics
*NOTE Premature wear through improper
maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle
components to wear more quickly and the
vehicle's operating permit may be invalida‐
ted.
#Always have work on the engine elec‐
tronics and related components carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Two-way radios
Notes on fitting two-way radios
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the on-board elec‐
tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or
retrofitted incorrectly.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
thevehicle.
#You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐
rect operation of two-way radios
If you operate two-wayradios incorrectly in
thevehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
could interfere with the on-board electronics,
e.g.:
Rif the two-way radio is not connectedto
an exterior aerial
Rif theexterior aerial is not correctly
mounted or is not of low reflection
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
thevehicle.
#Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
444 Technical data
#When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the
low-reflection exterior aerial.
*NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐
mit due to failure to comply with the
instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
#Only use approved frequency bands.
#Observe the maximum permissible out‐
put power in these frequency bands.
#Only use approved aerial positions.
1Front roof area
2Rear roof area
3Rear wings
4Boot lid
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fit‐
ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not
permitted.
On therear wings, it is recommended that you
fitthe aerial on the side of thevehicle closest to
the centre of theroad.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the
legal requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply and aerial con‐
nectors provided in the pre-installation. Be sure
to observe the manufacturer's supplements
when fitting.
Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the aerial must not exceed thevalues in
thefollowing table.
Technical data 445
Frequency band and maximum transmission
output
Frequency band Maximum transmis‐
sion output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m frequency band
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m frequency band
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio sys‐
tem/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm frequency
band
420 - 450 MHz
35 W
Two-way radio
(2G/3G/4G) 10 W
The following can be used in thevehicle without
restrictions:
Rtwo-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
aerial on the outside of thevehicle for some
wavebands.
This applies to thefollowing wavebands:
Rtrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm frequency band
R2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
number overview
Vehicle identification plate
446 Technical data
Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait)
1Vehicle manufacturer
2Place of manufacture
3Manufacturing date
4Vehicle model
5VIN
Vehicle identification plate (example: all
other countries)
1Vehicle manufacturer
2EU general operating permit number (only
for certain countries)
3VIN (vehicle identification number)
4Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
(kg)
5Maximum permissible gross weight of vehi‐
cle combination (kg) (only for specific coun‐
tries)
6Permissible front axle load (kg)
7Permissible rear axle load (kg)
8Paint code
%The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
Technical data 447
VIN in front of the right-hand front seat
1Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)
2Floor covering
VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen
1VIN (vehicle identification number) as label
The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind‐
screen is only available in some countries.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the crank‐
case. You can obtain further information from
any qualified specialist workshop.
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the information in the Supplement. Otherwise,
you may fail to recognise dangers.
&WARNING Risk of injury from operating
fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
#Observe thetext on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
#Alwaysstore operating fluids sealed in
their original containers.
#Alwayskeep children away from operat‐
ing fluids.
448 Technical data
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
#Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include thefollowing:
Rfuels
RDeNOx agent AdBlue®forexhaust gas after‐
treatment
Rlubricants
Rcoolant
Rbrake fluid
Rwindscreen washer fluid
Rclimate control system refrigerant
Only use products approvedby Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not coveredby the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
You can identify operating fluids approvedby
Mercedes-Benz by thefollowing inscriptions on
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids
is available at thefollowing locations:
Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
Rat a qualified specialist workshop
&WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea‐
tion of sparks must be avoided.
#Switch off the ignition and, if available,
thestationary heater, before and while
refuelling thevehicle.
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
therefuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe thefollowing:
#Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
Technical data 449
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel
Information on fuel grades forvehicles with
petrol engines
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
fuel that conformsto European EN 228,
or an equivalent specification.
Fuel of this specification may contain up to
10%ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suita‐
ble for use with E10 fuel.
Neverrefuel with one of thefollowing fuels:
Rdiesel
Rregular petrol with an octane number
lowerthan 91 RON
Rpetrol with more than 10%ethanol by vol‐
ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
Rpetrol with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30
Rpetrol with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#do not switch on the ignition.
#consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indications for fuel
apply to your vehicle:
1For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol‐
ume
2For petrol with maximum 10%ethanol by vol‐
ume
According to European standard EN 16942you
can find the compatibility indications at thefol‐
lowing locations:
Ron the instruction label on the fuel filler flap
Ron the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for
your vehicle throughout Europe
If theavailable fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐
phur, this can produce unpleasant odours.
450 Technical data
The recommended octane number foryour vehi‐
cle can also be found on the instruction label in
the fuel filler flap (/page 193).
As a temporary measure, if therecommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded petrol with at least:
RC180: 93 RON
Rall other models: 91 RON
This may reduce engine output and increase fuel
consumption.
Neverrefuel using petrol with an even lower
RON.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on additives in petrol
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
*NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive
may lead to malfunctions occurring.
#Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel
brands that have additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not
have sufficient additives. Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as a result. In this
case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz
service centre, the fuel may be mixed with the
cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing
ratios specified on the container.
Information on fuel grades forvehicles with
a diesel engine
General notes
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
&WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, theflash
point of the fuel mixture is lowerthan that of
pure diesel fuel.
While the engine is running, component
parts in theexhaust system may overheat
without warning.
#Neverrefuel using petrol in diesel
engines.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel
fuel that conformsto European stand‐
ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica‐
tion.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content less than
50 ppm.
#Vehicles without diesel particulate
filter: refuel using only diesel fuel with
a sulphur content less than 500 ppm.
Technical data 451
Neverrefuel with one of thefollowing fuels:
Rpetrol
Rmarine diesel
Rheating oil
Rpure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil
Rparaffin or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch the ignition on.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indication for fuel
applies to your vehicle:
1For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol‐
ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester)
According to European standard EN 16942you
can find the compatibility indications at thefol‐
lowing locations:
Ron the instruction label on the fuel filler flap
Ron the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for
your vehicle throughout Europe
Information on low outside temperatures
Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel
fuel as possible at the beginning of winter.
Before changing overto winter diesel fuel, the
fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When first
refuelling with winter diesel fuel, only refuel
using a small amount, e.g. to reserve level. The
fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuel‐
ling.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.
Tank content and fuel reserve
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
depending on thevehicle equipment.
452 Technical data
Capacity
Model Total capacity
C 300 d
C 300 d 4MATIC
50.0 litres
or
66.0 litres
C 200 (205.080)
C 300
C 300 4MATIC
C 400 4MATIC
66.0 litres
All other models 41.0 litres
or
66.0 litres
Modelof which reserve
fuel
All models7.0 litres
AdBlue®
Notes on AdBlue®
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
AdBlue®is a water-soluble fluid forthe NOx
exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.
*NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of
AdBlue®or the use of additive-enhanced
AdBlue®
The function of the NOx exhaust gas after‐
treatment can be impairedby the use of
unsuitable denoxification agents.
#Only use AdBlue®in accordance with
ISO 22241.
#Do not dilute AdBlue®with water.
#Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
*NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to
impurities in AdBlue®
Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:
Rincreased emission values
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
RNOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunc‐
tions
#Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.
AdBlue®residues crystallise after a period of
time, and contaminate the surfaces with which
they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces
with water as soon as possible.
When you open theAdBlue®tank, small
amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do
not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be
released. Only fill theAdBlue®tank in well-venti‐
lated areas.
Technical data 453
AdBlue®filling capacity and consumption
Total capacity of AdBlue®tank
ModelTotal capacity
All models 25 litres
AdBlue®consumption
Like fuel consumption, AdBlue®consumption is
highly dependent upon driving style and operat‐
ing conditions. Forthis reason, your vehicle's
actual consumption figures under normal operat‐
ing conditions may differ from the consumption
figures calculated. AdBlue®consumption is
between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Have
theAdBlue®supply checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop before making journeys outside
of Europe. Before a longer stay outside of
Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display theAdBlue®range and level
(/page 280).
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
*NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
cations explicitly prescribed forthe
service intervals.
#Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#Do not use additives.
#Have the engine oil renewed at regular
intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may
be used in Mercedes-Benz engines.
Further information on engine oil and oil filters is
available at thefollowing locations:
Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
Rat a qualified specialist workshop
Petrol engines: for certain countries, different
engine oils can be used in conjunction with
reduced maintenance intervals.
454 Technical data
%Further information on different engine oils
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Quality and capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Petrol enginesMB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
C160
C180
229.3, 229.5, 229.51,
229.52, 229.6
C 400 4MATIC 229.5, 229.6
All other models 229.51, 229.52,
229.61, 229.71
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Diesel enginesMB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 228.51, 229.31,
229.51, 229.52,
229.61, 229.71
If the engine oils listed in thetable are not avail‐
able, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the
following engine oils once only:
Rpetrol engines:
-C160, C 180: MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 229.3, 229.51, 229.52 or
ACEA A3/B4
-C 400 4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4
-all other models:MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
Rdiesel engines: ACEA C3
The following values referto an oil change,
including the oil filter.
Replacement amount
ModelReplacement
amount
C160
C180
7.0 litres
C 200 6.6 litres
Model Replacement
amount
C 300 d
C 300 d 4MATIC
6.8 litres
C 200 4MATIC
C 300 4MATIC
6.0 litres
C 400 4MATIC 6.5 litres
All other models 6.3 litres
Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapour pockets forming in the brake sys‐
tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low,
Technical data 455
vapour pockets may form in the brake sys‐
tem when the brakes are applied hard.
This impairs the braking effect.
#Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use brake fluid approvedby Mercedes-Benz
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
You can obtain further information on brake fluid
in thefollowing places:
Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids
-at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
Rat a qualified specialist workshop
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
&WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#Allow the engine to cool down before
youtop up the antifreeze.
#Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to thefiller opening.
#Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
component parts before starting the
vehicle.
*NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
ant
#Only add coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with therequired antifreeze pro‐
tection.
Information on coolant is available at thefol‐
lowing locations:
Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specification for
Operating Fluids 310.1
-at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
Rat a qualified specialist workshop
*NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
tected against overheating and corrosion at
high outside temperatures.
#Always use coolant approvedby
Mercedes-Benz.
#Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐
ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
456 Technical data
The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
concentrate in the engine cooling system should
be:
Ra minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -37 °C)
Ra maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45 °C)
Notes on windscreen washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/page 448).
&WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
theexhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to thefiller
opening.
*NOTE Damage to theexterior lighting
due to unsuitable windscreen washer
fluid
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may
damage the plastic surface of theexterior
lighting.
#Only use windscreen washer fluids
which are also suitable for use on plas‐
tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
WinterFit.
*NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windscreen washer fluids
#Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
terFit with other windscreen washer flu‐
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as thefill
level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
Recommended windscreen washer fluid:
RAbove freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
RBelow freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Forthe correct mixing ratio, referto the informa‐
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix thewasher fluid with the windscreen washer
fluid all year round.
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the
following factors:
Rtyres
Rload
Rcondition of the suspension
Roptional equipment
Technical data 457
Height when opened
Model 11Height
when
opened
C160
C180
C180 d
C 200 d
1766 mm
C 200
C 200 d (205.011 )
C 220 d
C 300 d
1763 mm
C 300 1768 mm
C 200 4MATIC (205.079) 1773 mm
All other models 1774 mm
Vehicle dimensions
All models
Vehicle length4686 mm
Vehicle width including out‐
side mirrors 2020 mm
Vehicle width excluding out‐
side mirrors 1810 mm
Wheelbase 2840 mm
Model Vehicle
height
C160
C180
C180 d
C 200 d
1445 mm
C 200
C 200 d (205.011 )
C 220 d
C 300 d
1442 mm
458 Technical data
Model Vehicle
height
C 300 1447 mm
C 200 4MATIC (205.079) 1449 mm
All other models 1452 mm
Weights and loads
Please note that forthe specified vehicle data:
Ritems of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the payload.
Rvehicle-specific weight information can be
found on thevehicle identification plate .
Roof load
All models
Maximum roof load 75 kg
Trailer hitch
General notes on the trailer hitch
Not all models can be used for trailer operation
(/page 268).
Modifications to the engine cooling system may
be necessary, depending on thevehicle model.
The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi‐
ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi‐
cle documents.
Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Mounting dimensions
1Fastening points
2Overhang dimension
3Rear axle centre line
Technical data 459
The overhang dimension and fastening points
are valid for a trailer hitch installed at thefac‐
tory.
Model 22Over‐
hang dimen‐
sion
All models1158 mm
Permissible towing capacity
The tongue weight is not included in thetowing
capacity.
Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a
minimum start-off gradeability of 8% from a
standstill)
Model Manual
trans‐
mission
Auto‐
matic
trans‐
mission
C160
C180
1400 kg 1800 kg
C180 d
C 200 d
1800 kg 1800 kg
All other models —1800 kg
Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a
minimum start-off gradeability of 12% from a
standstill)
Model Manual
trans‐
mission
Auto‐
matic
trans‐
mission
C160
C180
1400 kg 1800 kg
C180 d
C 200 d
1800 kg 1800 kg
All other models —1800 kg
460 Technical data
Permissible towing capacity, unbraked
Model Manual
trans‐
mission
Auto‐
matic
trans‐
mission
C160
C180
720kg 730kg
C180 d
C 200 d
710kg 750kg
C 200 (205.077) —710 kg
All other models —750 kg
Maximum tongue weight
*NOTE Damage caused by the trailer
coming loose
If thetongue weight used is too low, the
trailer may come loose.
#The tongue weight must not be below
50 kg.
#Use a tongue weight that is as close as
possible to the maximum permissible
tongue weight.
Tongue weight
Model Maximum tongue
weight
All models 75 kg
Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Axle load
Model Axle load
C160, manual trans‐
mission
C180, manual trans‐
mission
1185 kg
C160, automatic
transmission
C180, automatic
transmission
1195 kg
C180, automatic
transmission
C 200 d
C 200
C 220 d
1245 kg
C 200 4MATIC 1260 kg
C 220 d 4MATIC 1255 kg
C 300 d1280 kg
Technical data 461
Model Axle load
C 300 4MATIC 1235 kg
C 300 d 4MATIC 1275 kg
All other models 1240 kg
462 Technical data
Display messages
Introduction
Notes on display messages
Display messages appear on the multifunction
display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐
plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ
from the symbols on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages
are accompanied by awarning tone.
Please respond in accordance with the display
messages and follow the additional notes in this
Owner's Manual.
For some display messages, a symbol is also
shown:
R¤Further information
ROHide display message
You can select the desired symbol by swiping
left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the¤symbol to show further informa‐
tion on the multifunction display. Press theO
symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the¤button or the left-hand Touch
Control. The display messages are then stored in
the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as
quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐
play messages continuously until the cause of
the message has been rectified.
Calling up stored display messages
On-board computer:
4Service 51 message
If there are no display messages, No mes-
sagesappears on the multifunction display.
#Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#To exit the message memory: press the
¤button.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
!
÷
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*ABS and ESP®are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP®cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ABS and ESP®checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
!
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP®cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ABS and ESP®checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*ESP®is temporarily unavailable.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP®is malfunctioning
If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP®cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP®checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*ESP®is malfunctioning
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP®is malfunctioning
If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP®cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP®checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
T
!
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*EBD, ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP®are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP®cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!
Turn on the ignition to
release the parking brake
*The red!indicator lamp is lit.
You have attemptedto release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
#Switch on the ignition.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
!
Release parking brake
*The red!indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
RA condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (/page 206).
RYou are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/page 207).
#Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.
#Release the electric parking brake manually.
!
Parking brake See Owner's
Manual
*The yellow !indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
#Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.
#Apply the electric parking brake manually (/page 207).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also safeguard the parkedvehicle against rolling away.
The yellow !indicator lamp and thered!indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction‐
ing.
To release:
#Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.
#Release the electric parking brake manually (/page 207).
468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
or
#Release the electric parking brake automatically (/page 206).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow !indicator lamp is lit and thered!indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal‐
functioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
#Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.
To apply:
#Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/page 207).
To release:
#Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or thered!indicator lamp continues to flash:
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also safeguard the parkedvehicle against rolling away.
The yellow !indicator lamp is lit and thered!indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after
the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is
malfunctioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
If the battery charge level is too low:
#Charge the battery.
To apply:
#Switch off the ignition.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.
If the electric parking brake should not be applied, e.g. when washing thevehicle in an automatic car wash or when
having thevehicle towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having thevehicle towed with the
rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
#Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.
#Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/page 207).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also safeguard the parkedvehicle against rolling away.
To release:
#If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/page 207).
470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Risk of vehicle rolling away
Parking brake not applied
See Owner's Manual
*Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric parking brake has not been applied and you open the driver's
door.
#Apply the electric parking brake.
Brake immediately *Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
Atone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock thevehicle, thetone will become louder.
You cannot start the engine.
#Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.
You can restart the engine.
J
Check brake fluid level
*There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Stop thevehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐
ing.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Do not top up the brake fluid.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Do not top up the brake fluid.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Check brake pads See
Owner's Manual
*The brake pads have reached thewear limit.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power
When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Restraint sys. malfunction
Consult workshop
*The restraint system is faulty (/page 36).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in therestraint system
If therestraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, forexample.
#Have therestraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Recognition of a restraint system fault:
RThe restraint system warning lamp 6does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
RThe restraint system warning lamp 6lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front left malfunction Con-
sult workshop (Example)
*The corresponding restraint system is faulty (/page 36).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in therestraint system
If therestraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, forexample.
#Have therestraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Detection of a restraint system fault:
RThe restraint system warning lamp 6does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
RThe restraint system warning lamp 6lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
6
Left windowbag malfunc-
tion Consult work-
shop (Example)
*The corresponding windowbag is malfunctioning (/page 36).
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window airbag
The window airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in theevent of an accident
with high deceleration.
#Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front-passenger airbag dis-
abled See Owner's Manual
*The front passenger airbag has been deactivated although an adult or a person with an adult stature is on the front
passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, theweight the system detects may be too low.
&WARNING Risk of injury or evenfatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in theevent of an accident and cannot perform
its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, forexample, come into contact with thevehicle interior, espe‐
cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
#Be aware of thestatus of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Check thestatus of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/page 47).
#If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Front-passenger airbag
enabled See Owner's Man-
ual
*The front passenger airbag is enabled while thevehicle is in motion:
Reven when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the
front passenger seat
Reven when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to theweight applied to the seat.
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag
is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in theevent of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Ensure, both before and during the journey, that thestatus of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it;
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Check thestatus of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/page 47).
#If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions currently limited See
Owner's Manual
*Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE®PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially
available.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/page 215).
#Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#If the display message does not disappear, stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions limited See Owner's
Manual
*Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE®PLUS is malfunctioning.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See
Owner's Manual
*PRE‑SAFE®functions are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes me connect
Services limited See Own-
er's Manual
*Service limited.
At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
#Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/page 29).
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
G
Inoperative
*At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is
malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Radar sensors dirty See
Owner's Manual
*The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
Rdirt on the sensors
Rheavy rain or snow
Rextended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Pull over and stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Clean all sensors (/page 392).
#Restart the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
À
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break!
*ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/page 260).
#If necessary, take a break.
À
ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-
ative
*ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
¢
Lowering
*The vehicle level may be loweredforthefollowing reasons:
Ryou have selected a different drive program.
Ryou have exceeded the speed limit.
Ryou have changed thevehicle levelby pressing the button.
É
Vehicle rising
*Your vehicle is adjusting to the levelyou have selected.
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
É
Vehicle rising Please wait
*The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle is raised to the selected vehicle level.
#Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
É
Stop vehicle Vehicle too
low
*You have pulled away despite thevehicle level being too low.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
The vehicle is raised to the selected vehicle level.
#Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:
#Do not drive at speeds greaterthan 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
*NOTE The tyres of the front axle or the front wings could be damaged by large steering movements
#Avoid large steering movements while driving and listenfor scraping sounds.
#If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop thevehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐
ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
#Set a higher vehicle level (/page 241).
Depending on the malfunction, thevehicle is raised.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80
km/h
*AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
*NOTE The tyres of the front axle or the front wings could be damaged by large steering movements
#Avoid large steering movements while driving and listenfor scraping sounds.
#If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop thevehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐
ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
#Drive in a manner appropriate forthe current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
#Do not drive at speeds greaterthan 80 km/h.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Please reduce speed *You are driving toofast forthe selected vehicle level.
#In order to adjust thevehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 60 km/h.
#In order to adjust thevehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h.
Active Steering Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
*Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/page 231).
#Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#If necessary, clean the windscreen in the camera's field of vision.
#Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inop-
erative
*Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Ø*Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits(/page 231).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
#Take overthesteering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Beginning emergency stop *Your hands are not on thesteering wheel. Emergency stop is initiated (/page 235).
#Put your hands back on thesteering wheel.
You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of thefollowing actions:
Rsteering
Rbraking or accelerating
Rpressing a steering wheel button
Roperating Touch Control
Rdeactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Lane Keeping Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/page 265).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
inoperative
*Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Camera view restricted
See Owner's Manual
*Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted.
Possible causes:
Rdirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
Rheavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Pull over and stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Clean the windscreen.
Blind Spot Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
*Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/page 262).
#Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
#If necessary, clean therear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐
functioning.
Blind Spot Assist inopera-
tive
*Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist not availa-
ble when towing a trailer
See Owner's Manual
*When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/page 262).
#Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist
inoperative
*Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Active Blind Spot Assist
not available when towing
a trailer See Owner's Man-
ual
*When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
#Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative
See Owner's Manual
*Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
#Stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine.
#If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
*The HOLD function is deactivated because thevehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.
#Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions forthe HOLD function (/page 238).
ç
- - - km/h
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.
#Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/page 227).
ç
suspended
*Ifyou activate the accelerator pedal beyond theActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be put
into passive mode (/page 236).
484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
ç
Off
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, theActive Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/page 227).
Active Distance Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/page 225).
#Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Distance Assist inop-
erative
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist
available again
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/page 227).
¯
- - - km/h
*Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
#Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/page 223).
Cruise control inoperative *Cruise control is malfunctioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control and Limiter
inoperative
*Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control off *Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/page 221).
È
- - -km/h
*The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.
#Observe the activation conditions of the limiter (/page 223).
Limiter inoperative *The limiter is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Limiter passive *Ifyou depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode
(/page 223).
Speed limit (winter tyres)
XXX km/h
*You have reached thestored maximum speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
ð
Maximum speed exceeded
*The maximum permissible speed has been exceeded (for certain countries only).
#Drive more slowly.
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
?
Coolant Stop vehicle
Switch engine off
*The coolant is too hot.
#Stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
&WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you
could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
#In theevent of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call thefire service.
#Wait until the engine has cooled down.
#Make sure that the air supply to theradiator is not obstructed.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
Top up coolant See Own-
er’s Manual
*The coolant level is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
#Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
#Add coolant (/page 385).
?*The fan motor is defective.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
#
See Owner's Manual
*The battery is not being charged.
*NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's
Manual
*The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.
*NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Switch off the engine.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
12 V battery See Owner's
Manual
*The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.
#Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
#Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance.
The battery will charge.
If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#
Stop vehicle Leave engine
running
*The battery charge level is too low.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Leave the engine running.
#Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
#
48 V battery See Owner's
Manual
*The 48 V system has function restrictions. Convenience functions may be restricted.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Cannot start engine See
Owner's Manual
*The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longerstart the engine.
#Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
#Connect a suitable charger approvedby Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec‐
tion point of the12 V battery (/page 409).
The 48 V battery is charged via thevoltage converter in thevehicle.
Motor can be started again *The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via thevoltage converter.
#Start the engine and drive thevehicle for a while to charge the12 V battery and the 48 V battery.
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Û
Please wait Charging high-
voltage battery
*The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the12 V battery was being charged with a
suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.
The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via thevoltage converter. After a few minutes, theMotor can
be started again display message will be shown on the multifunction display.
#Start the engine.
#Drive thevehicle for a while to charge the12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting thecharger
from thevehicle.
If theMotor can be started again display message does not appear after a few minutes:
#Tryto start the engine again.
#If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
8
Reserve fuel level
*The fuel supply has dropped into thereserve range.
#Refuel.
!
Clean the fuel filter
*Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or thewater in the fuel filter needs to be drained.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
¸
Replace air cleaner
*Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
4
Check eng. oil lev. when
next refuelling
*The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#Check the engine oil level when next refuelling.
Top up the engine oil (/page 383).
Notes on engine oil (/page 454).
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
4
Add 1 litre engine oil when
next refuelling
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil.
Top up engine oil (/page 383).
Notes on engine oil (/page 454).
4
Engine oil level Stop vehi-
cle Switch engine off
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Switch off the engine.
#Top up with 1 l engine oil.
#Check the engine oil level.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Top up engine oil (/page 383).
Notes on engine oil (/page 454).
4
Engine oil level Reduce oil
level
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil siphoned off.
4
Engine oil pressure Stop
Switch off engine
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil pressure is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure
#Avoid driving with insufficient engine oil pressure.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
5
Engine oil level cannot be
measured
*The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Exhaust gas aftertreatment
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Ø
Refill AdBlue See Owner’s
Manual
*The AdBlue®level has fallen below thereserve range.
#Top up AdBlue®immediately (/page 197).
Ø
Top up AdBlue Emergency
op. in XXX miles See Own-
er's Manual
*The low AdBlue®level will lead to limited performance aftertheremaining distance displayed has been driven.
#Top up AdBlue®immediately (/page 197).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Ø
Top up AdBlue Perf.
reduced: XXX km/h No
start in XXX km
*The low AdBlue®level will lead to limited performance above the speed displayed.
Afterthe displayedremaining distance has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.
#Top up AdBlue®immediately (/page 197).
Ø
Refill AdBlue Eng. start not
possible
*The AdBlue®tank is empty. You can no longerstart the engine.
#Top up at least 4.5 l of AdBlue®(/page 197).
#Switch on the ignition.
You can restart the engine after approximately one minute.
¯
AdBlue system fault See
Owner's Manual
*The AdBlue®system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
¯
AdBlue system fault Emer-
gency op. in XXX km See
Owner's Manual
*The AdBlue®system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced aftertheremaining distance displayed has
been covered.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system fault Emer.
op.: max. XXX mph Start
not poss. in XXX miles
*Powerreduction due to theAdBlue®system fault. Afterthe distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer
be possible to start the engine.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system fault Engine
start not possible
*The AdBlue®system is malfunctioning. You can no longerstart the engine.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497
Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Apply brake to deselect
Park (P) position
*You have attemptedto shift the transmission out of position jand into another transmission position.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Shift the transmission to position k,ior h.
To shift out of P or N,
depress brake and start
engine
*You have attemptedto shift the transmission out of position jor iinto another transmission position.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Start the engine.
Risk of vehicle rolling
Driver door open and trans-
mission not in P
*The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k,ior h.
#Shift the transmission to position jwhen you park thevehicle.
N permanently active Risk
of vehicle rolling
*While thevehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shiftedto position i.
#Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when thevehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j.
#To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position hor k.
Only select Park (P) when
vehicle is stationary
*The transmission can only be shiftedto position jwhen thevehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to select R *You have tried to switch to transmission position k.
#Depress the brake pedal.
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Shift the transmission to position k.
Without changing gear,
consult workshop
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted.
#When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐
mission position.
#For all other transmission positions, park thevehicle safely.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Reversing not poss. Con-
sult workshop
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position kcannot be engaged.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction
Stop
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position iautomatically.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Switch the transmission to position j.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle Leave engine
running Wait Transmission
cooling
*The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Leave the engine running.
#Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Auxiliary battery malfunc-
tion
*The auxiliary battery forthe transmission is no longer being charged.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Until then, manually set the transmission to position jbefore you switch off the engine.
#Before leaving thevehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Depress clutch fully to
start engine
*You have attemptedto start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.
#Depress the clutch pedal and then start the engine.
The engine has stalled while thevehicle was pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal wasreleased tooquickly.
#Depress the clutch pedal again.
The engine will start automatically.
#Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away.
Clutch overheated Avoid
pulling away for XX:XX mins
*The clutch is under considerable load and is overheating.
Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances.
#Stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and leave the engine running.
The clutch will cool more quickly when the engine is running.
or
#If possible, continue driving at a steady speed and remove your foot from the clutch pedal. Do not ride the
clutch.
The clutch will cool while thevehicle is in motion.
When the clutch has cooled down, the display message will disappear.
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
_
Before starting the engine,
turn the steering wheel.
*Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric steering lock was unable to unlock thesteering.
#Switch off the ignition.
#To unlock thesteering, move thesteering wheel slightly to the left and right.
#Switch the ignition back on.
Ð
Steering malfunction See
Owner's Manual
*Vehicles with manual transmissions: the electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be lockedby
the electric steering lock.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If thesteering does not function as intended, thevehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501
Tyres
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Tyre pressure Check tyres *The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose thefollowing risks:
RThe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
RThe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of thevehicle.
#Observe therecommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
#Stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure (/page 421) and the tyres.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/page 429).
Check tyre pressures then
restart Run Flat Indicator
*The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/page 429).
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Run Flat Indicator inopera-
tive
*The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Tyre press. monitor cur-
rently unavailable
*There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are
received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
#Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
h
Tyre press. monitor inoper-
ative
*The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure
loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, forexample, affect thevehicle's handling characteristics, steering and
braking.
#Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
h
Tyre press. monitor inoper-
ative No wheel sensors
*The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
#Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
h
Wheel sensor(s) missing
*There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not
displayed.
#Have thefaulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Check tyre(s)
*The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose thefollowing risks:
RThe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
RThe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of thevehicle.
#Observe therecommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure (/page 421) and the tyres.
h
Rectify tyre pressure
*The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too
great.
#Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/page 424).
h
Warning tyre defect
*The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with aflat tyre
Flat tyres are dangerous in thefollowing ways:
RThe tyres can overheat and cause a fire.
R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of thevehicle.
#Do not drive with a flat tyre.
#Observethe notes on flat tyres.
Notes on flat tyres (/page 399).
#Stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#Check the tyres.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Tyre(s) overheated *At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value,
the tyres are displayed in yellow.
#Drive more slowly.
Reduce speed *At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value,
the tyres are displayed in yellow.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres may burst, particularly at high speeds.
#Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
#Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
À
Replace key See Owner's
Manual
*Vehicles with a digital vehicle key: only a few or no authorisations remain forstarting the engine.
#Make sure that the internet connection is not limited by certain mobile phone settings.
#Open the Mercedes me connect http://www.mercedes.me and call up the digital vehicle key service.
#Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.
#If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC).
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Vehicles with a digital vehicle keysticker: only afew or no authorisations remain forstarting the engine.
#Order a new digital vehicle keysticker from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect.
Á
Replace key
*The key needs to be replaced.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Á
Change key batteries
*The key battery is discharged.
#Replace the battery (/page 79).
Á
Key not detected (white
display message)
*The key is currently undetected.
#Change the location of thekey in thevehicle.
#If thekey is still not recognised, place it in the slot forstarting with thekey (/page 175).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Á
Key not detected (red dis‐
play message)
*The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in thevehicle.
The key is no longer in thevehicle and you switch off the engine:
RYou can no longerstart the engine.
RYou cannot centrally lock thevehicle.
#Ensure that thekey is in thevehicle.
If thekey detection function has a malfunction due to astrong radio signal source:
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Place thekey in the slot forstarting the engine with thekey (/page 175).
Á
Place the key in the
marked space See Owner's
Manual
*The key detection function is malfunctioning.
#Change the location of thekey in thevehicle.
#Place thekey in the slot forstarting the engine with thekey (/page 175).
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
d
Vehicle is operational
Switch off ignition before
exiting
*You are leaving thevehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
#When you leave thevehicle, switch off the ignition, secure thevehicle against rolling away and take thekey with
you.
#If you do not leave thevehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the12‑V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start thevehicle only using a donor battery (starting assis‐
tance).
ï
Trailer coupling extending…
*Extending or retracting the ball neck.
Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate theretracting or extending process using your hand, foot or other
aids. During theretracting or extending process, do not couple a trailer.
When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message disappears.
ï
Check trailer hitch lock
(white display message)
*The trailer tow hitch will not be operational when you drive with a trailer.
#Stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure (/page 269).
#If the ball neck is extended, press and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages beneath the
bumper.
#When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer tow hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note thereduced ground clearance due to the
unlocked ball neck.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The trailer tow hitch will not be operational when thevehicle is at a standstill.
#Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure (/page 269).
#If the ball neck is retracted: press and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages vertically in
the locked position and then engages beneath the bumper.
#If the ball neck is extended: press and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages beneath the
bumper.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer tow hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.
510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note thereduced ground clearance due to the
unlocked ball neck.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ï
Operation only possible in
transmission position P
*You have attemptedto displace the ball neck and the transmission is in position k,ior h.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Shift the transmission to position j.
ï
Operation only possible in
transmission position N
*Vehicles with manual transmission: you attemptedto swivel the ball neck and the transmission is not in neutral
i.
#Shift the transmission to neutral i.
Ù
Steering malfunction
Increased physical effort
See Owner's Manual
*The power assistance forthesteering is malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of thesteering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more forceto steer.
#If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Steering malfunction Stop
immediately See Owner's
Manual
*The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If thesteering does not function as intended, thevehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active bonnet malfunction
See Owner's Manual
*The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
C*At least one door is open.
#Close all doors.
M*The bonnet is open.
512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
&WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the engine bonnet unlocked
An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when thevehicle is in motion and block your view.
#Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.
#Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
#Stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#Close the bonnet.
N*The boot lid is open.
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if thevehicle is in motion.
#Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
#Close the boot lid.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
_
Rear left seat backrest not
locked (Example)
*The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
#Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
¥
Top up washer fluid
*The washer fluid level in thewasher fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
#Top up thewasher fluid (/page 386).
Climate control
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
&
inoperative See Owner's
Man.
*The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
#When thevehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attemptsto switch on
thestationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
#If thestationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
&
inoperative Battery low
*The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched itself off.
#Drive for an extended period until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
&
inoperative Refuel vehicle
*There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
#Refuel thevehicle.
Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
b
Left dipped beam (Example)
*The corresponding light source is defective.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
or
#Check whether you are permittedto replace the light source yourself (/page 151).
%LED light bulbs: the display message forthe corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp have failed.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
b
Malfunction See Owner's
Manual
*The exterior lighting is faulty.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/page 417).
b
Automatic driving lights
inoperative
*The light sensor is faulty.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch on headlamps
*You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
#Turn the light switch to theLor Ãposition.
b
Switch off lights
*You are leaving thevehicle and the lights are still switched on.
#Turn the light switch to theÃposition.
516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
b
Hazard warning lamps mal-
functioning
*The hazard warning lamp switch is faulty.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Intelligent Light System
inoperative
*The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of
the Intelligent Light System.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Light System inoper-
ative
*The active headlamps are faulty.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/page 146).
#Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist available again display message appears.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
inoperative
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Camera view restricted
See Owner's Manual
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:
Rdirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
Rheavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Pull over and stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Clean the windscreen.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/page 148).
#Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus available again display message appears.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus inoperative
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus Camera view restric-
ted See Owner's Manual
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:
Rdirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
Rheavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Pull over and stop thevehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#Clean the windscreen.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of warning and indicator lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
ignition is switched on. Some warning and indi‐
cator lamps may briefly light up or flash. This
behaviour is non-critical. These warning and indi‐
cator lamps indicate a malfunction only if they
light up or flash afterthe engine has been star‐
ted or during a journey.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519
Instrument display (standard)
Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit
Depending on the display setting, the positions
of the indicator lamps on the instrument display
may differ from theexample shown.
Warning and indicator lamps:
LLow beam(/page 141)
TStanding lights(/page 141)
KHigh beam(/page 143)
#! Turn signal lights(/page 143)
RRear fog light(/page 141)
6Restraint system(/page 521)
üSeat belt not fastened(/page 526)
JBrakes (yellow)(/page 521)
JBrakes (red)(/page 521)
!Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/page 521)
!Electric parking brake (red)
(/page 521)
!ABS malfunction(/page 521)
÷ESP®(/page 521)
åESP®OFF(/page 521)
LDistance warning(/page 527)
ÙElectric powersteering malfunction
(/page 533)
äAIRMATIC malfunction
(/page 527)
äDYNAMIC BODY CONTROL malfunc‐
tion (/page 527)
;Engine diagnostics(/page 528)
%Preglow
#Electrical fault(/page 528)
8Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐
tion indicator(/page 528)
?Coolant too hot/cold(/page 528)
hTyre pressure monitor(/page 531)
ïTrailer hitch is not operational or is
swiveling(/page 533)
520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
!
ABS warning lamp
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in
an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
÷
ESP®warning lamp flashes
The yellow ESP®warning lamp flashes while thevehicle is in motion.
At least one wheel and tyre assembly has reached its traction limit (/page 211).
#Adapt your driving styleto suit theroad and weather conditions.
÷
ESP®warning lamp lights
up
The yellow ESP®warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP®is malfunctioning
Other drive systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP®is malfunctioning
If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP®cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP®checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
å
ESP®OFF warning lamp
The yellow ESP®OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP®is deactivated.
&WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP®deactivated
If ESP®is deactivated, ESP®cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The availability of further driving safety systems
is also limited.
#Drive on carefully.
#Only deactivate ESP®for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP®cannot be activated, ESP®is malfunctioning.
#Have ESP®checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Observe the notes on deactivating ESP®(/page 211).
J
Brake system warning lamp
(yellow)
The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 523
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to thevehicle in front.
#If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe it.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
J
Brake system warning lamp
(red)
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
RThe brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
RThere is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
#Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Stop thevehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
524 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Do not top up the brake fluid.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied
!
Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 525
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
The redrestraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is faulty (/page 36).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in therestraint system
If therestraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not
deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, forexample.
#Have therestraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Seat belt
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
7
Seat belt warning lamp
lights up
The red seat belt warning lamp will light up once the engine has started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#Fasten your seat belt (/page 40).
526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
7
Seat belt warning lamp
flashes
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while thevehicle is in motion.
#Fasten your seat belt(/page 40).
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
#Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
L
Warning lamp for distance
warning function
The red distance warning lamp lights up while thevehicle is in motion.
The distance to thevehicle in front is too small forthe speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
#Be prepared to brake immediately.
#Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/page 215).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 527
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
ä
Suspension warning lamp
The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is on.
The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is on.
There is a fault with the AIRMATIC.
There is a fault in theDYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
;
Engine diagnosis warning
lamp
The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, theexhaust system or the fuel system.
The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
#Have thevehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.
#Start the engine threeto four times afterrefuelling.
If theyellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
be checked.
528 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#
Electrical fault warning
lamp
The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The fuel supply has dropped into thereserve range.
#Refuel.
?
Coolant warning lamp
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
RThe temperature sensor is malfunctioning
RThe coolant level is too low
RThe air supply to theradiator is obstructed
RThe radiator fan is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 °C.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 529
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
&WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you
could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
#In theevent of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call thefire service.
#Stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of thetemperature scale:
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
or
#Exit thevehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
#Check the coolant level (/page 385).
#Make sure that the air supply to theradiator is not obstructed.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
530 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tyres
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
h
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up
The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose thefollowing risks:
RThe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
RThe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of thevehicle.
#Observe therecommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
#Stop thevehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 531
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
h
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp
flashes
The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in
one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, forexample, affect thevehicle's handling characteristics, steering and
braking.
#Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
532 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
ï
Trailer tow hitch warning
lamp
The red trailer tow hitch warning lamp is on.
The trailer tow hitch is not operational or swivels.
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
If the trailer hitch swivels:
#Wait until the ball coupling has reached the operational position.
Ù
Warning lamp for electric
powersteering
The redwarning lamp for electric powersteering is lit while the engine is running.
The power-assistedsteering or thesteering itself is malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If thesteering does not function as intended, thevehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 533
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MMSolutions
#Pull over and stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
534 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC ..................................................... 193
Function .............................................. 193
12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle)
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V)
48 V on-board electrical system
Operating safety .................................... 23
230 V socket
see Socket (230 V)
360° Camera ........................................... 250
Function .............................................. 250
Opening the camera cover (reversing
camera) ...............................................254
Selecting a view .................................. 254
Setting favourites ................................ 254
Switching automatic operation
on/off (reversing camera) ...................254
A
A/C function
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 163
Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 163
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .............210
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Access data
Editing (Bluetooth®) .............................357
Setting (Bluetooth®) ............................ 356
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment
Mercedes me connect .........................350
Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating ......................... 78
Activating/deactivating automatic
volume adjustment
Burmester®surround sound system ....377
Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 262
Activating/deactivating .......................265
Brake application ................................. 263
Function .............................................. 262
System limitations ...............................262
Trailer operation .................................. 263
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 379
Operation ............................................ 379
Resetting ............................................. 379
Active Brake Assist
Function/notes .................................... 215
Setting ................................................. 221
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 225
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............235
Active Lane Change Assist .................. 234
Calling up a speed ............................... 227
Displays in the instrument display .......236
Function .............................................. 225
Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 227
Requirements: .....................................227
Route-based speed adaptation ............230
Selecting ............................................. 227
Steering wheel buttons ........................ 227
Storing a speed ................................... 227
Switching off/deactivating .................. 227
Switching on/activating ......................227
System limitations ...............................225
Active Emergency Stop Assist ...............235
Index 535
Active headlamps .................................... 145
Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 234
Activating/deactivating .......................235
Function .............................................. 234
Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 265
Activating/deactivating .......................267
Activating/deactivating thewarning ...268
Function .............................................. 265
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 268
System limitations ...............................265
Trailer operation .................................. 265
Active Parking Assist .............................. 254
Cross Traffic Alert ............................... 260
Drive Away Assist ................................ 259
Exiting a parking space ........................ 257
Function .............................................. 254
Manoeuvring assistance ...................... 260
Parking ................................................ 256
System limitations ...............................254
Active Service System PLUS
see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... 229
Display ................................................ 229
Function .............................................. 229
Active Steering Assist .............................231
Activating/deactivating .......................233
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............235
Active Lane Change Assist .................. 234
Displays in the instrument display .......236
Function .............................................. 231
System limitations ...............................231
Adaptive brake lights .............................. 221
Adaptive cruise control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
see Intelligent Light System
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function .............................................. 146
Switching on/off ................................. 147
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Switching on/off ................................. 149
AdBlue®.................................................... 453
Additives .............................................453
Capacity .............................................. 454
Fill level ...............................................280
Notes ................................................... 196
Purity ................................................... 453
Range .................................................. 280
Topping up ...........................................197
Additional door lock .................................. 81
Additional value range
Setting display content ........................ 279
Additives.................................................. 454
AdBlue®............................................... 453
Engine oil ............................................. 454
Fuel ...................................................... 451
Additives (AdBlue®)
see AdBlue®
Additives (engine oil)
see Additives
Additives (fuel)
see Fuel
Address book
see Contacts
Adjusting the balance/fader
Burmester®surround sound system ....377
Adjusting the headlamp range ............... 142
Adjusting the sound focus
Burmester®surround sound system ....377
536 Index
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings
Burmester®surround sound system ....376
ADS PLUS damping system
see AIRMATIC
Adverseweather light .............................146
After-sales service centre
see ASSYST PLUS
Air conditioning system
see Climate control
Air distribution
Setting .................................................161
Air freshener system
see Fragrance system
Air inlet
see Air-water duct
Air pressure
see Tyre pressure
Air suspension
see AIRMATIC
Air vents ................................................... 171
Adjusting (front) ................................... 171
Adjusting (rear) .................................... 171
Air vents
see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode ............................ 164
Air-water duct .......................................... 386
Keeping free ........................................386
Airbag .........................................................42
Activation .............................................. 36
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....42
Installation locations .............................42
Knee airbag ........................................... 42
Overview ............................................... 42
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....47
Protection ..............................................43
Reduced protection ...............................44
Side impact airbag ................................ 42
Window airbag ....................................... 42
Airflow
Setting .................................................161
AIRMATIC .................................................239
Setting ................................................. 241
Suspension .......................................... 239
AIRPANEL (Care) ...................................... 392
Alarm
see Panic alarm
Alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
All-wheel drive
see 4MATIC
Alternative route
see Route
Ambient lighting
Setting (multimedia system) ................150
Android Auto ............................................ 346
Connecting a mobile phone ................. 347
Ending ................................................. 347
Information .......................................... 346
Overview ............................................. 346
Sound settings .................................... 347
Transferred vehicle data ......................348
Animals
Pets in thevehicle ..................................76
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Index 537
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anti-theft protection
Additional door lock ...............................81
Immobiliser ......................................... 102
Anti-theft protection
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anticipatory occupant protection
see PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay™ ....................................... 344
Connecting an iPhone®....................... 345
Ending .................................................346
Notes .................................................. 345
Overview ............................................. 344
Sound settings .................................... 346
Transferred vehicle data ......................348
Ashtray
Front centre console ........................... 134
Rear passenger compartment .............135
Using ................................................... 134
Assistance systems
see Driving safety system
Assistant display
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 281
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 378
Battery disconnection periods ............. 379
Displaying the service due date ........... 378
Function/notes ................................... 378
Regular maintenance work .................. 378
Special service requirements .............. 378
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................103
Deactivating the alarm ........................ 103
Function .............................................. 103
Function of interior protection .............104
Priming/deactivating interior protec‐
tion ...................................................... 105
Priming/deactivating tow-away pro‐
tection ................................................. 104
Tow-away protection function .............. 103
ATTENTION ASSIST ......................... 260, 262
Function .............................................. 260
Setting ................................................. 262
System limitations ...............................260
Attention assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Audio 20
see Multimedia system
Audio mode
Connecting USB devices ..................... 366
Copyrights ...........................................363
Information .......................................... 362
Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 363
Media search ....................................... 367
Overview ............................................. 365
Pause and playback function ...............366
Selecting a track ................................. 366
Selecting playback options .................. 366
Switching on media mode ...................363
Track list .............................................. 366
Authorised workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights ......................... 142
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 179
538 Index
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 179
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag deactivation system
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff ........................................... 45, 47
Function of the automatic front
passenger front airbag deactivation
system ................................................... 45
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....47
Automatic mirrorfolding function
Activating/deactivating .......................159
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 187
Drive program display .......................... 185
Drive programs .................................... 184
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 184
Engaging drive position ....................... 189
Engaging neutral .................................. 189
Engaging park position ........................ 189
Engaging reversegear .........................189
Kickdown ............................................. 191
Manual gear changing .........................190
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .........190
Transmission position display .............. 187
Transmission positions ........................ 187
Automatic transmission (problem)
see Transmission (problem)
Axle load
Permissible .......................................... 446
Trailer operation .................................. 461
B
Bag hook .................................................. 126
Ball neck
Folding out/in .....................................269
BAS (Brake Assist System) .....................210
Battery
Charging (Remote Online) .................... 176
Key ........................................................ 79
Remote control (stationary heater) ...... 169
Battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) ....................................... 411
Charging .............................................. 409
Charging (Remote Online) .................... 176
Notes .................................................. 406
Notes (starting assistance and
charging) .............................................407
Replacing .............................................411
Starting assistance .............................. 409
Belt
see Seat belt
Bicycle rack
Trailer operation .................................. 272
Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 262
Activating/deactivating .......................265
Function .............................................. 262
System limitations ...............................262
Blower
see Climate control
BlueTEC
see AdBlue®
Bluetooth®............................................... 299
Information .......................................... 299
Setting up an Internet connection ....... 356
Switching on/off ................................. 299
Switching profile (DUN/PAN) .............. 357
Index 539
Bluetooth®audio
Activating .............................................371
De-authorising (de-registering) the
device .................................................. 372
Information .......................................... 369
Overview ............................................. 370
Searching for a track ........................... 372
Searching for and authorising the
device .................................................. 371
Selecting a media player ..................... 372
Switching device via NFC .................... 372
Bonnet
Resetting (active bonnet) ..................... 379
Boot box
see EASY-PACK boot box
Boot lid
Activating/deactivating thetailgate
opening limiter ...................................... 92
Closing .................................................. 88
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...........................90
Locking separately ................................. 91
Opening .................................................87
Opening dimensions ............................457
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Notes .................................................. 455
Brake force distribution
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 214
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 210
Active Brake Assist .............................. 215
Adaptive brake lights ...........................221
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................210
Driving tips .......................................... 177
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 214
HOLD function .....................................238
Limited braking effect (salt-treated
roads) .................................................. 177
New/replaced brakepads/brake
discs .................................................... 177
Running-in notes ..................................177
Braking assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown
Overview of the help functions .............. 18
Tow-starting .........................................416
Towing away ......................................... 412
Transporting thevehicle ....................... 414
Wheel change ...................................... 434
Breakdown
see Flat tyre
Breakdown assistance call
see Mercedes me connect
Burmester®surround sound system .....376
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 377
Adjusting the sound focus ................... 377
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ................................................ 376
Automatic volume adjustment .............377
Calling up the sound menu .................. 376
Information ..........................................376
Switching the surround sound on/off
.............................................................377
Buttons
Steering wheel .....................................276
540 Index
C
Call list
Making a call .......................................343
Overview ............................................. 342
Calling up the sound menu
Burmester®surround sound system ....376
Calls .......................................................... 339
Accepting ............................................ 339
Activating functions during a call ........ 339
Calls with several participants .............339
Declining ............................................. 339
Ending a call ........................................ 339
Incoming call during an existing call .... 340
Making ................................................ 339
Viatheoverhead control panel
(Mercedes me connect) ......................349
Camera
see 360° Camera
see Reversing camera
Car key
see Key
Car wash
see Care
Car wash (care) ....................................... 387
Care ..........................................................394
Air-water duct ...................................... 386
AIRPANEL ............................................ 392
Car wash ............................................. 387
Carpet .................................................394
Decorative foil .....................................390
Display ................................................ 394
EASY-PACK boot box ...........................394
Exterior lighting ................................... 392
High-pressure cleaner .........................387
Matt finish ........................................... 389
Paintwork ............................................ 389
Plastic trim .......................................... 394
Real wood/trim elements .................... 394
Reversing camera ................................ 392
Roof lining ...........................................394
Seat belt .............................................. 394
Seat cover ........................................... 394
Sensors ............................................... 392
Tailpipes .............................................. 392
Trailer hitch ......................................... 392
Washing by hand ................................. 388
Wheels/rims ....................................... 392
Windows .............................................. 392
Wiper blades .......................................392
Carpet (Care) ............................................ 394
Changing bulbs ........................................ 151
Dipped beam ....................................... 152
Fitting/removing cover (front wheel
arch) .................................................... 152
Main beam .......................................... 152
Notes ................................................... 151
Opening/closing the side trim pan‐
els .......................................................153
Overview .............................................. 151
Reversing lights ...................................153
Turn signal light (front) ........................ 152
Turn signal lights (rear) ........................ 153
Changing gears ........................................ 190
Manually ..............................................190
Changing hub caps ................................. 435
Changing the lights
Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped
beam) ................................................... 141
Charging
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 409
USB port .............................................. 137
Index 541
Chassis
Damping characteristics ...................... 239
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 239
Child safety lock
Rear door ...............................................74
Rear side windows ................................. 75
Child seat
Approval categories ...............................58
Attaching (notes) ................................... 57
Basic instructions .................................. 51
Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 72
Front passenger seat (without auto‐
matic airbag shutoff) ............................. 71
ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 64
Notes on risks and dangers ...................52
Recommended child restraint sys‐
tems ...................................................... 55
Seats suitable for belt-securedchild
restraint systems ................................... 68
Seats suitable for i‑Size child
restraint systems ................................... 63
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child
restraint systems ................................... 60
Securing on the front passenger seat ....73
Securing on therear seat ...................... 70
TopTether ..............................................66
Children
Avoiding dangers in thevehicle .............52
Basic instructions .................................. 51
Chock .......................................................433
Storage location ..................................433
Chock
see Chock
Cigarette lighter
Front centre console ........................... 135
City lighting .............................................146
Cleaning
see Care
Climate control ........................................ 161
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (control panel) .......................163
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (multimedia system) .............. 163
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nisation function (control panel) .......... 164
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nisation function (multimedia sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 164
Air distribution settings .......................163
Air-recirculation mode ......................... 164
Automatic control ................................ 163
Climate style function .......................... 163
Defrosting the windscreen ...................161
Demisting windows .............................. 164
Front air vents ...................................... 171
Inserting/removing theflacon (fra‐
grance system) .................................... 165
Ionisation .............................................165
Note ..................................................... 161
Rear air vents ....................................... 171
Rear operating unit .............................. 161
Residual heat ....................................... 164
Sets the airflow .................................... 161
Setting rear climate control (multi‐
media system) .....................................164
Setting the air distribution ...................161
Setting the climate style ......................163
Setting the fragrance system ............... 165
Setting thetemperature ....................... 161
Stationary heater/ventilation .............. 166
Switching on/off ................................. 162
Switching therear window heater
on/off .................................................. 161
THERMATIC control panel .................... 161
542 Index
THERMOTRONIC control panel .............161
Ventilating thevehicle (convenience
opening) ................................................ 95
Climate style
Function .............................................. 163
Setting ................................................. 163
Cockpit .........................................................6
Overview .................................................6
Coffee cup symbol
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Collapsible spare wheel .................. 441, 442
Notes ...........................................441,442
Removing ............................................. 441
Combination switch ................................ 143
Compass ...................................................331
Computer
see On-board computer
Connection status
Displaying ............................................ 358
Overview .............................................358
Connectivity
Switching transmission of thevehicle
position on/off .................................... 299
Contacts ................................................... 340
Calling up ............................................. 341
Deleting ............................................... 342
Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 340
Importing ............................................. 341
Importing (overview) ............................ 341
Information .......................................... 340
Making a call .......................................342
Name format .......................................341
Options ................................................ 342
Storing ................................................ 342
Controller
Operating ............................................ 290
Convenience closing ................................. 95
Convenience opening ................................ 95
Coolant (engine)
Check level .......................................... 385
Notes .................................................. 456
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ...................................................34
Cornering light .........................................145
Cross Traffic Alert ...................................260
Crosswind Assist
Function/notes .................................... 214
Cruise control .......................................... 221
Activating ............................................ 223
Buttons ................................................ 223
Calling up a speed ............................... 223
Deactivating ........................................ 223
Function .............................................. 221
Requirements ...................................... 223
Selecting .............................................223
Setting a speed ................................... 223
Storing a speed ................................... 223
System limitations ...............................221
Cup holder
Rear .....................................................133
Cup holder in the centre console
Installing/removing .............................132
installing/removing (automatic
transmission) ....................................... 132
D
Damage detection (parked vehicle) .......207
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Index 543
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument lighting
Data acquisition
Vehicle ................................................... 31
Data import/export ................................ 302
Function/notes ................................... 302
Importing/exporting ........................... 302
Data storage
Electronic control units .......................... 31
Online services ...................................... 33
Vehicle ................................................... 31
Date
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 298
Deactivating the alarm (ATA).................. 103
Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity
Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 25
Jack .......................................................28
TIREFIT kit ............................................. 29
Wireless vehicle components ................25
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)
...................................................................390
DeNOx agent
see AdBlue®
Designs
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 278
Destination .............................................. 323
Editing intermediate destinations ........ 313
Editing the previous destinations ........ 323
External ...............................................324
Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 323
Saving as global favourite .................... 323
Storing a map position ........................ 323
Destination entry .................................... 308
Entering 3 word addresses .................. 314
Entering a POI or address .................... 308
Entering an intermediate destination ...312
Entering geo-coordinates ..................... 314
Selecting a contact .............................. 313
Selecting a POI ..................................... 311
Selecting from the map ....................... 314
Selecting previous destinations ...........311
Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection ............................29
Diesel
Low outside temperatures ...................451
Notes ................................................... 451
Digital Owner's Manual ............................20
Digital speedometer................................ 281
Digital Vehicle Keysticker
Locking thevehicle ................................ 83
Starting thevehicle .............................. 174
Unlocking thevehicle ............................83
Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system
Dipped beam
Changing bulbs .................................... 152
Setting ................................................. 149
DIRECT SELECT lever............................... 187
Engaging drive position ....................... 189
Engaging neutral .................................. 189
Engaging park position ........................ 189
Engaging park position automatically .. 189
Engaging reversegear .........................189
Function .............................................. 187
544 Index
Display
Care .................................................... 394
Display (multimedia system)
Settings ...............................................297
Display (on-board computer)
Displays on the multifunction display .. 279
Display content
Setting the additional value range ....... 279
Display message .....................................463
Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 463
Notes .................................................. 463
Display messages
¯- - - km/h ................................... 485
ç- - - km/h ................................... 484
È- - - km/h ................................... 486
#12 V battery See Owner's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 489
#48 V battery See Owner's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 490
Active Blind Spot Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual .........483
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative .... 483
Active Blind Spot Assist not available
when towing a trailer See Owner's
Manual ................................................ 484
Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐
er's Manual .......................................... 512
Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐
rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 476
Active Brake Assist Functions limited
See Owner's Manual ............................ 476
Active Distance Assist available
again ...................................................485
Active Distance Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual .........485
Active Distance Assist inoperative ...... 485
Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera
view restricted See Owner's Manual ... 482
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual .........481
Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐
tive ...................................................... 482
bActive Light System inoperative ... 517
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐
er's Manual ......................................... 484
Active Steering Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual .........480
Active Steering Assist inoperative .......481
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera
view restricted See Owner's Manual .... 518
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual .........517
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera‐
tive .......................................................518
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cam‐
era view restricted See Owner's
Manual ................................................. 519
Index 545
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐
rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐
ual ........................................................ 518
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐
erative .................................................. 518
¯AdBlue system fault Emer. op.:
max. XXX mphStart not poss. in XXX
miles .................................................... 497
¯AdBlue system fault Emer‐
gency op. in XXX km See Owner's
Manual ................................................ 497
¯AdBlue system fault Engine
start not possible ................................ 497
¯AdBlue system fault See Own‐
er's Manual .........................................496
4Add 1 litre engine oil when next
refuelling ............................................. 493
Apply brake to deselect Park (P)
position ...............................................498
Apply brake to select R ....................... 498
ÀATTENTION ASSIST inoperative ... 478
ÀATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break! .................................................. 478
bAutomatic driving lights inoper‐
ative ..................................................... 516
Auxiliary battery malfunction .............. 500
_Before starting the engine, turn
thesteering wheel. .............................. 501
Beginning emergency stop .................. 481
Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐
ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 482
Blind Spot Assist inoperative ............... 483
Blind Spot Assist not available when
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ...483
Brake immediately ............................... 471
Cannot start engine See Owner's
Manual ................................................ 490
ÁChange key batteries ...................507
JCheck brake fluid level................ 471
Check brake pads See Owner's Man‐
ual .......................................................472
4Check eng. oil lev. when next
refuelling ............................................. 492
ïCheck trailer hitch lock (white
display message) .................................509
Check tyre pressuresthen restart
Run Flat Indicator ................................ 502
hCheck tyre(s) ............................... 504
!Clean the fuel filter ...................... 491
Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away
for XX:XX mins .................................... 500
?Coolant Stop vehicle Switch
engine off ............................................ 487
Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐
tive ...................................................... 486
Cruise control inoperative ................... 485
Cruise control off ................................ 486
!currently unavailable See Own‐
er's Manual .........................................464
546 Index
÷currently unavailable See Own‐
er's Manual .........................................465
Depress clutch fully to start engine .....500
5Engine oil level cannot be
measured ............................................ 495
4Engine oil levelReduce oil level...494
4Engine oil levelStop vehicle
Switch engine off ................................ 493
4Engine oil pressure Stop Switch
off engine ............................................ 494
äFault Drive at max. 80 km/h .......480
6Front left malfunction Consult
workshop (Example) ............................473
Front-passenger airbag disabled See
Owner's Manual ................................... 474
Front-passenger airbag enabled See
Owner's Manual ................................... 475
bHazard warning lamps mal‐
functioning ...........................................517
&inoperative Battery low ................ 515
&inoperative Refuel vehicle ............ 515
&inoperative See Owner's Man. ..... 514
!inoperative See Owner's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 465
÷inoperative See Owner's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 466
Tinoperative See Owner's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 467
GInoperative .................................. 477
bIntelligent Light System inoper‐
ative ..................................................... 517
ÁKey not detected (red display
message).............................................508
ÁKey not detected (white display
message).............................................507
bLeft dipped beam (Example) ........ 515
6Left windowbag malfunction
Consult workshop (Example) ................474
Limiter inoperative .............................. 486
Limiter passive .................................... 486
¢Lowering ..................................... 478
bMalfunction See Owner's Man‐
ual ........................................................ 516
ðMaximum speed exceeded ..........487
Mercedes me connect Services limi‐
ted See Owner's Manual ...................... 476
Motor can be started again .................490
N permanently active Risk of vehicle
rolling .................................................. 498
çOff ...............................................485
ëOff ............................................... 484
Only select Park (P) when vehicle is
stationary ............................................ 498
ïOperation only possible in
transmission position N .......................511
ïOperation only possible in
transmission position P ........................ 511
!Parking brake See Owner's
Manual ................................................ 468
Index 547
ÁPlace thekey in the marked
space See Owner's Manual ................. 508
Please reduce speed ...........................480
ÛPlease wait Charging high-volt‐
age battery .......................................... 491
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's
Manual ................................................. 476
Radar sensors dirty See Owner's
Manual ................................................ 477
_Rear left seat backrest not
locked (Example) .................................. 514
hRectify tyre pressure ................... 505
Reduce speed ...................................... 506
ØRefill AdBlue Eng. start not pos‐
sible .................................................... 496
ØRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Man‐
ual .......................................................495
!Release parking brake .................468
¸Replace air cleaner .....................492
ÀReplace key See Owner's Man‐
ual .......................................................506
ÁReplace key.................................507
8Reserve fuel level........................ 491
6Restraint sys. malfunction Con‐
sult workshop ...................................... 472
Reversing not poss. Consult work‐
shop ....................................................499
Risk of vehicle rolling away Parking
brake not applied See Owner's Man‐
ual ........................................................ 471
Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door
open and transmission not in P ...........498
Run Flat Indicator inoperative ............. 503
#See Owner's Manual ................... 488
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h ... 486
ÙSteering malfunction Increased
physical effort See Owner's Manual ..... 511
ÐSteering malfunction See Own‐
er's Manual .......................................... 501
ÙSteering malfunction Stop
immediately See Owner's Manual ........ 512
Stop vehicle Leave engine running
Wait Transmission cooling ...................499
#Stop vehicle Leave engine run‐
ning ..................................................... 490
#Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐
ual .......................................................489
ÉStop vehicle Vehicle too low ........ 479
çsuspended ..................................484
bSwitch off lights ........................... 516
bSwitch on headlamps ................... 516
To shift out of P or N, depress brake
and start engine .................................. 498
ØTop up AdBlue Emergency op.
in XXX miles See Owner's Manual ....... 495
ØTop up AdBlue Perf.reduced:
XXX km/h No start in XXX km ............ 496
Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual ... 488
¥Top up washer fluid ...................... 514
548 Index
ïTrailer coupling extending… ......... 509
Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 499
!Turn on the ignition to release
the parking brake ................................ 467
hTyre press. monitor currently
unavailable .......................................... 503
hTyre press. monitor inoperative
No wheel sensors ................................ 504
hTyre press. monitor inoperative ...503
Tyre pressure Check tyres ...................502
Tyre(s) overheated ...............................506
dVehicle is operational Switch
off ignition before exiting .................... 509
ÉVehicle rising Please wait ............ 479
ÉVehicle rising ...............................478
hWarning tyre defect .....................505
hWheel sensor(s) missing ............. 504
Without changing gear, consult work‐
shop ....................................................499
Display on the windscreen
see Head-up display
Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance recorder
see Trip distance
DISTRONIC
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door
Additional door lock ...............................81
Child safety lock (rear door) ...................74
Locking (emergency key) .......................86
Opening (from the inside) ......................82
Unlocking (emergency key) ...................86
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................82
Door control panel .....................................16
Drawbar
see Tow-bar system
Drive Away Assist .................................... 259
Drive Away Assist
see Protection against collision
Drive position
Engaging ..............................................189
Drive program display ............................. 185
Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Driver's seat
see Seat
Driving abroad
Symmetrical dipped beam ...................141
Driving lights
see Automatic driving lights
Driving safety system .............................209
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 210
Active Brake Assist .............................. 215
Adaptive brake lights ...........................221
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................210
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 214
ESP®Crosswind Assist ........................ 214
ESP®trailer stabilisation ...................... 214
Overview ............................................. 209
Radar sensors .....................................209
Responsibility ...................................... 209
STEER CONTROL ................................. 215
Driving system
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 239
Index 549
Driving system
see 360° Camera
see Active Blind Spot Assist
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
see Active Emergency Stop Assist
see Active Lane Change Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Parking Assist
see Active Speed Limit Assist
see Active Steering Assist
see AIRMATIC
see ATTENTION ASSIST
see Blind Spot Assist
see Cruise control
see Driving safety system
see HOLD function
see Limiter
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
see Reversing camera
Driving tips
Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped
beam) ...................................................141
General driving tips .............................177
Running-in notes ..................................177
Drowsiness detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
Chassis ................................................ 239
Dynamic handling control system
see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 184
Configuring drive program I ................. 185
Displaying engine data ........................ 185
Displaying vehicle data ........................ 185
Drive program display .......................... 185
Drive programs .................................... 184
Function .............................................. 184
Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)
.............................................................185
Selecting the drive program ................185
Showing operation feedback ............... 185
E
E10 ............................................................ 450
Easy entry feature
Function/notes .................................... 118
Setting ................................................. 119
Easy exit feature
Function/notes .................................... 118
Setting ................................................. 119
EASY-PACK boot box ................................ 129
Adjusting the height to any position .... 127
Care .................................................... 394
Installing/removing .............................129
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion)
Function/notes .................................... 214
ECO Assist
Displaying ............................................ 184
Function/notes ................................... 182
ECO display
Function ............................................... 181
Resetting ............................................. 282
ECO start/stop function ......................... 179
Automatic engine start ........................ 179
Automatic engine stop .........................179
Operation ............................................ 179
Switching off/on ................................. 181
Electric parking brake ............................ 205
Applying automatically ........................ 205
Applying or releasing manually ............ 207
550 Index
Emergency braking .............................. 207
Releasing automatically .......................206
Electrical fuses
see Fuses
Electromagnetic compatibility
Declaration of conformity ......................25
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Fire extinguisher ..................................399
First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 398
Overview of the help functions .............. 18
Removing thewarning triangle ............ 398
Safetyvest ........................................... 397
Setting up thewarning triangle ...........398
Emergency braking ................................. 207
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call system
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency engine start .......................... 416
Emergency key
Inserting/removing ............................... 79
Locking a door .......................................86
Unlocking a door ...................................86
Emergency operation mode
Starting thevehicle .............................. 175
Emergency spare wheel .........................440
Notes .................................................. 440
Removing ............................................ 440
Engine
ECO start/stop function ......................179
Engine number ....................................446
Starting (Digital Vehicle Keysticker) .... 174
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 175
Starting (mobile phone) .......................174
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 176
Starting (start/stop button) .................173
Starting assistance .............................. 409
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 199
Engine bonnet
Function (active bonnet) ...................... 379
Opening/closing ................................. 380
Engine data
Displaying ............................................ 185
Engine electronics
Notes .................................................. 444
Engine number ........................................ 446
Engine oil .................................................383
Additives .............................................454
Capacity .............................................. 455
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick ............................................... 382
Checking the oil level using the on-
board computer ................................... 383
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ...............455
Quality ................................................. 455
Topping up ...........................................383
Entering characters
Function/notes ................................... 295
On thetouchpad .................................. 297
Using the controller ............................. 296
EQ Boost
Glide mode .......................................... 191
Operating safety .................................... 23
ERA-GLONASS test mode
Starting/ending .................................. 354
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)
Index 551
ESP®
Crosswind Assist .................................214
Trailer stabilisation ...............................214
ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) ....... 211
Activating/deactivating .......................214
Function/notes .................................... 211
EU general operating permit number ....446
Exterior lighting
Care .................................................... 392
Exterior lighting
see Lights
F
Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Fault message
see Display message
Favourites
Adding .................................................293
Calling up ............................................ 293
Deleting ............................................... 294
Moving ................................................ 293
Overview ............................................. 292
Renaming ............................................ 293
Fill level
AdBlue®............................................... 280
Filling station search
Starting automatic search .................... 312
Switching automatic search on/off ..... 318
Fire extinguisher ..................................... 399
First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 398
Flacon
Inserting/removing ............................. 165
Flat towing
see Tow-bar system
Flat tyre ....................................................399
MOExtended tyres ............................... 400
Notes .................................................. 399
TIREFIT kit ...........................................401
Wheel change ...................................... 434
Floor mats ................................................ 139
Fog light (extended range) ......................146
Foil covering
Radar sensors .....................................209
Fragrance
see Fragrance system
Fragrance system .................................... 165
Inserting/removing theflacon .............165
Setting ................................................. 165
Free software ............................................ 34
Frequencies
Mobile phone ...................................... 445
Two-way radio .....................................445
Frequency band
Dialling (on-board computer) ...............284
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .....42
Front passenger seat
see Seat
Front wheel arch ..................................... 152
Fitting/removing the cover .................. 152
Front wheel arch cover
Fitting/removing ................................. 152
Fuel ...........................................................451
Additives .............................................. 451
Diesel .................................................. 451
E10 ...................................................... 450
Fuel reserve ........................................ 452
552 Index
Low outside temperatures ...................451
Petrol ................................................... 450
Quality (diesel) ..................................... 451
Quality (petrol) .................................... 450
Refuelling ............................................. 193
Sulphur content ................................... 450
Tank content ....................................... 452
Fuel consumption
On-board computer .............................281
Function seat
see Door control panel
Fuses ......................................................... 417
Before replacing a fuse ........................ 417
Fuse assignment diagram .................... 417
Fuse box in the boot ............................419
Fuse box in the engine compartment ... 418
Fuse box in the front passenger foot‐
well ...................................................... 419
Fuse box on the dashboard .................. 419
Notes ................................................... 417
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ........................... 203
Opening or closing the door ................203
Programming buttons .......................... 201
Radio equipment approval numbers .... 204
Resolving problems ............................. 202
Synchronising therolling code ............ 202
Gearshift recommendation ............ 187, 190
General operating permit number
(EU) ...........................................................446
Genuine parts ............................................ 22
Glide mode ............................................... 191
Glove box
Locking/unlocking .............................. 122
H
Handbrake
see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 420
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 90
Hazard warning lights .............................144
Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically) .............112
Rear (adjusting) .................................... 113
Rear (fitting/removing) ........................ 114
Head-up display ....................................... 286
Adjusting display elements (on-board
computer) ............................................ 286
Adjusting the brightness (on-board
computer) ............................................ 286
Function .............................................. 286
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 286
Setting the position (on-board com‐
puter) .................................................. 286
Switching on/off ................................. 287
Headlamp flasher ....................................143
Heating
see Climate control
High beam
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................146
Switching on/off ................................. 143
High-pressure cleaner (care) .................. 387
Hill Start Assist ....................................... 237
HOLD function ......................................... 238
Function/notes ................................... 238
Switching on/off ................................. 238
Hooking the luggage net .........................126
Index 553
I
i-Size child seat securing system
Fitting .................................................... 64
Seats suitable for attaching ................... 63
Identification plate
Engine ................................................. 446
Vehicle ................................................ 446
Ignition
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 172
Ignition key
see Key
Immobiliser .............................................. 102
Implied warranty
Vehicle ................................................... 31
Increase in traffic information volume
Setting .................................................375
Indicator lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Individual drive program
Configuring .......................................... 185
Selecting ............................................. 185
Inspection
see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster
see Instrument display
Instrument display ..................................275
Adjusting the lighting .......................... 280
Function/notes ................................... 275
Instrument cluster ................................. 10
Setting the additional value range ....... 279
Warning/indicator lamps .....................519
Instrument lighting .................................280
Intelligent Light System .........................144
Active headlamps ................................ 145
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................146
Adverseweather light .......................... 146
City lighting .........................................146
Cornering light ..................................... 145
Fog light (extended range) ................... 146
Motorway mode ................................... 145
Overview ............................................. 144
Switching on/off ................................. 146
Interior lighting .......................................150
Ambient lighting .................................. 150
Reading light ........................................ 150
Setting ................................................. 150
Switch-off delay time ........................... 151
Interior protection
Function .............................................. 104
Priming/deactivating ........................... 105
Intermediate destination
Calculating a route with intermediate
destinations .........................................313
Entering ............................................... 312
Modifying ............................................. 313
Starting an automatic filling station
search .................................................. 312
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search ........................................... 318
Internet
Calling up a web page .........................359
Closing the browser ............................. 361
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 360
Deleting browser data .........................360
Managing bookmarks .......................... 360
Internet connection
Cancelling permission (mobile
phone) .................................................358
Communication module function ........355
554 Index
Connection status ...............................358
Displaying the connection status ........ 358
Editing access data (Bluetooth®) .........357
Establishing .........................................358
Information .......................................... 355
Mobile phone details ...........................358
Restrictions ......................................... 355
Setting access data (Bluetooth®) ........ 356
Setting up (Bluetooth®) .......................356
Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 356
Switching Bluetooth®profile (DUN/
PAN) .................................................... 357
Internet radio
Calling up ............................................. 361
Deleting stations .................................362
Logging out ......................................... 362
Overview .............................................. 361
Registering .......................................... 362
Saving stations .................................... 362
Selecting and connecting to astation
.............................................................362
Selecting stream .................................362
Setting options ....................................362
Terms of use ........................................362
Ionisation
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 165
iPhone®
see Apple CarPlay™
see Mercedes-Benz Link
ISOFIX child seat securing system
Fitting .................................................... 64
Seats suitable for attaching ................... 60
J
Jack
Declaration of conformity ...................... 28
Storage location ..................................433
Jump-start connection ............................ 409
General notes ...................................... 407
K
Key.............................................................. 77
Acoustic locking verification signal ........ 78
Battery .................................................. 79
Emergency key ...................................... 79
Energy consumption .............................. 79
Features ................................................ 77
Keyring attachment .............................. 79
Overview ............................................... 77
Panic alarm ............................................ 78
Problem .................................................81
Unlocking setting ...................................78
Key functions
Deactivating .......................................... 79
KEYLESS-GO
Locking thevehicle ................................ 84
Problem .................................................85
Unlocking setting ...................................78
Unlocking thevehicle ............................84
Kickdown.................................................. 191
Using ................................................... 191
Knee airbag ................................................ 42
L
Lamp
see Interior lighting
Lamps (instrument display)
see Warning/indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Index 555
Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language .................................................. 301
Notes ................................................... 301
Setting .................................................301
LED light
see Intelligent Light System
Level control system
see AIRMATIC
Light switch
Overview .............................................. 141
Lighting
see Interior lighting
see Lights
Lights ........................................................ 141
Active headlamps ................................ 145
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................146
Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 280
Adverseweather light .......................... 146
Automatic driving lights ....................... 142
Changing bulbs .................................... 151
City lighting .........................................146
Combination switch .............................143
Cornering light ..................................... 145
Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped
beam) ................................................... 141
Fog light (extended range) ................... 146
Hazard warning lights .......................... 144
Headlamp flasher ................................ 143
Headlamp range .................................. 142
High beam ........................................... 143
Intelligent Light System ....................... 144
Light switch .........................................141
Low beam ............................................ 141
Motorway mode ................................... 145
Parking lights .......................................141
Rear fog light ....................................... 141
Responsibility for lighting systems .......141
Setting the dipped beam ..................... 149
Setting theexterior lighting switch-
off delay time ...................................... 149
Setting the surround lighting ...............149
Standing lights .....................................141
Turn signal lights ................................. 143
Limiter ...................................................... 222
Activating ............................................ 223
Buttons ................................................ 223
Calling up a speed ............................... 223
Deactivating ........................................ 223
Function .............................................. 222
Passive mode ...................................... 222
Permanent setting ...............................225
Requirements: .....................................223
Selecting ............................................. 223
Setting a speed ................................... 223
Storing a speed ................................... 223
System limitations ...............................222
Limiting speed
see Limiter
Live Traffic Information
Displaying subscription information .... 325
Displaying the traffic map ...................325
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 326
Extending a subscription ..................... 325
Issuing hazard alerts ........................... 327
Registering on Mercedes me ............... 325
Loading ..................................................... 126
Bag hook ............................................. 126
Notes ................................................... 121
Roof rack ............................................. 130
Stowage space under the boot floor ....130
Tie-down eyes ...................................... 126
Loading guidelines .................................. 121
556 Index
Loads
Securing .............................................. 121
Locator lighting
see Surround lighting
Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto‐
matic locking feature .............................85
Additional door lock ...............................81
Digital Vehicle Keysticker ..................... 83
Emergency key ...................................... 86
KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 84
Mobile phone ........................................83
Smartphone .......................................... 83
Unlocking/opening the doors from
the inside ..............................................82
Low beam
(symmetrical dipped beam) .................. 141
Switching on/off .................................. 141
Lubricant additives
see Additives
Luggage
Luggage net ......................................... 126
Securing .............................................. 121
Lumbar support
see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way).......................... 112
M
Main beam
Changing bulbs .................................... 152
Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................ 243
Restraint system ................................... 36
Manual transmission
Operating thegearshift lever ............... 186
Map .......................................... 325, 327, 328
Avoiding an area ..................................330
Avoiding an area (overview) .................330
Changing an area ................................ 330
Deleting an area .................................. 331
Displaying Qibla .................................. 332
Displaying the compass ....................... 331
Displaying the map version .................330
Displaying the next intersecting
street ................................................... 329
Displaying the traffic map ...................325
Displaying weather information ...........332
Map data ............................................. 331
Moving ................................................ 328
Overview ............................................. 327
Selecting POI symbols ......................... 329
Selecting text information ................... 329
Selecting the map orientation .............329
Setting the map scale .......................... 328
Setting the map scale automatically ....332
Updating .............................................. 331
Map and compass
Overview .............................................327
Massage programmes
Overview .............................................. 114
Resetting the settings .......................... 115
Massage programs
Selecting the front seats ......................115
Massage settings
Resetting ..............................................115
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ........ 389
Maximum gross vehicle weight .............446
Index 557
Maximum speed
see Limiter
Mecca .......................................................332
Media
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 284
Searching ............................................ 367
Media display
Notes .................................................. 288
Media Interface
Activating ............................................ 367
Information .......................................... 367
Overview .............................................368
Media mode
Activating ............................................ 363
Media playback
Operating (on-board computer) ........... 284
Media search
Starting ...............................................367
Media source
Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 284
Memory function
Operating .............................................119
Outside mirror Calling up stored
settings ................................................ 119
Outside mirror Storing settings ......... 119
Seat Calling up stored settings ......... 119
Seat Storing settings ........................ 119
Steering wheel Calling up saved
settings ................................................ 119
Steering wheel Saving settings ......... 119
Menu (on-board computer)
Assistant display .................................. 281
Designs ............................................... 278
Head-up display ................................... 286
Media .................................................. 284
Navigation ...........................................283
Overview ............................................. 277
Radio ...................................................284
Service ................................................ 280
Telephone ............................................ 285
Trip ...................................................... 281
Mercedes me connect ............................ 349
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment .................................................... 350
Arranging a service appointment ........ 350
Call with the me button ....................... 350
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre ................................................. 349
Consenting to data transfer .................351
Information ..........................................348
Making a call via theoverhead con‐
trol panel ............................................. 349
Transferred data ..................................351
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Notes ................................................... 172
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐
tem........................................................... 352
Automatic emergency call ................... 352
Information .......................................... 352
Information on data transfer ............... 354
Manual emergency call ........................ 353
Overview ............................................. 352
Self-diagnosis (Russia) ........................ 354
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test
mode ...................................................354
Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ 344
Connecting .......................................... 344
Ending .................................................344
Overview ............................................. 344
Using ................................................... 344
558 Index
Mercedes-Benz service centre
see Qualified specialist workshop
Message (multifunction display)
see Display message
Message memory .................................... 463
Messages
see Text messages
Mirrors
see Outside mirrors
Mobile phone
Cancelling permission for Internet
connection ..........................................358
Damage detection (parked vehicle) ..... 207
Frequencies ......................................... 445
Locking thevehicle ................................ 83
Starting thevehicle .............................. 174
Transmission output (maximum) .........445
Unlocking thevehicle ............................83
Wireless charging ................................ 139
see Apple CarPlay™
Mobile phone
see Android Auto
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Second telephone
see Telephone
Mobile phone voice recognition
Starting ...............................................339
Stopping ..............................................339
Model series
see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tyres ..................................400
Motorway mode ....................................... 145
MULTIBEAM LED
see Intelligent Light System
Multifunction display
Overview of the displays ...................... 279
Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons .............................276
Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel
Multimedia system .................................288
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................209
Adjusting thevolume ...........................295
Central control elements ..................... 289
Configuring display settings ................297
Configuring drive program I ................. 185
Entering characters .............................295
Favourites ............................................ 292
Main functions .................................... 292
Overview .............................................288
Rear climate control ............................ 164
Restoring thefactory settings ............. 306
Standby mode function .......................208
Switching the sound on/off ................294
Multimedia system
see Touch Control
see Touchpad
N
Navigation
Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 306
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 283
Showing/hiding the menu ...................308
Switching on ........................................ 307
Updating the map data ........................ 331
Navigation
see Destination
see Destination entry
see Map
see Route
see Route guidance
Index 559
see Traffic information
Navigation announcements
Activating/deactivating .......................321
Adjusting thevolume ...........................322
Repeating ............................................ 322
Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 322
Navigation messages
On-board computer ............................. 283
Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 338
Connecting the mobile phone to the
multimedia system .............................. 338
Information .......................................... 338
Locking thevehicle (digital vehicle
keysticker) ............................................ 83
Locking thevehicle (mobile phone) .......83
Starting thevehicle (Digital Vehicle
Keysticker) .......................................... 174
Starting thevehicle (mobile phone) ..... 174
Switching Bluetooth®audio equip‐
ment .................................................... 372
Switching mobile phones .................... 338
Unlocking thevehicle (digital vehicle
keysticker) ............................................ 83
Unlocking thevehicle (mobile phone) ....83
Using a mobile phone .......................... 338
Neutral
Engaging .............................................. 189
NFC
see Near Field Communication (NFC)
Non-operational time
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................209
Standby mode function .......................208
O
Occupant safety
Pets in thevehicle ..................................76
Occupant safety
see Airbag
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
see PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
see Restraint system
see Seat belt
Odometer
see Total distance
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer ................................. 277
Assistant display menu ........................ 281
Displaying the service due date ........... 378
Head-up display menu .........................286
Media menu ........................................ 284
Menu designs ...................................... 278
Menu overview .................................... 277
Multifunction display ........................... 279
Navigation menu ................................. 283
Operating ............................................ 277
Radio menu .........................................284
Service menu ...................................... 280
Telephone menu .................................. 285
Trip menu ............................................ 281
On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
On-board electronics
Engine electronics ...............................444
Notes .................................................. 444
Two-way radios .................................... 444
Open-source software .............................. 34
560 Index
Opening the boot lid using your foot
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...........................90
Operating fluids
AdBlue®............................................... 453
Additives (fuel) .....................................451
Brake fluid ...........................................455
Coolant (engine) .................................. 456
Engine oil ............................................. 454
Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 451
Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 450
Notes .................................................. 448
Windscreen washer fluid .....................457
Operating safety
48 V on-board electrical system ............ 23
Declaration of conformity (electro‐
magnetic compatibility) ......................... 25
Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 28
Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 29
Declaration of conformity (wireless
vehicle components) ............................. 25
EQ Boost ............................................... 23
Information ............................................ 23
Operating system
see On-board computer
Outside mirrors ............................... 156, 157
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 157
Automatic mirrorfolding function ........ 159
Folding in/out .....................................156
Operating the memory function ........... 119
Parking position ...................................158
Setting ................................................. 156
Overhead control panel
Making calls (Mercedes me connect)
.............................................................349
Overview ................................................ 14
Owner's Manual
Vehicle equipment ................................. 23
Owner's Manual (digital) .......................... 20
P
Paint code ................................................ 446
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .........389
Panic alarm ................................................ 78
Activating/deactivating ......................... 78
Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof
Park position
Inserting .............................................. 189
Selecting automatically ....................... 189
Parking
see Electric parking brake
Parking aid
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 242
Activating ............................................ 246
Adjusting warning tones ...................... 247
Deactivating ........................................ 246
Function .............................................. 242
Problems ............................................. 243
Side impact protection ........................ 245
System limitations ...............................242
Parking assistance systems
see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake
see Electric parking brake
Parking lights ...........................................141
Parking position
Outside mirrors ................................... 158
Index 561
Storing the position of the passenger
outside mirror using reversegear ........ 159
Parking up ................................................ 208
PARKTRONIC
Malfunction ......................................... 243
PASSENGER AIR BAGstatus display
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Pedestrian protection
see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Perfume
see Fragrance system
Perfume vial
see Fragrance system
Permissible axle load .............................. 446
Permitted towing methods .....................411
Personalisation
see User profile
Petrol ........................................................ 450
Pets in the vehicle .....................................76
Phone book
see Contacts
PIN protection
Switching on/off .................................302
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 394
Playback options
Selecting ............................................. 366
POI
Selecting .............................................. 311
POI symbols
Selecting ............................................. 329
Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 172
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occupant
protection) .................................................49
Function ................................................ 49
PRE-SAFE®Sound ................................. 49
Reversing measures .............................. 50
PRE-SAFE®PLUS (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection plus) ................................ 50
Function ................................................ 50
Reversing measures .............................. 50
Preventative occupant protection sys‐
tem
see PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
Previous destinations
Selecting .............................................. 311
Programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Protection against collision ...................259
Protection of the environment
Notes ..................................................... 21
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ............ 21
Q
Qibla ......................................................... 332
QR code
Rescue card ...........................................31
Qualified specialist workshop ................. 30
R
Radar sensors
Foil covering ........................................ 209
562 Index
Radiator shutters
see AIRPANEL (Care)
Radio
Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 375
Activating/deactivating traffic
announcements ...................................375
Calling up a slide show ........................ 374
Calling up thestation list .....................374
Deleting channels ................................ 374
Direct frequency entry .........................374
Displaying information .........................375
Displaying radio text ............................ 375
Editing station presets .........................374
Frequency fix ....................................... 375
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 284
Moving stations ...................................374
Overview ............................................. 373
Searching forstations .......................... 374
Setting a channel .................................374
Setting station tracking .......................375
Setting the frequency band .................. 374
Setting the traffic information
service volume increase ...................... 375
Storing radio stations .......................... 374
Switching on ........................................ 372
Tagging music tracks ........................... 375
Radio stations
Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 284
Rain closing function
Sliding sunroof .................................... 100
Rain-closing feature
Side windows ........................................94
Range
AdBlue®............................................... 280
Displaying ............................................ 281
REACH regulation ...................................... 31
Reading light
see Interior lighting
Real wood (Care) .....................................394
Rear climate control
Setting ................................................. 164
Rear door (child safety lock) .....................74
Rear fog light
Switching on/off .................................142
Rear seat
see Seat
Rear seat belt
Status display ........................................ 41
Rear seat belt status display .................... 41
Rear window
Roller sunblind ...................................... 92
Rear window heater ................................. 161
Rear-view mirror
see Outside mirrors
Recycling
see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Reducing agent
see AdBlue®
Refuelling
Refuelling thevehicle ........................... 193
Topping up AdBlue®............................. 197
Registration
Vehicle .................................................. 30
Remote control (stationary heater/
ventilation)
Displays ............................................... 169
Problems ............................................. 170
Replacing the battery .......................... 169
Setting ................................................. 168
Index 563
Remote Online
Charging the battery ............................176
Cooling or heating thevehicle inte‐
rior .......................................................175
Starting thevehicle .............................. 176
Replacing a bulb
see Changing bulbs
Rescue card ............................................... 31
Reserve
Fuel ..................................................... 452
Reset function (multimedia system) .....306
Residual heat ...........................................164
Restoring (factory settings)
see Reset function (multimedia system)
Restraint system .......................................35
Basic instructions forchildren ...............51
Function in an accident ......................... 36
Functionality .......................................... 36
Malfunction ........................................... 36
Protection ..............................................35
Reduced protection ...............................35
Self-test ................................................. 36
Warning lamp ........................................ 36
Reversegear
Inserting .............................................. 189
Reversing camera .................................... 247
Care .................................................... 392
Function .............................................. 247
Opening the camera cover (360°
Camera) ..............................................254
Setting favourites (360° Camera) ........ 254
Switching automatic operation
on/off (360° Camera) .........................254
Reversing lights (changing bulbs) .........153
Rims (Care) .............................................. 392
Roll away protection
see HOLD function
Roller sunblind .......................................... 92
Rear window .......................................... 92
Side windows ........................................ 92
Roof lining (care) .....................................394
Roof load .................................................. 459
Roof rack
Attaching .............................................130
Loading ................................................ 130
Route .................................................315,318
Activating a commuter route ...............318
Calculating ...........................................315
Displaying destination information .......317
Planning ............................................... 312
Selecting a type ................................... 316
Selecting an alternative route .............. 318
Selecting notifications ......................... 317
Selecting options ................................. 317
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search ........................................... 318
Switching the automatic filling sta‐
tion search on/off ...............................318
With intermediate destinations ............ 313
Route guidance ........................................ 319
Cancelling ...........................................322
Changing direction .............................. 320
Destination reached ............................ 321
From an off-road location .................... 323
Lane recommendations ....................... 320
Notes ................................................... 319
Off-road ............................................... 323
To an off-road destination ...................322
Route-based speed adaptation
Displays in the instrument display .......236
564 Index
Function .............................................. 230
Route-based speed adjustment
Setting .................................................231
Run-flat characteristics
MOExtended tyres ............................... 400
Running-in notes...................................... 177
S
Safety systems
see Driving safety system
Safetyvest ............................................... 397
SD card
Inserting/removing ............................. 363
Seat ........................................... 106, 107, 123
4-way lumbar support .......................... 112
Adjusting (electrically) .......................... 112
Adjusting (manually and electrically) ... 109
Adjusting (mechanically and electri‐
cally) .................................................... 107
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ..................... 109
Backrest (rear) locking ........................ 125
Configuring the settings ....................... 114
Correct driver's seat position .............. 106
Folding the backrest (rear) back ..........124
Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 123
Massage programme overview .............114
Operating the memory function ........... 119
Resetting the settings .......................... 115
Setting options ...................................... 16
Workout programme overview .............114
Seat belt ............................................... 37,41
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment ............................................ 41
Adjusting the height .............................. 40
Care ....................................................394
Centre rear seat (releasing) ...................40
Fastening ............................................... 40
Protection ..............................................37
Rear seat belt status display .................. 41
Reduced protection ...............................38
Releasing ...............................................41
Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 41
Warning lamp .........................................41
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating ......................... 41
Function ................................................. 41
Seat belt tensioners
Activation .............................................. 36
Seat belt warning
see Seat belt
Seat cover (Care) .....................................394
Seat heater
Activating/deactivating .......................115
Seat ventilation
Activating/deactivating ........................ 116
Second telephone ...................................336
Connecting .......................................... 336
Features .............................................. 336
Selecting a gear
see Changing gears
Selector lever
see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff ............................................ 47
Sensors (Care) ......................................... 392
Service
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 280
Service
see ASSYST PLUS
Index 565
Service centre
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS
Service station search
Starting automatic search ................... 318
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting summer time .............................. 298
Setting the date format .......................... 299
Setting the distance unit ........................ 301
Setting the map scale
see Map
Shift paddles
see Steering wheel gearshift paddles
Shifting gears
Gearshift recommendation .......... 187, 190
Short messages
see Text messages
Side impact airbag .................................... 42
Side impact protection ...........................245
Side windows ............................................. 93
Automatic function ................................ 94
Child safety lock in therear ...................75
Closing .................................................. 93
Closing using thekey ............................ 95
Convenience closing ............................. 95
Convenience opening ............................95
Opening .................................................93
Opening with thekey .............................95
Problem .................................................96
Rain-closing feature ...............................94
Roller sunblind ...................................... 92
Sliding sunroof .......................................... 97
Automatic functions ............................ 100
Closing .................................................. 97
Closing using thekey ............................ 95
Opening .................................................97
Opening with thekey .............................95
Problem ............................................... 101
Rain closing function ...........................100
Smartphone
Locking thevehicle ................................ 83
Unlocking thevehicle ............................83
Smartphone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay™
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Telephone
Snow chains ............................................ 420
Socket (12 V) ............................................ 136
Front centre console ........................... 136
Rear .....................................................136
Socket (230 V) ......................................... 136
Rear .....................................................136
Software update ...................................... 304
Important system updates .................. 305
Information .......................................... 304
Performing .......................................... 305
Sound
PRE-SAFE®Sound ................................. 49
Wheels and tyres ................................. 420
Sound
see Burmester®surround sound system
see Tone settings
Sound settings
Adjusting the balance/fader ................376
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ................................................ 376
566 Index
Automatic volume adjustment .............376
Spare wheel
see Collapsible spare wheel
see Emergency spare wheel
Spectacles compartment .......................123
Speed limitation for winter tyres
Setting .................................................225
Speedometer
Digital .................................................. 281
Standby mode
Activating/deactivating .......................209
Function .............................................. 208
Standing lights ......................................... 141
Start/stop button
Parking thevehicle .............................. 199
Starting thevehicle .............................. 173
Switching on the power supply or
ignition ................................................ 172
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting assistance
see Jump-start connection
Starting the engine
see Vehicle
Starting-off aid
see Hill Start Assist
Station
Deleting ............................................... 374
Direct frequency entry ......................... 374
Frequency fix ....................................... 375
Moving .................................................374
Searching ............................................. 374
Setting ................................................. 374
Storing .................................................374
Station list
Calling up ............................................. 374
Station presets
Modifying ............................................. 374
Station tracking
Setting ................................................. 375
Stationary heater/ventilation
Displays (remote control) .................... 169
Problems (remote control) ................... 170
Replacing the battery (remote con‐
trol) ...................................................... 169
Setting (multimedia system) ................168
Setting (remote control) ...................... 168
Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 166
STEER CONTROL
Function/notes .................................... 215
Steering wheel .........................................276
Adjusting (electrically) .......................... 117
Adjusting (manually) ............................ 116
Buttons ................................................ 276
Operating the memory function ........... 119
Steering wheel heater .......................... 118
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 190
Steering wheel heater
Switching on/off .................................. 118
Stowage areas
see Loading
see Stowage compartment
Stowage compartment ........................... 122
Armrest ............................................... 122
Centre console .................................... 122
Door .................................................... 122
Glove box .............................................122
Rear armrest ........................................ 123
Spectacles compartment .................... 123
Index 567
Stowage compartments
see Loading
see Stowage compartment
Stowage space under the boot floor .....130
Sulphur content ...................................... 450
Sun visor
Operating ............................................ 159
Surround lighting .................................... 149
Setting ................................................. 149
Surround View
see 360° Camera
Suspension
Setting the suspension level (AIR‐
MATIC) .................................................241
Suspension
see AIRMATIC
Suspension level (AIRMATIC)
Setting .................................................241
SVHC (substances of very high con‐
cern)............................................................ 31
Switch-off delay time
Exterior ................................................ 149
Interior ................................................. 151
Switching the surround sound on/off
Burmester®surround sound system ....377
Synchronisation function
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 164
Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 164
System settings
Activating/deactivating PIN protec‐
tion ...................................................... 302
Reset function (multimedia system) ....306
Setting the distance unit ...................... 301
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 298
Setting the time zone .......................... 298
Setting the time/date format .............. 299
Switching transmission of thevehicle
position on/off .................................... 299
System settings
see Bluetooth®
see Data import/export
see Language
see Software update
see Wi-Fi
T
Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 392
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 21
Protection of the environment ............... 21
Tank content
AdBlue®............................................... 454
Fuel ..................................................... 452
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 452
Technical data
Axle load (trailer operation) ................. 461
Fastening points (trailer hitch) .............459
Information ......................................... 444
Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch) ..... 459
Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 459
Overhang dimension (trailer hitch) ...... 459
Tongue weight ...................................... 461
Towing capacity (trailer operation) ...... 460
Tyre pressure monitoring system ........ 425
Vehicle identification plate .................. 446
Telephone ........................................ 285, 334
Activating functions during a call ........ 339
Call and ringtone volume .....................339
Calls with several participants .............339
568 Index
Connecting a mobile phone (Near
Field Communication (NFC)) ...............338
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐
key) .....................................................335
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Simple Pairing) .................................... 335
De-authorising a mobile phone ............ 337
Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 337
Importing contacts ..............................341
Importing contacts (overview) .............341
Incoming call during an existing call .... 340
Information .......................................... 335
Interchanging mobile phones .............. 337
Locking thevehicle (mobile phone) .......83
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 285
Mobile phone voice recognition .......... 339
Notes .................................................. 332
Operating modes ................................. 335
Reception and transmission volume .... 338
Starting thevehicle (mobile phone) ..... 174
Switching mobile phones (Near Field
Communication (NFC)) ........................ 338
Telephone menu overview ...................334
Telephone operation ............................ 339
Unlocking thevehicle (mobile phone) ....83
Using Near Field Communication
(NFC) ................................................... 338
Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 139
Telephone
see Second telephone
Telephone number
Dialling (on-board computer) ...............285
Telephone operation
see Calls
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth®Telephony .......................... 335
Business telephony .............................335
Telephony operating modes
see Second telephone
Temperature .............................................161
Text messages ......................................... 343
Calling a message sender .................... 343
Configuring the displayedtext mes‐
sages ................................................... 343
Deleting ............................................... 343
Notes .................................................. 343
Options ................................................ 343
Read-aloud function ............................ 343
Reading ...............................................343
Through-loading feature
see Seat
Tie-downeyes .......................................... 126
Time
Manual time setting ............................. 299
Setting summer time ........................... 298
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 298
Setting the time zone .......................... 298
Setting the time/date format .............. 299
TIREFIT kit ................................................ 401
Declaration of conformity ...................... 29
Storage location ..................................401
Using ................................................... 401
Tone settings ...........................................375
Calling up the sound menu .................. 376
Information .......................................... 375
Tongue weight .......................................... 461
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
TopTether .................................................. 66
Index 569
Total distance .......................................... 281
Displaying ............................................ 281
Touch Control .......................................... 289
On-board computer ............................. 277
Operating ............................................ 289
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 290
Touchpad .................................................. 290
Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐
ation feedback .................................... 292
Operating ............................................ 290
Reading the handwriting recognition
aloud ................................................... 291
Selecting a station and track ...............292
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 291
Switching on/off ................................. 290
Tow-away protection
Function .............................................. 103
Priming/deactivating ........................... 104
Tow-bar system ........................................ 274
Tow-starting ............................................. 416
Towing away ............................................. 412
Towing eye
Installing .............................................. 416
Storage location ................................... 415
Towing methods .......................................411
Track
Selecting (audio mode) ....................... 366
Traffic announcements
Switching on/off .................................375
Traffic information .................................. 324
Displaying the traffic map ...................325
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 326
Extending a Live Traffic Information
subscription ........................................ 325
Issuing hazard warnings ...................... 327
Live Traffic Information ....................... 325
Overview ............................................. 324
Registering Live Traffic Information ..... 325
Traffic map
see Map
Trailer hitch
Axle load .............................................. 461
Bicycle rack ......................................... 272
Care .................................................... 392
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 270
Fastening points ..................................459
Folding the ball neck out/in ................269
General notes ...................................... 459
Mounting dimensions .......................... 459
Notes .................................................. 268
Overhang dimension ........................... 459
Socket ................................................. 270
Tongue weight ...................................... 461
Towing capacity ...................................460
Trailer operation
Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 263
Active Lane Keeping Assist ................. 265
Bicycle rack ......................................... 272
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 270
Folding the ball neck out/in ................269
Notes .................................................. 268
Socket ................................................. 270
Trailer stabilisation
Function/notes .................................... 214
Transferredvehicle data
Android Auto ....................................... 348
Apple CarPlay ................................... 348
Transmission (problem) .......................... 192
Transmission position display ................ 187
Transporting
Vehicle .................................................414
570 Index
Trim element (Care) .................................394
Trip
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 281
Trip computer
Displaying ............................................ 281
Resetting ............................................. 282
Trip distance ............................................ 281
Displaying ............................................ 281
Resetting ............................................. 282
Trip meter
see Trip distance
Turn signal indicator
see Turn signal lights
Turn signal lights .....................................143
Changing bulbs (front) ......................... 152
Changing bulbs (rear) .......................... 153
Switching on/off ................................. 143
Two phone mode
see Second telephone
Two-way radios
Frequencies ......................................... 445
Notes on installation ...........................444
Transmission output (maximum) .........445
Tyre inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit
Tyre pressure ........................................... 422
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring
system) ............................................... 423
Notes ................................................... 421
Restarting the tyre pressure loss
warning system ................................... 429
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................424
TIREFIT kit ...........................................401
Tyre pressure loss warning system
(function) ............................................. 429
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 423
Tyre pressure table .............................. 422
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function .............................................. 429
Restarting ............................................ 429
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Checking the tyre pressure ................. 423
Checking the tyre temperature ............ 423
Function .............................................. 423
Restarting ............................................ 424
Technical data ..................................... 425
Tyre pressure table ................................. 422
Tyre temperature
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring
system) ............................................... 423
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 423
Tyre tread ................................................. 420
Tyre-change tool kit
Overview .............................................433
Tyres
Changing hub caps .............................. 435
Checking .............................................420
Checking the tyre pressure (tyre
pressure monitoring system) ............... 423
Fitting .................................................. 438
Flat tyre ............................................... 399
Interchanging ...................................... 433
MOExtended tyres ...............................400
Noise ................................................... 420
Notes on fitting ................................... 430
Removing ............................................ 438
Replacing .................................... 430, 434
Restarting the tyre pressure loss
warning system ................................... 429
Index 571
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................424
Selection ............................................. 430
Snow chains ........................................ 420
Storing ................................................ 433
TIREFIT kit ...........................................401
Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 421
Tyre pressure loss warning system
(function) ............................................. 429
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 423
Tyre pressure table .............................. 422
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 420
U
Units of measurement
Setting .................................................301
Unlocking setting ...................................... 78
USB devices
Connecting .......................................... 366
USB port ...................................................137
User profile .............................................. 303
Creating .............................................. 303
Importing/exporting ...........................304
Options ................................................ 304
Setting ................................................. 303
V
Vehicle ...................................................... 175
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................209
Additional door lock ...............................81
Correct use ............................................ 31
Damage detection (parking) ................ 207
Data acquisition .....................................31
Data storage .......................................... 31
Diagnostics connection .........................29
Equipment ............................................. 23
Implied warranty .................................... 31
Locking (automatically) ......................... 85
Locking (digital vehicle keysticker) ....... 83
Locking (from the inside) ....................... 82
Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 84
Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 83
Locking/unlocking (emergency key) .....86
Lowering ............................................. 439
Parking up ...........................................208
QR code rescue card ............................. 31
Qualified specialist workshop ................30
Raising ................................................ 436
REACH regulation ..................................31
Registration ...........................................30
Standby mode function .......................208
Starting (Digital Vehicle Keysticker) .... 174
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 175
Starting (mobile phone) .......................174
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 176
Starting (start/stop button) .................173
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 199
Towing .................................................274
Unlocking (digital vehicle keysticker) .... 83
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................82
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................84
Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 83
Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 95
Vehicle data
Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 185
Roof load ............................................. 459
Transferring to Android Auto ............ 348
Transferring to Apple CarPlay ........... 348
Vehicle height ...................................... 457
Vehicle length ...................................... 457
Vehicle width ....................................... 457
572 Index
Wheelbase ...........................................457
Vehicle dimensions ................................. 457
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .................... 446
EU general operating permit number .. 446
Paint code ...........................................446
Permissible axle load ...........................446
Permissible gross mass .......................446
VIN ...................................................... 446
Vehicle interior
Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 175
Vehicle key
see Key
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle position
Switching transmission on/off ............ 299
Vehicle tool kit .........................................401
TIREFIT kit ...........................................401
Towing eye ...........................................415
Ventilating
Convenience opening ............................ 95
Ventilation
see Climate control
Vents
see Air vents
VIN ............................................................ 446
Identification plate .............................. 446
Seat ..................................................... 446
Windscreen ......................................... 446
Vision
Demisting windows .............................. 164
W
Warning lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Warning triangle
Removing ............................................ 398
Setting up ............................................ 398
Warning/indicator lamp
!ABS warning lamp .......................521
JBrake system warning lamp
(red) .....................................................524
JBrake system warning lamp
(yellow) ................................................ 523
?Coolant warning lamp .................529
#Electrical fault warning lamp .......529
;Engine diagnosis warning lamp ...528
åESP®OFF warning lamp .............. 523
÷ESP®warning lamp flashes .........522
÷ESP®warning lamp lights up .......522
8Fuel reserve warning lamp .......... 529
!Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied .......................... 525
6Restraint system warning lamp ...526
7Seat belt warning lamp flashes ...527
7Seat belt warning lamp lights
up ........................................................ 526
äSuspension warning lamp ...........528
ïTrailer tow hitch warning lamp .... 533
hTyre pressure monitoring sys‐
temwarning lamp flashes ...................532
Index 573
hTyre pressure monitoring sys‐
temwarning lamp lights up .................531
LWarning lamp for distance
warning function .................................. 527
ÙWarning lamp for electric power
steering ............................................... 533
!Yellow electric parking brake
indicator lamp is malfunctioning .........525
Warning/indicator lamps ........................ 519
Overview ..............................................519
PASSENGER AIR BAG .............................47
Warranty ..................................................... 31
Washer fluid
see Windscreen washer fluid
Washing by hand (care) .......................... 388
Water tank
see Air-water duct
Weather information ............................... 332
Web browser
Calling up a web page .........................359
Calling up options ............................... 360
Calling up the settings .........................360
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 360
Deleting browser data .........................360
Ending ..................................................361
Managing bookmarks .......................... 360
Overview ............................................. 359
Showing/hiding the menu ...................359
Website
Calling up ............................................ 359
Showing/hiding theweb browser
menu ................................................... 359
Wheel change
Fitting a new wheel .............................438
Lowering thevehicle ........................... 439
Preparation ......................................... 434
Raising thevehicle .............................. 436
Removing a wheel ...............................438
Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 435
Wheel change
see Emergency spare wheel
Wheel rotation .........................................433
Wheels
Care .................................................... 392
Changing hub caps .............................. 435
Checking ............................................. 420
Checking the tyre pressure (tyre
pressure monitoring system) ............... 423
Fitting .................................................. 438
Flat tyre ............................................... 399
Interchanging ...................................... 433
MOExtended tyres ...............................400
Noise ................................................... 420
Notes on fitting ................................... 430
Removing ............................................ 438
Replacing .................................... 430, 434
Restarting the tyre pressure loss
warning system ................................... 429
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐
ing system ...........................................424
Selection ............................................. 430
Snow chains ........................................ 420
Storing ................................................ 433
TIREFIT kit ...........................................401
Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 421
Tyre pressure loss warning system
(function) ............................................. 429
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 423
Tyre pressure table .............................. 422
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 420
574 Index
Wi-Fi .........................................................300
Overview ............................................. 300
Setting ................................................. 300
Setting up an Internet connection ....... 356
Window airbag ...........................................42
Windows
see Side windows
Windows (Care) .......................................392
Windscreen ..............................................161
Defrosting ............................................ 161
Windscreen
see Windscreen
see Windshield
Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 457
Notes ................................................... 457
Windscreen washer system
Topping up ...........................................386
Windscreen wipers
Changing the wiper blades .................. 155
Switching on/off ................................. 154
Windshield ............................................... 155
Changing the wiper blades .................. 155
Wing
see Front wheel arch
Winter operation
Snow chains ........................................ 420
Winter tyres
Setting the permanent speed limita‐
tion ...................................................... 225
Wiper blades
Care .................................................... 392
Replacing .............................................155
Wireless charging
Function/notes ................................... 138
Mobile phone ....................................... 139
Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ...................... 25
Workout program
Overview ..............................................114
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Index 575
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehi‐
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
Documentation team
Youare welcometoforward anyqueries or sug‐
gestions youmay have regarding this Owner's
Manual to thetechnical documentation team at
thefollowing address:
Daimler AG,HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart,Germany
©Daimler AG:not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehiclemanufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatalinjuries
if thefront passenger airbag is enabled
If thefront passenger front airbag is enabled,
achild on thefront passenger seat maybe
struck by thefront passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVERuse arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat withanENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG,DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYtothe
CHILD can occur.
Observe thechapter"Childreninthe vehicle". As at 07.01.18
Digital–inthe vehicleVehicle document walletDigital –onthe InternetDigital –asanApp
Familiarise yourself withthe con‐
tents of theOwner's Manual
directly via thevehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle"). Startwiththe quickguide,
discoveryour vehicle's highlights
or broaden your knowledgewith
useful tips.
Hereyou can find comprehen‐
sive informationabout operating
your vehicle and about services
and warranties in printed form.
Youcan find theOwner's Manual
on theMercedes-Benz home‐
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App
is available free-of-charge in
familiar App stores.
É2055842922Z102GËÍ
2055842922Z102
Apple®iOS AndroidTM
Order no. P205 1713 02 Part no. 205 5842922Z102
EditioJ2019-1a
C-Class Saloon
Owner'sManual
Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-BenzC-Class Saloon
25

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2019 - Audio - small display wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2019 - Audio - small display

Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2019 - Audio - small display Bedienungsanleitung - Holländisch - 605 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info